2018 Infiniti QX30 | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2018-qx30

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 538 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Infiniti QX30 Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18E0 0H15U0
Table of Contents



2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a

simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty. The car itself is important, but so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver,

and the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI — from the way it looks and drives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner's Manual immediately. It explains all of the features,

controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner's literature portfolio. Always carry it with you when you take your vehicle

to an INFINITI retailer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this vehicle, the

requirements to keep the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance Program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your

vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories prior to delivery. It is recommended that

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions

concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer

for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE

SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read this Owner's

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity

with controls and maintenance requirements,

assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

Important safety information reminders!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and complete trip for you

and your passengers!

•NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

•ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

•ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen

children should be seated in the rear

seat.

•ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle features

or taking other actions that could dis-

tract you.

•ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety features

to all occupants of the vehicle.

FOREWORD

•ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual

for important safety information.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. Be sure to read

“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differ-

ently from an ordinary passenger car be-

cause it has a higher center of gravity for

off-road use. As with other vehicles with

features of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

For additional information, refer to “On-

pavement and off-road driving precau-

tions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” and

“Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR

VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modifi-

cation could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting from modi-

fications may not be covered under INFINITI

warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-

nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the

port during normal driving, for example re-

mote insurance company monitoring, re-

mote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or en-

gine reprogramming, may cause

interference or damage to vehicle systems.

We do not recommend or endorse the use

of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices,

unless specifically approved by INFINITI.

The vehicle warranty may not cover dam-

age caused by any aftermarket plug-in

device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all fea-

tures and equipment available on this model.

Features and equipment in your vehicle may

vary depending on model, trim level, options

selected, order, date of production, region or

availability. Therefore, you may find informa-

tion about features or equipment that are not

included or installed on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at the

time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right

to change performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without

obligation.

From time to time, INFINITI may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent to

you by INFINITI to ensure you have access to

accurate and up-to-date information regard-

ing your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle

Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also

be found in the Owner section of the

INFINITI website at https://

owners.infinitiusa.com/owners/navigation/

manualsandGuides. If you have questions

concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact INFINITI Consumer Affairs.

See the INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PRO-

GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual for con-

tact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moderate

personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures

must be followed carefully.

NOTE

Indicates additional helpful information.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the

front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illustra-

tion.

[]:

Square brackets are used to indicate mes-

sages, keys, or items displayed on a screen.

<>:

Chevrons or angle brackets are used to indi-

cate texts on controls like buttons or

switches inside or on the vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can

expose you to chemicals including engine

exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,

and lead, which are known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. To mini-

mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,

do not idle the engine except as necessary,

service your vehicle in a well-ventilated

area and wear gloves or wash your hands

frequently when servicing your vehicle. For

more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,

may contain perchlorate material. The fol-

lowing advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material - special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.”

The Bluetooth® word mark

and logos are registered

trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any

use of such marks by DENSO

CORPORATION is under li-

cense. Other trademarks and

trade names are those of their

respective owners.

SiriusXM® services require a

subscription after trial period

and are sold separately or as

a package. The satellite ser-

vice is available only in the 48

contiguous USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite service is

also available in Canada: see

www.siriusxm.ca

Required SiriusXM Satellite

Radio and SiriusXM Travel

Link monthly subscriptions

are sold separately. Sirius XM

Travel Link is only available in

select markets. For more in-

formation, see

www.siriusxm.com/travellink

“Made for iPod®” and “Made

for iPhone®” mean that an

electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifi-

cally to iPod® or iPhone®,

respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to

meet Apple performance

standards. Apple is not re-

sponsible for the operation of

this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory

standards. Please note that

the use of this accessory with

iPod® or iPhone® may affect

wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple logo,

iPhone®, iPod®, iPod clas-

sic®, iPod nano®, and iPod

touch ® are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

Lightning is a trademark of

Apple Inc. App Store is a ser-

vice mark of Apple Inc.

Music recognition technology

and related data are provided

by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music

recognition technology and

related content delivery. For

more information, visit

www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data

from Gracenote, Inc., copy-

right 䊊

c2000 to present

Gracenote. Gracenote Soft-

ware, copyright 䊊

c2000 to

present Gracenote. One or

more patents owned by

Gracenote apply to this prod-

uct and service. See the

Gracenote website for a non-

exhaustive list of applicable

Gracenote patents.

Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID,

MediaVOCS, the Gracenote

logo and logotype, and the

“Powered by Gracenote” logo

are either registered trade-

marks or trademarks of

Gracenote in the United

States and/or other countries.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,

or by any means, electronic, mechanical, pho-

tocopying, recording or otherwise, without

the prior written permission of Nissan Motor

Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide INFINITI directly

with comments or questions, please contact

our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

•Your name, address, and telephone num-

ber

•Vehicle identification number (on dash

panel)

•Date of purchase

•Current odometer reading

•Your INFINITI retailer’s name

•Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the informa-

tion on the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa. com

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.center@nissancanada. com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and

thank you for buying a quality INFINITI

vehicle.

Table of contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and Schedules

Technical information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ........................0-2

Exterior front ........................0-3

Exterior rear .........................0-4

Passenger compartment .................0-5

Cockpit ............................0-6

Instrument panel ......................0-7

Meters and gauges.....................0-8

Engine compartment ...................0-9

2.0L Gasoline engine .................0-9

Warning and indicator lights ..............0-10

1. Rear seat belts (Page. 1-7)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side impact and

rollover supplemental air bags (P. 1-38)

4. Front seat belts (P.1-10)

5. Seat belt pretensioners (P.1-54)

6. Air bag warning label (P.1-55)

7. Driver Supplemental front-impact air bag

(P. 1-38)

8. Passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag (P.1-38)

9. Top tether strap anchors (P.1-23)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)/ ISOFIX child restraint system

(P. 1-21)

11. Rear seats (P.1-5)

— Child restraints (P.1-19)

12. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-7)

13. Front seat-mounted side impact supple-

mental air bags (P.1-38)

14. Front seats (P.1-3)

— Occupant Classification System (OCS)

(P. 1-46)

15. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-46)

16. Driver and passenger supplemental knee

air bags (P.1-38)

*: if equipped

NIC2847

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P.2-73)

2. Windshield wipers and washers

— Switch operation (P.2-60)

— Blade replacement (P.8-13)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-8)

— Windshield de-icer* (P.2-63)

3. Recovery hook (P.6-14)

4. Front fog lights (P.2-70)

5. Headlights

— Switch operation (P.8-23)

6. Turn signal lights (P.2-66, 8-22)

— Side turn signal light (P.8-22)

Mirrors

— Adjustment (P.3-19)

*: if equipped

NIC2837

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P.4-53)

2. High-mounted stop light (Bulb replace-

ment) (P.8-22)

3. Rear window defroster (P.2-63)

4. Rear window wiper and washer

— Operation (P.2-62)

— Wiper blade replacement (P.2-13)

5. Recovery hook (P.6-15)

6. Lift gate (P.3-7)

— Intelligent Key system (P.6-4)

7. Rear view camera* (P.4-17)

8. Rear reflector

9. Rear combination lights (P.8-24)

10. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-16)

— Fuel information (P.8-2)

*: if equipped

NIC2836

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Rear armrest* (P.1-7)

2. Rear personal lights (P.2-87)

3. Overhead control panel (P.2-76)

4. Sunshade switch* (P.2-76)

5. Sun visor (P.2-18)

6. Security system buttons (P.3-59)

7. Interior rear-view mirror (P.3-18)

8. Door handle (P.3-6)

9. Door armrest

— Power windows controls (P.2-73)

— Exterior rear view mirror remote control

switch (P.2-18)

10. Front cup holders (P.2-80)

11. Air conditioner controls (P.4-43)

12. Glove box/storage (P.2-79)

*: if equipped

NIC2701

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Turn signal, wiper, washer, and high beam

switch (P.2-66, 2-60)

2. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side) (P.2-15)

3. Ignition switch (P.5-15)

— Push button ignition switch* (P.5-16)

4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side) (P.4-3)

5. Light switch

— Headlight (P.2-64)

— Fog light (P.2-70)

6. Parking brake (P.3-27)

7. Cruise Control switch

— Cruise Control (P.5-46)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (P.2-49)

8. USB connection ports (P.4-4)

9. Shift lever (P.5-21)

10. Front cup holders (P.2-80)

11. INFINITI controller (P.4-2)

NIC2649

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

1. Ventilators (P.4-42)

2. Center display* (P.4-4)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

4. Light switch (P.2-64)

5. Parking brake (P.3-27)

6. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P.5-90)

— Horn (P. 2-71)

— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air

bag (P.1-38)

7. Audio system (P.4-53)

8. Ignition switch (P.5-15)

— Push button ignition switch* (P.5-16)

9. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-43)

10. Switch panel

— Seat heater switches* (P.2-72)

— Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2)

— Idle Stop/Start system on/off switch

(P. 6-30)

— Front passenger air bag status light

(P.6-46)

11. Vehicle Information Display (P.2-15)

12. Glove box (P.2-79)

13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-38)

*: if equipped

NIC2898

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

1. Speedometer (P.2-4)

2. Vehicle information display (P.2-15)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-15)

3. Upper information display (P.2-15)

4. Tachometer (P.2-6)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-6)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)

NIC2651

METERS AND GAUGES

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-3)

2. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-5)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-5)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-7)

5. Engine air cleaner filter (P.8-13)

6. Battery (P.8-9)

7. Fuse box (P.8-17)

8. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-8)

NIC2833

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Light Name Page Light Name Page Light Name Page

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

2-8 Seat belt (driver and front pas-

senger) warning light

2-11 High beam assist indicator

light *

2-14

Brake warning light (red) 2-11 Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem (SRS) air bag warning light

2-12 High beam indicator light 2-14

Low tire pressure warning

light*

2-9 Low fuel warning light 2-13 Rear fog light indicator light 2-14

Malfunction indicator light

(yellow)

2-10 Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

2-13 Side light indicator light 2-14

Distance warning light* 2-11 Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

2-13 Front passenger air bag status

light**

2-14

Electric parking brake warning

light (red)

2-11 Low beam indicator light 2-14

Electric parking brake warning

light (yellow)

2-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

2-13

Coolant warning light 2-13 Front fog light indicator light* 2-14 *: if equipped

**: located above heater and air condi-

tioner controls

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ..............................1-2

Front seats ........................1-3

Rear seats.........................1-5

Armrest (if equipped) ..................1-7

Head restraints/Headrests ................1-7

Adjustable head restraint components.......1-8

Remove ..........................1-8

Install............................1-9

Adjust ...........................1-9

Seat belts ..........................1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage ..........1-10

Pregnant women ...................1-12

Injured persons.....................1-13

Seat belt warning light ................1-13

Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . .1-13

Seat belt extenders ..................1-16

Seat belt maintenance ................1-16

Child safety .........................1-17

Infants ..........................1-18

Small children......................1-18

Larger children .....................1-18

Child restraints .......................1-19

Precautions on child restraints ...........1-20

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH .........................1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts ......................1-25

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH ......................1-27

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ..................1-30

Booster seats .....................1-35

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........1-38

Precautions on Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ......................1-38

Supplemental air bag systems ...........1-44

Supplemental air bag warning labels .......1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light ........1-55

Repair and replacement procedure ........1-56

WARNING

•The seatback should not be reclined any

more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and be-

ing injured is increased.

•For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and up-

right in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat properly. (See

"Seat belts" later in this section.)

•After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or death

to people and pets.

•Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls or move the

vehicle. Unattended children could be-

come involved in serious accidents.

•Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of control

of the vehicle.

CAUTION

•When moving the seats forward or

backward, or returning a reclined seat-

back to its upright position, make sure

you hold onto the seatback while oper-

ating. If the seatback is not held, the

seat or seatback may move suddenly

and could cause injury.

•When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

SSS0133AZ

SEATS

1-2 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT SEATS

Manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

Pull the lever 䊊

1up and hold it while sliding

the seat forward or backward to the pre-

ferred position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

Seat cushion angle (if equipped):

Adjust the angles so that your thighs are

lightly supported. Turn handwheel 䊊

2for-

wards or backwards.

Seat lifter (if equipped):

Repeatedly pull up or push down the adjust-

ing lever 䊊

3, to adjust the seat height to the

desired position.

Seatback angle:

Relieve the pressure on the seatback and turn

handwheel 䊊

4forwards or backwards.

The reclining feature allows the adjustment

of the seatback for occupants of different

sizes to help obtain the proper seat belt fit.

(See "Seat belts" later in this section.)

The seatback may be reclined to allow occu-

pants to rest when the vehicle is parked.

Lumbar support:

The lumbar support feature provides lower

back support to the driver.

Push each side of the adjusting switch to

adjust the seat lumbar area until the desired

position is achieved.

䊊

1To raise the seatback contour

䊊

2To soften the seatback contour

䊊

3To lower the seatback contour

䊊

4To harden the seatback contour

Power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

•The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during the seat adjustment, wait 30

seconds, then reactivate the switch.

NIC2605 NIC2607

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

•To avoid discharge of the battery, do not

operate the power seats for a long period

of time when the engine is not running.

NOTE

You can store the seat settings using the

memory function (see " Memory function (if

equipped)" in the "2. Instruments and con-

trols" section).

Forward and backward:

Move the adjusting switch 䊊

1forward or

backward as shown to move the seat to the

desired position.

Reclining:

Move the adjusting switch 䊊

2forward or

backward as shown to move the seatback to

the desired position.

The reclining feature allows the adjustment

of the seatback for occupants of different

sizes to help obtain the proper seat belt fit.

(See "Seat belts" later in this section.)

The seatback may be reclined to allow occu-

pants to rest when the vehicle is parked.

Seat lifter (if equipped):

1. Pull up or push down the adjusting switch

䊊

3as shown to adjust the seat height until

the desired position is achieved.

2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch 䊊

4as

shown to adjust the front angle of the

seat until the desired position is achieved.

NIC2606

1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Lumbar support:

The lumbar support feature provides lower

back support to the driver.

Push each side of the adjusting switch to

adjust the seat lumbar area until the desired

position is achieved.

䊊

1To raise the seatback contour

䊊

2To soften the seatback contour

䊊

3To lower the seatback contour

䊊

4To harden the seatback contour

REAR SEATS

WARNING

•Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury or death in

an accident or sudden stop.

•Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

•Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in

your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat

belt properly.

•Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

•Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

–Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

–Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

•Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may provide

significant protection against injury in

an accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

•If the head restraints/headrests are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

•When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an accident

or sudden stop.

NIC2607

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Folding

The luggage compartment loading capacity

can be increased by folding the rear seat-

backs forward.

To fold the seatback:

1. Ensure head restraints are properly

stowed, see "Head restraints/Headrests"

later in this section.

2. Release the seatback lock by pulling the

release handle as shown.

3. Fold the seatback forward as shown.

4. Insert the seat belt into the seat belt

holder as shown.

To return the seatback to an upright posi-

tion:

1. Make sure the seat belts are clear of the

seatback latch mechanism.

2. Lift the seatback up and push firmly to

lock.

3. If the red marker is visible then the seat-

back has not latched properly — release

and then re-latch the seat.

4. If the head restraint/headrest was re-

moved, reinstall and properly adjust the

head restraint/headrest before an occu-

pant uses the seating position. See "Head

restraints/Headrests" later in this section.

WARNING

Always use the seat belt holder, and ensure

that the seat belt is not trapped in the seat-

back latch mechanism. Failure to do so may

cause damage to the seat belt, and this may

increase the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

NPA1293 NIC2669

1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED)

Rear

Pull the tab and draw the armrest 䊊

1forward

as shown until it is horizontal.

Indicates that the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates that the seating position is

equipped with a non-removable head rest.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head restraint/

headrest has been removed. If the head

restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall

and properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the seat-

ing position. Failure to follow these in-

structions can reduce the effectiveness of

the head restraints/headrests. This may

increase the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

•Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints/headrests that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

•Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk to

lock them in a desired adjustment position.

•The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

•Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the cen-

ter of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place the

head restraint/headrest at the highest

position.

NIC2611 NPA1500

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

•If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

NOTE

For vehicles with sports seats you cannot

adjust the front head restraints/headrests

or the outer rear head restraints/headrests.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-

erly in a secure place so it is not loose in

the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

SSS0992Z SSS1037Z

1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure that

the head restraint/headrest is facing the

correct direction. The stalk with the ad-

justment notch 䊊

1must be installed in the

hole with the lock knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/ headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the rec-

ommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is po-

sitioned from the stored position or any non-

latch position so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS1038Z SSS0997Z SSS1035Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob 䊊

1and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is po-

sitioned so the lock knob is engaged in the

notch before riding in that designated seating

position.

Fore-aft

This function allows you to adjust the dis-

tance between the head restraint/headrest

and the back of the head.

•To move forwards: pull the head restraint/

headrest forwards in the direction of the

arrow until it engages. There are a number

of detents.

•To move backwards: press and hold but-

ton 䊊

1and push the head restraint/

headrest backwards.

•When the head restraint/headrest is in the

desired position, release the button and

make sure that the head restraint/

headrest is engaged in position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat, your chances of being in-

jured or killed in an accident and/or the se-

verity of injury may be greatly reduced.

INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of

your passengers to buckle up every time you

drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS1036Z NIC2610

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

•Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Children should be in the rear seats and

in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0134AZ

Sit upright and well back

SSS0136AZ

Sit upright and well back

SSS0016Z

SSS0014Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

•The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

•Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back, un-

der your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

•Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in an

accident.

•Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

•Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-

tiveness.

•Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

•Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

•If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned ON

with all doors closed and all seat belts

fastened, it may indicate a malfunction

in the system. Have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

•No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material or install de-

vices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

•Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-

vated, they cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

•All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any collision. It

is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

INFINITI recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was minor

and the belts show no damage and con-

tinue to operate properly. Seat belt as-

semblies not in use during a collision

should also be inspected and replaced if

either damage or improper operation is

noted.

•All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations. The

child restraints should be replaced if

they are damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women

use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn

snug, and always position the lap belt as low

as possible around the hips, not the waist.

Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder

and across your chest. Never put the lap/

shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Con-

tact your doctor for specific recommenda-

tions.

1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

The seat belt warning light reminds you to

fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates if

the engine is started, all doors are closed and

the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat

belt is unfastened. It will remain illuminated

until the driver and/or front passenger fas-

tens their seat belt. A chime will sound once

the vehicle is in motion.

If the seat belt warning light flashes, together

with an intermittent warning tone, this means

that the driver or passenger has not fastened

their seat belt, and the speed of the vehicle is

exceeding 15 MPH (25 km/h).

For additional information, refer to "Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders"

in the "2. Instruments and controls" section.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

•Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Children should be in the rear seats and

in an appropriate restraint.

•Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you could be

thrown into it and receive neck or other

serious injuries. You could also slide un-

der the lap belt and receive serious inter-

nal injuries.

•For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and up-

right in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

•Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously injured

NIC2743

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

or killed if the seat belt retracts and be-

comes tight. This can occur even if the

vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt

to release the child. If the seat belt can-

not be unbuckled or is already unbuck-

led, release the child by cutting the seat

belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife

or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See "Seats" earlier in this

section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-

tor and insert the tongue into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

•The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the belt to

move and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

•If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your

shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two

modes of operation:

•Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

•Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend

and retract to allow the driver and passen-

gers some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle

slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

SSS0292Z SSS0290Z

1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

belt cannot be extended again until the seat

belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the

ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts.

For additional information, refer to "Child

restraints" later in this section. The ALR mode

should be used only for child restraint instal-

lation. During normal seat belt use by an oc-

cupant, the ALR mode should not be acti-

vated. If it is activated, it may cause

uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also

change the operation of the front passenger

air bag. For additional information, refer to

"Front passenger air bag and status light" in

the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system" section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not com-

pletely secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on

the buckle and guide the seat belt as it auto-

matically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

•When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

•When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

•Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service, or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

SSS0326Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Shoulder belt height adjustment (if

equipped)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position that is best for you.

(See "Fastening the seat belts " earlier in this

section).

•To adjust, push the button 䊊

Aas shown

and then move the shoulder belt anchor to

the desired position so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off of your shoulder. Re-

lease the adjustment button to lock the

shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

•After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and then try to move the

shoulder belt down to make sure that it

is securely fixed in position.

•The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position that is best

for you. Failure to do so may reduce the

effectiveness of the entire restraint sys-

tem and increase the chance or severity

of injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder

belt and fasten it, an extender that is compat-

ible with the installed seat belts is available

that can be purchased. The extender adds

approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and

may be used for either the driver or front

passenger seating position. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for as-

sistance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

•Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should be

used with the INFINITI seat belts.

•Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an ex-

tender. Such unnecessary use could re-

sult in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

•Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

•To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are com-

pletely dry.

SSS0896Z

1-16 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

•If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide

of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt

guide with a clean, dry cloth.

•Periodically check to see that the seat belt

and the metal components, such as buck-

les, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and

anchors, work properly. If loose parts, de-

terioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are equipped

with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes

wrapped around a child’s neck with the

ALR mode activated, the child can be seri-

ously injured or killed if the seat belt re-

tracts and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the

seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt

can not be unbuckled or is already unbuck-

led, release the child by cutting the seat

belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available

from many other sources, including doctors,

teachers, government traffic safety offices,

and community organizations. Every child is

different, so be sure to learn the best way to

transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

•Rear-facing child restraint

•Forward-facing child restraint

•Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and

less than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in

rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing

child restraints are available for children who

outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are

at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to

help position a vehicle lap/ shoulder belt on a

child who can no longer use a forward-facing

child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may come

too close to the face or neck. The lap belt

may not fit over their small hip bones. In an

accident, an improperly fitting seat belt

could cause serious or fatal injury. Always

use appropriate child restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. See

"Child restraints" in the "1. Safety — seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system"

section for more information.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle

by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor

and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the

vehicle seat belt. For additional information,

refer to "Child restraints" in the "1. Safety —

seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system" section.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and

children be restrained in the rear seat. Stud-

ies show that children are safer when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

This is especially important because your ve-

hicle has a supplemental restraint system

(air bag system) for the front passenger.

(See "Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)" later in this section.)

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

INFINITI recommends that infants be placed

in child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should

choose a child restraint which fits your ve-

hicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-

facing child restraint as long as possible up to

the height or weight limit of the child re-

straint. Children who outgrow the height or

weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint

and are at least 1 year old should be secured

in a forward-facing child restraint with a har-

ness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for minimum and maximum weight and

height recommendations. INFINITI recom-

mends that small children be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose

a child restraint that fits your vehicle and

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they reach

the maximum height or weight limit allowed

by the child restraint manufacturer.

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may

not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs

(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat

should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing

child restraint, INFINITI recommends that

the child be placed in a commercially available

booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For

a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat

should raise the child so that the shoulder belt

is properly positioned across the chest and

the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The

shoulder belt should not cross the neck or

face and should not fall off the shoulder. The

lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips

or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions that

have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

1-18 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A booster seat should be used until the child

can pass the seat belt fit test below:

•Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

•Is the child able to sit without slouching?

•Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

•Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and

shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoul-

der)?

•Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

•Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these questions,

the child should remain in a booster seat us-

ing a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using the

correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or killed

in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0099Z

WRS0256Z

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

•Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in se-

rious injury or death of a child or other

passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

–The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

–Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

–Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

–INFINITI

recommends that all child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat. If you must

install a forward-facing child restraint

in the front seat, see "Forward-facing

child restraint installation using the

seat belts" in the "1. Safety — seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint

system" section.

–Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

–Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

–Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

–Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

–A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

–Keep seatbacks as upright as possible

after fitting the child restraint.

–Infants and children should always be

placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

–When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH sys-

tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or

collision, loose objects can injure oc-

cupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot. Check

the seating surface and buckles before

placing your child in a child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system. Some child restraints in-

clude rigid or webbing-mounted attachments

that can be connected to these anchors.

For details, see "LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system" in the "1. Safety

— seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system" section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Several manufacturers offer child restraints

for infants and small children of various sizes.

When selecting any child restraint, keep the

following points in mind:

•Choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

•Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

•If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is com-

patible with your child. Choose a child re-

straint that is designed for your child’s

height and weight. Always follow all rec-

ommended procedures.

•If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lb (29.5 kg),

you may use either the LATCH anchors or

the seat belt to install the child restraint

(not both at the same time).

•If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lb (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

•Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation.

NOTE

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is be-

ing operated. Canadian law requires the top

tether strap on front-facing child restraints

to be secured to the designated anchor point

on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system

compatible child restraints. This system may

also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX

compatible system. With this system, you do

not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure

the child restraint unless the combined

weight of the child and child restraint exceeds

65 lb (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and child restraint is greater than 65 lb

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of child

restraints could result in serious injury or

death of a child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

•Attach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown in

the illustration.

•Do not secure a child restraint in the cen-

ter rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

•Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area.

Feel to make sure there are no obstruc-

tions over the anchors such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material. The

child restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

the child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed using

the damaged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the

rear of the seat cushion near the seatback, as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback to

help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments

NIC2612

LATCH lower anchor locations

SSS0643Z

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

SSS0644Z

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

1-22 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

that can be connected to two anchors lo-

cated at certain seating positions in your ve-

hicle. With this system, you do not have to

use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint. Check your child restraint for a label

stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This

information may also be in the instructions

provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child re-

straints.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

•Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Un-

der no circumstances are they to be used

to attach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so

could damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not be

properly installed using the damaged

anchorage, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

•If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con-

tacts the top tether strap when it is at-

tached to the top tether anchor, remove

the cargo cover from the vehicle or se-

cure it on the cargo floor below its at-

tachment location. If the cargo cover is

not removed, it may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. A child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is dam-

aged.

•Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a col-

lision. A child could be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the top tether

strap is damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations for

LATCH:

䊊

1Top tether straps

䊊

2Anchor points

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only, as shown. Do not at-

tempt to install a child restraint in the center

position using the LATCH anchors.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

NIC2849

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the "Child safety" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section and "Child re-

straints" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system" section

before installing a child restraint. Do not use

the lower anchors if the combined weight of

the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lb

(29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child

and the child restraint is greater than 65 lb

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufactur-

er's instructions for installation. Follow these

steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in

the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove

any additional slack from the anchor at-

tachments. Press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child re-

straint with your hand to compress the

vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

tightening the webbing of the anchor at-

tachments.

WRS0801Z

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

WRS0802Z

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

LRS0673Z

Rear-facing — step 3

1-24 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see

if the LATCH attachment holds the re-

straint in place. If the restraint is not se-

cure, tighten the LATCH attachment as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try

a different child restraint or try installing

by using the vehicle seat belt (if appli-

cable). Not all child restraints fit in all types

of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

Rear-facing child restraints must not be

used on the front seats.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the "Child safety" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section and "Child re-

straints" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system" section

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lb (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lb (29.5 kg), use the vehicle

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer's instructions for in-

stallation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used

in the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat. Posi-

tion the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer's

instructions.

LRS0674Z

Rear-facing — step 4

WRS0256Z

Rear-facing — step 1

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the tongue engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when

the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

WRS0761Z

Rear-facing — step 2

LRS0669Z

Rear-facing — step 3

LRS0670Z

Rear-facing — step 4

1-26 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1

inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug

it forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint

is not secure, tighten the seat belt as nec-

essary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the "Child safety" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section and "Child re-

straints" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system" section

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lb (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lb (29.5 kg), use the vehicle

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer's instructions for in-

stallation.

WRS0762Z

Rear-facing — step 5

SSS0658Z

Rear-facing — step 6

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint in the rear seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap

and secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point. For additional information,

refer to "Installing top tether strap" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system" section.

Do not install child restraints that require

the use of a top tether strap in seating

positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. If the head restraint/

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest when the child re-

straint is removed. For additional infor-

mation about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, refer to "Head restraints/

Headrests" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system"

section. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint/

headrest and it is interfering with the

proper child restraint fit, try another seat-

ing position or a different child restraint.

SSS0645Z

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

SSS0646Z

Forward-rigid web-mounted — step 2

1-28 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove

any additional slack from the webbing of

the anchor attachments. Press down-

ward and rearward firmly in the center of

the child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of the

anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see

if the LATCH attachment holds the re-

straint in place. If the restraint is not se-

cure, tighten the LATCH attachment as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try

a different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 6.

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments. First,

secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard seating posi-

tions only).

SSS0647Z

Forward-facing — step 4

SSS0638Z

Forward-facing — step 6

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only, as shown. Do not at-

tempt to install a child restraint in the center

position using the LATCH anchors.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed using

the damaged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Outboard seating positions with removable

head restraints/headrests:

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest and store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest when the child re-

straint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer to

"Head restraints/Headrests" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point 䊊

2on the seatback behind the

child restraint as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

Outboard seating positions with fixed head

restraints/headrests:

1. If the child restraint has a single tether

strap, route the strap 䊊

1over the top of

the outer head restraint/headrest. If the

child restraint has two tether straps, route

them round each side of the outer head

restraint/headrest.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point 䊊

2on the seatback behind the

child restraint as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

If you have any questions when installing

a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the operation

of the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to "Front passen-

ger air bag and status light" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section.

NIC2849

1-30 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the "Child safety" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section and "Child re-

straints" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system" section

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lb (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lb (29.5 kg), use the vehicle

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer's instructions for in-

stallation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger

seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child re-

straints for infants must be used in the

rear-facing direction and, therefore,

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions. The back of the

child restraint should be secured against

the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust

or remove the head restraint/headrest to

obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the

head restraint/headrest is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional infor-

mation about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer

to "Head restraints/Headrests" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it

is interfering with the proper child re-

straint fit, try another seating position or a

different child restraint.

WRS0699Z

Forward-facing

(front passenger seat) — step 1

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the tongue engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions for belt routing. If

the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap

and secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point (rear seat installation only).

For additional information, refer to "In-

stalling top tether strap" in the "1. Safety —

seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system" section.

Do not install child restraints that require

the use of a top tether strap in seating

positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the

seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

WRS0680Z

Forward-facing — step 3

LRS0667Z

Forward-facing — step 4

LRS0668Z

Forward-facing — step 5

1-32 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with

your knee to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up on

the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1

inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug

it forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint

is not secure, tighten the seat belt as nec-

essary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. Either the

<PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator

light or <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF>

indicator light will illuminate depending

on the size of the child and the type of

child restraint used. See "Front passen-

ger air bag and status light" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system" section. After

the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

If necessary, system operation can be

checked by using a special tool. It is rec-

ommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. Until you have

WRS0681Z

Forward-facing — step 6

WRS0698Z

Forward-facing — step 8

SSS0676Z

Forward-facing — step 10

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

confirmed system operation, move the

child restraint to another position. See

"Troubleshooting" later in this section.

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed using

the damaged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Outboard seating positions with removable

head restraints/headrests:

1. If necessary raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest and store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest when the child re-

straint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer to

"Head restraints/Headrests" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point 䊊

2on the seatback behind the

child restraint as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

Outboard seating positions with fixed head

restraints/headrests:

1. If the child restraint has a single tether

strap, route the strap 䊊

1over the top of

the outer head restraint/headrest. If the

child restraint has two tether straps, route

them round each side of the outer head

restraint/headrest.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point 䊊

2on the seatback behind the

child restraint as shown.

NIC2848

Rear seat - Type A

NIC2903

Rear seat - Type B

1-34 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

Center seating position with adjustable

head restraint/headrest:

1. Raise the head restraint/headrest. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal

and installation, refer to "Head restraints/

Headrests" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system"

section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1under the

head restraint/head rest and over the

seatback, between the two head

restraint/headrest stalks as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point 䊊

2on the seatback behind the

child restraint as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions to remove

any slack.

If you have any questions when installing

a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly

increases:

•Make sure the shoulder portion of the

belt is away from the child's face and

neck and the lap portion of the belt does

not cross the stomach.

•Make sure the shoulder belt is not be-

hind the child or under the child’s arm.

•A booster seat must only be installed in a

seating position that has a lap/shoulder

belt.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in

mind:

•Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca-

nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213.

•Check the booster seat in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

•Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat 䊊

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

LRS0501Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat 䊊

2should be used.

•If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

the child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is be-

ing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats or

the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly

increases:

•Make sure the shoulder portion of the

belt is away from the child's face and

neck and the lap portion of the belt does

not cross the stomach.

•Make sure the shoulder belt is not be-

hind the child or under the child’s arm.

•A booster seat must only be installed in a

seating position that has a lap/shoulder

belt.

To avoid injury to a child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the "Child safety" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system" section, "Child restraints"

in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section and

"Booster seats" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system" sec-

tion before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in

the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0464Z LRS0455Z

1-36 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rearmost

position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct booster

seat fit. If the head restraint is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to rein-

stall the head restraint when the booster

seat is removed.

For additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal

and installation, refer to "Head restraints/

Headrests" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system"

section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it

is interfering with the proper booster seat

fit, try another seating position or a differ-

ent booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat

belt toward the retractor to take up extra

slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the top, middle portion of

the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the

booster seat manufacturer’s instructions

for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in "Precautions on seat belt

usage" earlier in this section.

WRS0699Z LRS0451Z

Rear center position

LRS0452Z

Rear outboard position

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch

in the ON position. Either the <PASSEN-

GER AIR BAGON> 䊊

1indicator light

or <PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF> 䊊

indicator light will illuminate depending on

the size of the child and the type of

booster seat used. See "Front passenger

air bag and status light" in the "1. Safety —

seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system" section.

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information con-

cerning the following systems:

•Driver and passenger supplemental front

impact air bags (INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System)

•Driver and passenger supplemental knee

air bags

•Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags

•Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

•Seat belts with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag

system

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head and

chest of the driver and front passenger in

certain frontal collisions.

Driver and passenger supplemental

knee air bags

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the driver's and passenger's knees in

certain collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest and pelvis areas of the

driver and front passenger in certain side-

impact collisions. The side air bag is designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in the out-

board seating positions in certain side-impact

or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the

curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. In a roll-

over, curtain air bags on both sides are de-

signed to inflate and remain inflated for a

short time.

NIC2740

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

1-38 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and front

passenger seat belts and is not a substitute

for them. Seat belts should always be cor-

rectly worn and the occupant seated a suit-

able distance away from the steering wheel,

instrument panel and front door finishers. For

additional information, see "Seat belts" earlier

in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON,

the air bag warning light will illuminate. The

air bag warning light will turn off within a

few seconds after the engine is started if the

system is operational. See "Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders" in the

"2. Instruments and controls" section for

further details.

WRS0031Z

Sit upright and well back

ARS1133Z

Sit upright and well back

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

WARNING

•The front-air bags ordinarily will not in-

flate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear the seat belts

to help reduce the risk or severity of in-

jury in accidents.

•The front passenger air bag will not in-

flate if the <PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF> indicator light is lit. For ad-

ditional information, refer to "Front

passenger air bag and status light" in

the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section.

•

The seat belts and the front-impact air

bags are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat. The

front air bags inflate with great force.

Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways, or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it when

it inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always properly

use the seat belts.

•The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

monitors the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage then inflates the air bags

as needed. Failure to properly wear seat

belts can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

•The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some con-

ditions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

"Front passenger air bag and status

light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system" sec-

tion.

•Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the steer-

ing wheel rim could increase the risk that

they are injured when the front air bag

inflates.

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-

tend their hands or face out of the window.

Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or

arms. Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the illustrations.

1-40 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

•Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. For additional in-

formation, refer to "Child restraints" in

the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section.

•Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

•The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or se-

verity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

SSS0100Z ARS1041Z

ARS1042Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

ARS1043Z

ARS1044Z

ARS1045Z

ARS1046Z

WRS0431Z

WRS0365Z

1-42 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

•The seat belts, the side air bags and cur-

tain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails. Do

not allow anyone sitting in the front

seats or rear outboard seats to extend

their hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown in

the previous illustrations.

•When sitting in the rear seats, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seats. If side air bags and curtain air

bags inflate, you may be seriously in-

jured. Be especially careful with chil-

dren, who should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of dangerous

riding positions are shown in the illus-

trations.

•Do not use seat covers on the front seat-

backs. They may interfere with the side

air bag inflation.

SSS0162Z

WRS0363Z

SSS0159Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

SYSTEMS

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag modules

6. Driver and passenger supplemental knee

air bags

7. Front door pressure sensors

8. Front seat belt with pretensioners

9. Satellite sensors

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

11. Rear seat belt with pretensioners

Infiniti Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger's INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items:

•If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do

not position the front passenger seat so

the child restraint contacts the instru-

ment panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the sys-

tem may determine the seat is occupied

and the passenger air bag may deploy in

a collision. For additional information

about installing and using child re-

straints, refer to "Child restraints" in the

"1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section.

NIC2754

1-44 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

•Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

•If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as de-

scribed in this section. It is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer to check the occupant

classification system.

•Until you have confirmed with a retailer

that your passenger seat occupant clas-

sification system is working properly,

position the occupants in the rear seat-

ing positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements un-

der U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada.

All of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed. The driver supplemental front-

impact air bag is located in the center of the

steering wheel. The front passenger supple-

mental front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front air

bags are designed to inflate in higher severity

frontal collisions, although they may inflate if

the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal

impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper front air bag

system operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensor and occupant classifica-

tion sensor (pressure sensor). Inflator opera-

tion is based on the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage for the driver. For the front

passenger, the occupant classification sensor

is also monitored. Based on information from

the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate

in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted

or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger

air bag may be automatically turned off un-

der some conditions, depending on the infor-

mation provided by the Occupation Classifi-

cation System Sensor. If the front passenger

air bag is OFF, the <PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF> indicator light will be illuminated.

For additional information, refer to "Front

passenger air bag and status light" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system" section. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper perfor-

mance of the system.

If a crash occurs in which the vehicle's air

bags deploy, by design the vehicle may not

restart. If this occurs, it is recommended that

you visit an INFINITI retailer for repair.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer to obtain information about

the system. If you are considering modifica-

tion of your vehicle due to a disability, you

may also contact INFINITI. Contact informa-

tion is contained in the front of this Owner's

Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the release

of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does

not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to

not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on the

face and chest of the front occupants. They

can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating front air bag may cause

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Even with INFINITI Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as prac-

tical away from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. The front air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the front occupants.

Because of this, the force of the front air bag

inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against, the

front air bag module during inflation. The

front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off a few seconds af-

ter the engine starts if the system is opera-

tional.

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or se-

verity of injury in an accident.

䊊

1<PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indi-

cator light

䊊

2<PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> in-

dicator light

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (pressure sen-

sor) that turns the front passenger air bag on

or off depending on the weight applied to the

front passenger seat. The indicator lights in-

form you whether the front passenger front

air bag is disabled or enabled.

Place the ignition in the ON position. The

system carries out a self-diagnosis.

NIC2740

1-46 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The <PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF> and <PAS-

SENGER AIRBAG ON> indicator lights will

light up simultaneously for approximately six

seconds.

The indicator lights display the status of the

front passenger front air bag:

•<PASSENGER AIRBAG ON> lights up: the

front passenger front air bag is enabled. If,

in the event of an accident, all deployment

criteria are met, the front passenger front

air bag is deployed.

•<PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> lights up:

the front passenger front air bag is dis-

abled. It will then not be deployed in the

event of an accident.

If the status of the front passenger front air

bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an

air bag display message appears in the ve-

hicle information display. When the front

passenger seat is occupied, always pay at-

tention to the <PASSENGER AIRBAG ON>

and <PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> indicator

lights. Be aware of the status of the front

passenger front air bag both before and dur-

ing the journey.

If neither the <PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF>

or the <PASSENGER AIRBAG ON> indicator

lights light up, or if either indicator light only

lights up intermittently during the journey, the

front passenger seat may not be used for a

child restraint. Use another seating position

for the child restraint. INFINITI recommends

that all child restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Preteen children should be seated in the

rear seat. For further information see

"Troubleshooting" later in this section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If

the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not

inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other

air bags in your vehicle are not part of this

system. The purpose of the regulation is to

help reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requiring

the air bag to be automatically turned OFF

under some conditions. Certain sensors are

used to meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this ve-

hicle is a pressure sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat

by weight. For example, if a child up to the

approximate size and weight of a one year

old is properly restrained is in the front pas-

senger seat, the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System is designed to turn the front passen-

ger air bag OFF. For a properly restrained

child who is larger than the approximate size

and weight of a one year old, the front pas-

senger air bag may or may not be automati-

cally turned OFF, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. After installing the child restraint and

positioning the child, place the ignition switch

in the ON position: if the <PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF> indicator light is illuminated, the

air bag is OFF. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG

ON> indicator light is illuminated, the air bag

will inflate in a crash. Front passenger seat

adult occupants who are properly seated and

using the seat belt as outlined in this manual

should not cause the front passenger air bag

to be automatically turned OFF. For small

adults it may be turned OFF, however if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by oth-

erwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by

the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear seat.

INFINITI also recommends that appropriate

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

child restraints and booster seats be properly

installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible,

the occupant classification sensor is designed

to operate as described above to turn the

front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations.

Failing to properly secure child restraints and

to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint

to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop.

This can also result in the passenger air bag

inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information about proper use and

installation, refer to "Child restraints" in the "1.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system" section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not to

inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object's weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sensor.

Other conditions could also result in air bag

inflation, such as if a child is standing on the

seat, or if two children are on the seat, con-

trary to the instructions in this manual. Al-

ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu-

pants are seated and restrained properly.

If the automatic front passenger air bag de-

activation system detects that:

•The front passenger seat is unoccupied,

the <PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> indica-

tor light lights up after the system self-test

and remains lit. This indicates that the

front passenger front air bag is disabled.

•The front passenger seat is occupied by a

properly restrained child up to the approxi-

mate size and weight of a one year old, the

<PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> indicator

light lights up after the system self-test

and remains lit. This indicates that the

front passenger front air bag is disabled.

If neither the <PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF> or the <PASSENGER AIRBAG ON>

indicator lights light up, or if either indica-

tor light only lights up intermittently during

the journey, the front passenger seat may

not be used for a child restraint. Use an-

other seating position for the child re-

straint. For further information see

"Troubleshooting" later in this section.

•The front passenger seat is occupied by a

properly restrained child who is larger than

the approximate size and weight of a one

year old, either the <PASSENGER AIR-

BAGON> or <PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF>

indicator light lights up and remains lit af-

ter the system self-test depending on the

result of the classification. The result of

the classification is dependent on, among

other factors, the child restraint system

and the child's build.

Move the front passenger seat as far back

as possible. See "Child restraints" earlier in

this section.

•The front passenger seat is occupied by a

person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager

or small adult), either the <PASSENGER

AIRBAG ON> or <PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF> indicator light lights up and remains

lit after the system self-test depending on

the result of the classification.

– If the <PASSENGER AIRBAGON> indi-

cator light lights up, move the front

passenger seat as far back as possible.

Alternatively, a person with a small

build can sit on a rear seat.

– If the <PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> in-

dicator light is lit, a person with a

smaller build should not use the front

passenger seat.

1-48 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

•The front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a build correspond-

ing to that of an adult, the <PASSENGER

AIRBAGON> indicator light lights up after

the system self-test and remains lit. This

indicates that the front passenger front air

bag is enabled.

If the automatic front passenger front air bag

deactivation system is malfunctioning, the

red restraint system warning light in the

combination meter and the <PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF> indicator light light up simul-

taneously. The front passenger front air bag

is disabled in this case and does not deploy

during an accident. Have the system checked

as soon as possible by qualified technicians. It

is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible causes/consequences and solutions

The <PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF>

indicator lamp lights up and

remains lit, even though the front

passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a build

corresponding to that of an adult

•Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front passenger seat are met (see "Front

passenger air bag" earlier in this section).

•If the <PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF> indicator light remains lit, the front passenger seat may not be used.

•Have the automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The <PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF>

indicator lamp does not light up

and/or does not stay on.

•Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint system.

•Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front passenger seat.

•When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front

passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

•Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.

•Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the seat.

•Have the automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

1-50 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

•Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

•Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

•No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

•Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle's electrical system, suspen-

sion system or front end structure. This

could affect proper operation of the

front air bag system.

•

Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury. Tam-

pering includes changes to the steering

wheel and the instrument panel assembly

by placing material over the steering wheel

pad and above the instrument panel or by

installing additional trim material around

the air bag system.

•Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

•Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classification

sensor (pressure sensor).

•No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

•It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

installation of electrical equipment. The

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

wiring harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the air bag

system.

•A cracked windshield should be replaced

immediately by a qualified repair facil-

ity. A cracked windshield could affect

the function of the supplemental air bag

system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air bag

system and guide the buyer to the appropri-

ate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain

air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of

the information, cautions and warnings in

this manual apply and must be followed. The

side air bags and curtain air bags are de-

signed to inflate in higher severity side colli-

sions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity impact. They are

designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in

certain side collisions. Curtain air bags are

also designed to inflate in certain types of

rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a re-

sult, certain vehicle movements (for example,

during severe off-roading) may cause the

curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain

air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, fol-

lowed by release of smoke. This smoke is not

harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care

should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help

to cushion the impact force to the head of

occupants in the front and rear outboard

seating positions in all rows. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and

the driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the side air bag.

Rear seat passengers should be seated as far

away as practical from the door finishers and

side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain

air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the occupants. Because of this, the force of

the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the occupant

is too close to, or is against, these air bag

modules during inflation. The side air bag will

deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a

short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags oper-

ate only when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position. After placing the ignition

switch in the ON position, the supplemental

air bag warning light illuminates. The

supplemental air bag warning light will turn

off a few seconds after the engine starts if

the system is operational.

WARNING

•Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.)

between the front door finisher and the

front seat. Such objects may become

SSS0978Z

1-52 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

dangerous projectiles and cause injury if

a side air bag inflates.

•Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

•No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag sys-

tems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

•Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or side panel. This could af-

fect proper operation of the curtain air

bag systems.

•Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the front seats

by placing material near the seatbacks

or by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the side air

bag.

•It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

installation of electrical equipment. The

SRS wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the side air

bag or curtain air bag systems.

Driver and passenger supplemental

knee air bags

The driver's knee air bag deploys under the

steering column, while the passenger's knee

air bag deploys under the glove box. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed. The driv-

er's and passenger's knee air bags are trig-

gered together with the front air bag. The

knee air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity fron-

tal impact. They may not inflate in certain

collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper knee air bag operation.

When a knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release of

smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does

not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly

The knee air bags help to cushion the impact

force on the knees of the driver and front

passenger. They can help reduce serious inju-

ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may

cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air

bag provides restraint to the lower body.

The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to

help protect the occupants. Because of this,

the force of the knee air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, this air bag module

during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over OR the knee

air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The knee air bags operate only when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off a few seconds af-

ter the engine starts if the system is opera-

tional.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WARNING

•Do not place any objects between the

knee bolster and the driver’s seat. Such

objects may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if a knee air bag

inflates.

•Right after inflation, the knee air bag

system components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn

yourself.

•No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the knee air bag system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental inflation

of the knee air bag system.

•Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system or sus-

pension system. This could affect proper

operation of the knee air bag system.

•Tampering with the knee air bag system

may result in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the driver knee

bolster or install additional trim material

around the knee air bag.

•It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

installation of electrical equipment. The

SRS wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the knee

air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the knee air bag

system and guide the buyer to the appropri-

ate sections in this manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

WARNING

•The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

•If the vehicle becomes involved in a col-

lision but pretensioner(s) are not acti-

vated, be sure to have the pretensioner

system checked and, if necessary, re-

placed. It is recommended that you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

•No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

•It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for installation of electrical equip-

ment. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

1-54 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

•If you need to dispose of the pretension-

er(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for this service. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with

the supplemental air bag system in certain

types of collisions. Working with the seat belt

retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the

seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved

in certain types of collisions, helping to re-

strain front seat and rear outboard occu-

pants. The pretensioner(s) are encased within

the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt

anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts. When pretension-

er(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud

noise may be heard. This smoke is not harm-

ful and does not indicate a fire. Care should

be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a history of

a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly. After the pretensioner(s)'s activa-

tion, load limiters allow the seat belt to re-

lease webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces

against the chest. The supplemental air bag

warning light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional in-

formation, refer to Supplemental air bag

warning light in this section. If the operation

of the supplemental air bag warning light

indicates there is a malfunction, have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service. When

selling your vehicle, we request that you in-

form the buyer about the pretensioner sys-

tem and guide the buyer to the appropriate

sections in this Owner's Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front

impact air bag system are placed in the ve-

hicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a

seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If

the air bag deploys, it may cause serious

injury or death.

SSS1016Z

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-

playing in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, pre-

tensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light will

turn off within a few seconds after the engine

is started, if the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing:

•The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

•The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

•The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or

pretensioner systems may not operate

properly. They must be checked and re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the front air bag, side

air bag, knee air bag, curtain air bag and/or

pretensioner systems will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

PROCEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are

designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis.

As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the

supplemental air bag warning light remains

illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, cur-

tain air bags, knee air bags, pretensioner(s)

and related parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The ig-

nition switch should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or

inside the vehicle.

WARNING

•Once a front air bag, side air bag, knee

air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated,

the air bag module will not function

again and must be replaced. Addition-

ally, the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module and

pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. However, the air

bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot

be repaired.

•The front air bag, side air bag, knee air

bag, curtain air bag systems and the

pretensioner system should be in-

spected if there is any damage to the

front end or side portion of the vehicle. It

SPA1097Z

1-56 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

•If you need to dispose of a supplemental

air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap

the vehicle, it is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal injury.

•If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your automatic front pas-

senger air bag deactivation system

should be checked to verify it is still

functioning correctly. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service. The system should be

checked even if no air bags deploy as a

result of the impact. Failure to verify

proper automatic front passenger air

bag deactivation system function may

result in an improper air bag deployment

resulting in injury or death.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ............................2-2

Instrument panel ......................2-3

Meters and gauges .....................2-4

Speedometer and odometer .............2-4

Outside temperature display .............2-5

Tachometer .......................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge .........2-6

Fuel gauge ........................2-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ...........................2-8

Checking lights .....................2-8

Warning lights ......................2-8

Indicator lights .....................2-13

Audible reminders ...................2-14

Vehicle information display ...............2-15

Menus and submenus ................2-16

Display Messages ...................2-29

Security system ......................2-59

Immobiliser .......................2-59

Anti-theft alarm system (if equipped).......2-59

Wiper and washer switch ................2-60

Switching the windshield wipers on/off .....2-61

Switching the rear window wiper on/off . . . .2-62

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ............................2-63

Windshield de-icer switch (if equipped) .......2-63

Headlight and turn signal switches ..........2-64

Headlight switch ...................2-64

Combination switch .................2-66

Adaptive front lighting system

(LED headlight only) (if equipped) .........2-67

High beam assist (LED headlight only)......2-68

Headlights misted up on the inside ........2-70

Instrument brightness control ...........2-70

Fog light switch (If so equipped)............2-70

Front fog lights ....................2-70

Rear fog light ......................2-71

Horn .............................2-71

Seat heating (if equipped) ................2-72

Windows ..........................2-73

Power windows ....................2-73

Fixed glass roof (if equipped) ..............2-76

Sunshade operation .................2-76

Clock .............................2-77

Adjusting time .....................2-77

Power outlet ........................2-78

Storage ...........................2-79

Glove box ........................2-79

Front console compartment ............2-79

Console box ......................2-80

Card holder.......................2-80

Cup holders ......................2-80

Coat hooks .......................2-81

Cargo tie-down hooks ................2-81

Luggage hooks ....................2-82

Front seat storage boxes (if equipped)......2-83

Map pocket (if equipped) ..............2-83

Storage nets (if equipped)..............2-83

Parcel shelf .......................2-84

Roof rack (if equipped)................2-84

Ski hatch (if equipped) ................2-85

Compartment under trunk floor ..........2-86

Interior lights ........................2-86

Front overhead control panel ...........2-86

Rear reading lights (if equipped) ..........2-87

Rear room light (if equipped) ............2-87

Vanity mirror lights ..................2-87

Luggage compartment light ............2-87

Battery saver system .................2-87

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if equipped) . .2-88

Programming HomeLink® .............2-88

Programming trouble diagnosis ..........2-90

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver .......................2-91

Clearing the programmed information ......2-91

If your vehicle is stolen ................2-91

1. Turn signal, wiper, washer, and high beam

switch (P.2-66, 2-60)

2. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side) (P.2-15)

3. Ignition switch (P.5-15)

— Push button ignition switch* (P.5-16)

4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side) (P.4-3)

5. Light switch

— Headlight (P.2-64)

— Fog light (P.2-70)

6. Parking brake (P.3-27)

7. Cruise Control switch

— Cruise Control (P.5-46)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (P.2-49)

8. USB connection ports (P.4-4)

9. Shift lever (P.5-21)

10. Front cup holders (P.2-80)

11. INFINITI controller (P.4-2)

NIC2649

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

1. Ventilators (P.4-42)

2. Center display* (P.4-4)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

4. Light switch (P.2-64)

5. Parking brake (P.3-27)

6. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P.5-90)

— Horn (P. 2-71)

— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air

bag (P.1-38)

7. Audio system (P.4-53)

8. Ignition switch (P.5-15)

— Push button ignition switch* (P.5-16)

9. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-43)

10. Switch panel

— Seat heater switches* (P.2-72)

— Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2)

— Idle Stop/Start system on/off switch

(P. 6-30)

— Front passenger air bag status light

(P.6-46)

11. Vehicle Information Display (P.2-15)

12. Glove box (P.2-79)

13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-38)

*: if equipped

NIC2898

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Speedometer (P.2-4)

2. Vehicle information display (P.2-15)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-15)

3. Upper information display (P.2-15)

4. Tachometer (P.2-6)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-6)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)

NOTE

The needle indicators may move slightly af-

ter the ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position. This is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

•For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened

with water. Never use a rough cloth, al-

cohol, thinner or any kind of solvent or

paper towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or cause discol-

oration to the lens.

•Do not spray any liquid such as water on

the meter lens. Spraying liquid may

cause the system to malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND

ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer

and odometer. The speedometer is located

on the right side of the meter cluster. The

odometer is located below the vehicle infor-

mation display.

NIC2651

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

The speedometer is divided into segments

䊊

1,䊊

2and 䊊

3only on vehicles with Intelligent

Cruise Control.

The segments in the speedometer indicate

which speed range is available (see "Displays

in the speedometer" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer are

displayed in the Vehicle Information Display

see "Vehicle information display" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

DISPLAY

You should pay special attention to road con-

ditions when temperatures are around freez-

ing point.

Bear in mind that the outside temperature

display indicates the measured air tempera-

ture and not the road surface temperature

Depending on the vehicle specification, the

outside temperature display is in either the

upper display or the main screen of the ve-

hicle information display. See "Vehicle infor-

mation display" in the "2. Instruments and

controls" section.

NIC2824Z NIC2824AZ

With segments

NSD659

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates the engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the

engine in the red zone.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine

speed. Operating the engine in the red zone

may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature. The engine coolant temperature is

within the normal range 䊊

1when the gauge

needle points within the zone shown in the

illustration. The engine coolant temperature

varies with the outside air temperature and

driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant temperature

near the hot (H) end of the normal range,

reduce vehicle speed to decrease tempera-

ture. If the gauge is over the normal range,

stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible.

If the engine is overheated, continued op-

eration of the vehicle may seriously dam-

age the engine. For additional information,

refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the

"6. In case of emergency" section for imme-

diate action required.

NIC2829 NIC2831

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate

fuel level in the tank when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, accelerating, or going up and down

hills due to movement of fuel in the tank.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi-

tion.

The low fuel warning appears on the

vehicle information display when the fuel

level in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

The arrow, , indicates that the fuel-filler

lid is located on the left side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

•If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible. Af-

ter a few driving trips. the light should

turn off. If the light remains on after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

•For additional information, refer to "

Malfunction Indicator light (MIL) (yel-

low)" in the "2. Instruments and con-

trols" section.

NIC2653

Instruments and controls 2-7

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Seat belt (driver and front passenger)

warning light

High beam assist indicator light *

Brake warning light (red) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air

bag warning light

High beam indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light* Low fuel warning light Rear fog light indicator light

Malfunction indicator light (yellow) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light

Side light indicator light

Distance warning light* Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Front passenger air bag status light**

Electric parking brake warning light (red) Low beam indicator light

Electric parking brake warning light (yel-

low)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF in-

dicator light

Coolant warning light Front fog light indicator light* *: if equipped

**: located above heater and air conditioner controls

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played in the vehicle information display be-

tween the speedometer and tachometer see

"Vehicle information display" in the "2. Instru-

ments and controls" section.

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if so

equipped) will come on, <BRAKE>, ,

, , , , , , ,

. These lights should go out within a few

seconds after starting the engine. If any light

fails to come on or operates in a way other

than described, it may indicate a burned out

bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the

system checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS

Also see "Vehicle information display" later in

this section.

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the ABS warning light illuminates to in-

dicate that the ABS is operational. The light

then turns off within a few seconds after the

engine is started.

If the ABS light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking

system is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

If the ABS warning light comes on while driv-

ing, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Observe the additional display mes-

sages (if any) in the vehicle information dis-

play. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-8 Instruments and controls

operates normally, but without anti-lock as-

sistance (see "Brake system" in the "5. Start-

ing and driving" section).

BRAKE warning light (red)

WARNING

•Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to

be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driving

it could be dangerous.

•Pressing the brake pedal when the igni-

tion switch is not in the ON position

and/or when the brake fluid level is low

may increase the stopping distance and

braking will require greater pedal effort

as well as pedal travel.

•If the brake fluid level is below the mini-

mum or MIN mark on the brake fluid res-

ervoir, do not drive until the brake sys-

tem has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light remains illuminated and

turns off when the engine is started. If the

light illuminates at any other time, it may

indicate that the brake system is not func-

tioning properly. If the BRAKE warning light

illuminates, stop the vehicle immediately and

contact an INFINITI retailer.

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Low tire pressure warning

light (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the

tire pressure of all its tires.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of

low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS

is not functioning properly.

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the Low tire pressure warming light illu-

minates to indicate that the system is opera-

tional. The light then tuns off within a few

seconds after the engine is started.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A

tire pressure warning message also appears

in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light il-

luminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located in

the driver's door opening, see "Tire and load-

ing information label" in the "9. Mainte-

nance and Schedules" section. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven

at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to acti-

vate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

The low tire pressure warning message ap-

pears each time the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position as long as the low tire

pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see "Vehicle in-

formation display" later in this section and

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service. The low

tire pressure warning does not appear if the

Instruments and controls 2-9

low tire pressure warning light illuminates to

indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see "Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "5. Start-

ing and driving" section.

WARNING

•Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

•If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch pushed ON, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

•If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Seri-

ous vehicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury or death. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the tire

placard, located in the driver's door

opening, to turn the low tire pressure

warning light off. If the light still illumi-

nates while driving after adjusting the

tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a replace-

ment tire as soon as possible.

•If a replacement tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced without a TPMS sen-

sor tire pressure will not be indicated,

the TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Have your ve-

hicle's tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-

tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for these services.

•Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

•The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

•If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of

less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS

may not operate correctly.

•Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to all four wheels correctly.

Malfunction Indicator light

(MIL) (yellow)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the yellow Malfunction Indicator

light illuminates. This means that the system

is operational.

If the yellow engine malfunction indicator

light lights up while the engine is running,

there may be a fault, for example:

•In the engine management

•In the fuel injection system

•In the exhaust system

•In the ignition system (for vehicles with

gasoline engines)

•In the fuel system

•In other monitored items, for example the

automatic transmission.

2-10 Instruments and controls

The emission limit values may be exceeded

and the engine may be running in emergency

mode.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the engine control system checked and

repaired as necessary could lead to poor

driveability, reduced fuel economy and

possible damage to the engine control

system.

Incorrect setting of the engine control system

may lead to non-compliance of local and na-

tional emission laws and regulations.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for this service.

Distance warning light (if

equipped)

This light illuminates if the distance to the

vehicle in front is too small for the speed

selected.

If a warning tone also sounds, you are ap-

proaching a vehicle or stationary obstacle in

your line of travel at too high a speed. For

additional information see " Forward emer-

gency braking (FEB) system (if equipped)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section.

Electric parking brake

warning light

The red indicator illuminates when the elec-

tric parking brake is engaged.

If the red indicator light for the electric park-

ing brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow

warning light for the electric parking brake is

lit, observe the additional messages dis-

played in the vehicle information display.

For further parking brake operation informa-

tion see "Parking brake" in the "3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments" section.

Seat belt (driver and front

passenger) warning light

The seat belt warning light reminds you to

fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates if

the engine is started, all doors are closed and

the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat

belt is unfastened. It will remain illuminated

until the driver and/or front passenger fas-

tens their seat belt. A chime will sound once

the vehicle is in motion, see "Seat belt re-

minder chime" later in this section. See "Seat

belts" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section for

precautions on seat belt usage.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if there are objects on the front passen-

ger seat. Remove the objects and stow them

in a safe place.

If the seat belt warning light flashes, together

with an intermittent warning tone, this means

that the driver or passenger has not fastened

their seat belt, and the speed of the vehicle is

exceeding 15 MPH (25 km/h).

Instruments and controls 2-11

Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) air bag

warning light

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the front air bag,

driver's knee air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag and/or pretensioner systems will

not operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your ve-

hicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible.

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) air bag warning light illuminates to in-

dicate that the system is operational. The

light then tuns off within a few seconds after

the engine is started.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, front seat-mounted side-

impact air bag, roof-mounted curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

•The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on for longer than a few seconds

once the engine is running.

•The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

•The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for these services. Unless checked and

repaired, the supplemental restraint system

(air bag system) and/or the pretensioner sys-

tems may not function properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to "Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)" in the "1. Safety —

seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system" section.

Coolant warning light

WARNING

If the coolant warning light is lit, the engine

may not be being cooled sufficiently and

may be damaged.

Never drive with an overheated engine.

Driving when your engine is overheated

can cause some fluids which may have

leaked into the engine compartment to

catch fire.

In addition, steam from an overheated en-

gine can cause serious burns, which can oc-

cur just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury

If the red coolant warning light lights up while

the engine is running and the coolant tem-

perature gauge is at the start of the scale, the

temperature sensor for the coolant tempera-

ture gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature

is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of

engine damage if the coolant temperature is

too high.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions, and switch

off the engine. Do not continue driving under

any circumstances.

Consult an INFINITI retailer.

If the red coolant warning light comes on

while the engine is running, with or without

an accompanying warning tone, it could

mean that:

•The coolant level is too low.

•If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to

the engine radiator may be blocked or the

electric engine radiator fan may be mal-

functioning.

•The coolant is too hot and the engine is no

longer being cooled sufficiently.

Observe the additional display messages in

the vehicle information display.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions, and switch

off the engine.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance

from the vehicle until the engine has cooled

down.

Check the coolant level and top up the cool-

ant, observing the warning notes (see "If your

vehicle overheats" in the "6. In case of emer-

gency" section).

If you have to top up the coolant frequently,

have the engine cooling system checked.

Make sure that the air supply to the engine

radiator is not blocked, e. g. by frozen slush.

Do not start the engine again until the cool-

ant temperature is below 250°F (120°C). The

engine may otherwise be damaged.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge

reaches 0 (Empty).

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

The VDC warning light blinks when the Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is oper-

ating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that

the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working, this

is normal.

The light will continue to blink for a few sec-

onds after the VDC system stops limiting

wheel spin.

Cruise control or Intelligent Cruise Control is

deactivated.

For additional information see " Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light " in

the "2. Instruments and controls" section and

"Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated. Both lights flash

when the hazard switch is turned on.

Low beam indicator light

This light comes on when the switch is turned

to the position: The headlights will come

on and front side, tail, number plate and in-

strument lights remain on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

The light comes on when the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) has been disabled. This

indicates that the VDC system is not operat-

ing.

Disabling the VDC system causes the For-

ward Emergency Braking system to become

unavailable. See " Forward emergency brak-

ing (FEB) system (if equipped)" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section for more details.

This light also comes on briefly when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 1

second if the VDC system is operational.

When the VDC OFF indicator light and VDC

warning light (see " Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light" later in this section)

come on with the VDC system turned on, it

alerts the driver to the fact that the system's

fail-safe mode is operating. This means that

the system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for these ser-

vices.

Instruments and controls 2-13

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the

VDC system function will be canceled, but

the vehicle is still driveable. For additional

information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system" in the "5. Starting and driving"

section.

WARNING

VDC should remain on unless freeing a ve-

hicle from mud or snow.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or ac-

celerating, but this is normal.

Front fog light indicator light (if

equipped)

The light comes on when the front fog lights

are switched on (see " Fog light switch (If so

equipped)" later in this section).

High beam assist indicator

light (if equipped)

The indicator light illuminates when the

headlights come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position with the high

beam selected. This indicates that the high

beam assist system is operational. (See

2-64.)

High beam indicator light

This blue light comes on when the headlight

high beams are on and goes out when the

low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Rear fog light indicator light

The light comes on when the rear fog light is

switched on (see " Fog light switch (If so

equipped)" later in this section).

Side light and headlight

indicator light

This light comes on when the side light or

headlight position is selected, see "Headlight

and turn signal switches" later in this section

for further details.

/ Front passenger air

bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (

) located on the center console above

the shift lever will illuminate when the front

passenger air bag is turned OFF. When the

front passenger air bag is turned on, the front

passenger air bag status light ON ( ) will

illuminate.

For more details, see "Front passenger air

bag and status light" in the "1. Safety — seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system"

section.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime will sound when driving away if the

parking brake has not been released. Stop the

vehicle and release the parking brake.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver's

door is opened if the side lights are on. Turn

the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder chime

A chime will sound for approximately 120

seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 16

2-14 Instruments and controls

MPH (25 km/h) and the driver's seat belt or

front passenger's seat belt, if occupied is not

securely fastened. See "Seat belt warning

light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section.

Idle Stop/Start System reminder

chime (if equipped)

The engine will shift to the normal stopped

state if any of the following operations is

made during Idle Stop/Start System activa-

tion, and the Idle Stop/Start System chime

will sound if:

– The vehicle engine hood is open.

When the above condition continues for over

3 minutes the Idle Stop/Start System chime

will sound in 5-minute intervals as a reminder

to prevent the possibility of a discharged bat-

tery. Use the ignition switch to turn off the

engine.

Close the hood or the driver’s door, or fasten

the seat belt then restart the engine using the

ignition switch.

For more information, see " Idle Stop/Start

System (if equipped)" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section. The vehicle information display 䊊

1is located

between the tachometer and the

speedometer.

NIC2751

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-15

䊊

1Permanent display: depending on vehicle

specification: outside temperature or

speed

䊊

2Time

䊊

3Text field

䊊

4Menu bar

䊊

5Drive program

䊊

6Shift lever position

Text field 䊊

3shows the selected menu or

submenu as well as display messages.

NOTE

Set the time using the INFINITI controller

and the [Settings] menu available in the cen-

tral display (see "Clock settings" in the "4.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner,

and audio system" section).

MENUS AND SUBMENUS

To call up the menu bar 䊊

4and select a menu,

press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel. Menu bar 䊊

4disappears after a

few seconds.

Depending on the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, you can call up the following menus:

•[Trip] menu

•[Navi] menu (navigation instructions)

•[Audio] menu

•[DriveAssist] menu

•[Serv.] menu

•[Settings] menu

The [Audio] and [Navi] menus differ slightly

in vehicles with an audio system and in ve-

hicles with a navigation system. The ex-

amples given in this Owner's Manual apply to

vehicles equipped with navigation.

[Trip] menu

Standard display:

Press and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel until the [Trip] menu with trip meter

䊊

1and total distance recorder 䊊

2is shown.

NIC2752 NIC2753

2-16 Instruments and controls

Trip computer [From start] or [From reset]:

䊊

1Distance

䊊

2Driving time

䊊

3Average speed

䊊

4Average fuel consumption

Press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the [Trip] menu.

Press the or button to select

[From start] or [From reset].

The values in the [From start] submenu are

calculated from the start of a journey whilst

the values in the [From reset] submenu are

calculated from the last time the submenu

was reset.

The [From start] trip computer is automati-

cally reset when:

•The ignition has been switched off for

more than four hours.

•999 hours have been exceeded.

•9999 kilometers have been exceeded.

The [From reset] trip computer is automati-

cally reset if the value exceeds 9999 hours or

99999 kilometers.

Displaying the range and current fuel con-

sumption:

Press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the [Trip] menu.

Press the or button to select

approximate range 䊊

1and current fuel con-

sumption 䊊

Approximate range 䊊

1that can be covered is

calculated according to your current driving

style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If

there is only a small amount of fuel left in the

fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being

refuelled instead of approximate range 䊊

NIC2711 NIC2713

Instruments and controls 2-17

Digital speedometer:

Press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the [Trip] menu.

Press the or button to select

digital speedometer 䊊

A gearshift recommendation 䊊

1can also be

displayed.

Observe the information on gearshift recom-

mendation 䊊

1for automatic transmission

(shifting manually) (see "Driving with Auto-

matic Transmission" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section).

Resetting values:

Press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the [Trip] menu.

Press the or button to select the

function that you wish to reset.

Press the <OK> button.

Select [Yes] and press <OK> to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following

functions:

•Trip meter

•[From start] trip computer

•[From reset] trip computer

Navigation menu ([Navi])

Displaying navigation instructions:

In the [Navi] menu, the vehicle information

display shows navigation instructions.

You can find further information on naviga-

tion in the audio system or navigation system

operating instructions.

Switch on the audio system or navigation

system.

Press the or button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the [Navi] menu.

NIC2714 NIC2718

2-18 Instruments and controls

Route guidance not active:

䊊

1Direction of travel

䊊

2Current road

Route guidance active — No change of di-

rection announced:

䊊

1Distance to the destination

䊊

2Distance to the next change of direction

䊊

3Symbol indicating "follow the road's

course".

䊊

4Current road

Route guidance active — Change of direc-

tion without lane recommendation:

䊊

1Road to which the change of direction

leads

䊊

2Distance to change of direction and vi-

sual distance display

䊊

3Change of direction symbol

When a change of direction is to be made,

you will see symbol 䊊

3for the change of

direction and distance graphic 䊊

2. This short-

ens towards the top of the display as you

approach the point of the announced change

of direction. The change of direction starts

once the distance display reaches zero.

NIC2719 NIC2720 NIC2721

Instruments and controls 2-19

Route guidance active — Change of direc-

tion announced with a lane recommenda-

tion:

䊊

1Road to which the change of direction

leads

䊊

2Distance to change of direction and vi-

sual distance display

䊊

3Recommended lane and new lane during

a change of direction

䊊

4Recommended lane

䊊

5Lanes not recommended

䊊

6Change of direction symbol

On multi-lane roads, new lane recommenda-

tions can be displayed for the next change of

direction if the digital map supports this data.

During the change of direction, new lanes

may be added.

Lane not recommended 䊊

5: you will not be

able to complete the next change of direction

if you stay in this lane.

Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction 䊊

3: in this lane you will be

able to complete the next two changes of

direction without changing lane.

Recommended lane 䊊

4: in this lane you will be

only able to complete the next change of

direction without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the navigation

system:

The navigation system displays additional in-

formation and the vehicle status. Possible

displays:

•[New route...] or [Calculating route...]

A new route is calculated.

•[Off map] or [Off road]

The vehicle position is outside of the area

of the digital map (off-map position).

•[No route]

No route could be calculated to the se-

lected destination.

•

You have reached the destination or an

intermediate destination.

NIC2838 NIC2723

2-20 Instruments and controls

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station:

䊊

1Frequency range

䊊

2Station frequency/name with memory

position

The memory position is only displayed along

with station 䊊

2if this has been stored.

1. Switch on the audio system or navigation

system and select Radio.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Audio] menu.

3. To select a stored station, briefly press

or .

4. To select a station from the station list,

press and briefly hold the or

button.

If no station list is received:

5. To elect a station using the station search:

press and briefly hold the or

button.

NOTE

DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-

ing) is an optimized digital transmission

standard designed for the cellular reception

of radio transmissions.

Audio player or audio media operation:

䊊

1Current track

Audio files from various audio players or me-

dia can be played, depending on the equip-

ment fitted in the vehicle.

1. Switch on the audio system or navigation

system and select audio CD or MP3 mode.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Audio] menu.

3. To select the next/previous track, briefly

press or .

4. To select a track from the track list (rapid

scrolling): press and hold the or

. button until the desired track has

been reached.

NIC2724 NIC2839

Instruments and controls 2-21

If you press and hold the or

button, the rapid scrolling speed is

increased. Not all audio players or media

support this function.

If track information is stored on the audio

player or media, the vehicle information dis-

play will show the number and title of the

track.

The current track does not appear in audio

AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external

audio source connected). Video DVD operation (outside Europe only):

It is only possible to use the [Audio] menu to

operate video DVDs on vehicles with naviga-

tion system.

1. Switch on the audio system or navigation

system and select video DVD.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Audio] menu.

3. To select the next or previous scene,

briefly press or .

4. To select a scene from the scene list (rapid

scrolling): press and hold the or

. button until the desired scene 䊊

has been reached.

Assistance menu

Depending on the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

[DriveAssist] menu:

•Showing the assistance graphic

•Activating/deactivating VDC

•Activating/deactivating Forward Emer-

gency Braking (FEB)

•Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Warn-

ing (BSW)

•Activating/deactivating Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)

NIC2726 NIC2873

2-22 Instruments and controls

Showing the distance display:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Distance display].

3. Press the <OK> button.

The vehicle information display shows the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) distance

display in the assistance graphic.

The distance display also shows you the

status of and/or information from the fol-

lowing driving systems or driving safety

systems:

•Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

•Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

•Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

•Rear window wiper

Deactivating/activating VDC:

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be

reduced even if the accelerator is depressed

to the floor. If maximum engine power is

needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC

system off.

For further information about VDC, see "Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in the

"5. Starting and driving" section.

1. Start the engine.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu.

3. Press the or button to select

[ESP].

4. Press the <OK> button.

The current selection is displayed.

5. To activate/deactivate: press the <OK>

button again.

VDC is deactivated if the warning

light in the combination meter lights up

continuously when the engine is running.

If both the warning light and

warning light are lit continuously, VDC is not

available due to a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating Forward Emer-

gency Braking:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Emergency Brake].

3. Press the <OK> button.

The current selection is displayed.

4. To activate/deactivate: press the <OK>

button again.

When Forward Emergency Braking is de-

activated, the symbol appears in the

vehicle information display in the assis-

tance graphic display.

For further information about Forward

Emergency Braking, see " Forward emer-

gency braking (FEB) system (if equipped)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section.

NIC2729

Instruments and controls 2-23

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Warn-

ing (BSW):

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Blind Spot Warning].

3. Press the <OK> button.

The current selection is displayed.

4. To activate/deactivate: press the <OK>

button again.

For further information about Blind Spot

Warning, see " Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

system (if equipped)" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section.

Activating/deactivating Lane Departure

Warning (LDW):

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu on the Menu bar.

2. Press the or button to select

[Lane Departure Warning].

3. Press the <OK> button on the steering

wheel. The current selection is displayed.

4. Press the <OK> to confirm.

5. Press the or button to set

[Off], [Standard] or [Adaptive].

6. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

For further information about Lane Depar-

ture Warning, see " Lane departure warning

(LDW) system (if equipped) " in the "5. Start-

ing and driving" section.

Service menu ([Serv.])

Depending on the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

[Serv.] menu:

•Calling up display messages in the mes-

sage memory (see "Message memory"

later in this section).

•Restarting the tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (see "Restarting TPMS" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section.

•Checking the tire pressure electronically

(see "Checking the tire pressure electroni-

cally" in the "5. Starting and driving" sec-

tion).

•Calling up the service due date (see "Main-

tenance service messages" in the "9. Main-

tenance and Schedules" section).

NIC2874

2-24 Instruments and controls

Settings menu

Depending on the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, in the [Settings] menu you have the

following options:

•Changing the instrument cluster settings.

•Changing the light setting.

•Changing the vehicle setting.

•Changing the convenience setting.

•Restoring the factory setting.

Instrument cluster:

Unit of measurement for distance: The Dis-

play unit Speed-/odometer function allows

you to choose whether certain displays ap-

pear in kilometers or miles in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Instrument Cluster] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Display Unit Speed-/Odometer]

function.

You will see the selected setting: [miles] or

[km].

5. Press the <OK> button to change the set-

ting.

The selected unit of measurement for dis-

tance applies to:

•Digital speedometer in the [Trip] menu.

•Total distance recorder and the trip meter.

•Trip computer.

•Current fuel consumption and approxi-

mate range.

•Navigation instructions in the [Navi] menu.

•Cruise control.

•Speed limiter.

•Intelligent cruise control (ICC).

•Maintenance service interval display.

Switching the additional speedometer on/

off.

The [Speedometer (mph)] or [Speedometer

(km/h)] function allows you to choose

whether the vehicle information display in the

status area shows the speed in MPH or in

km/h instead of the outside temperature.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Instrument Cluster] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Speedometer (mph)] or [Speedom-

eter (km/h)] function.

You will see the selected setting: [On] or

[off].

5. Press the <OK> button to change the set-

ting.

Selecting the permanent display function.

You can determine whether the vehicle infor-

mation display permanently shows the out-

side temperature or the speed in MPH.

NIC2731

Instruments and controls 2-25

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Instrument Cluster] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Outside Temperature] function.

You will see the selected setting: [outside

temperature] or [Speedometer (mph)].

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

Lights

Switching the Adaptive Front Lighting Sys-

tem on/off:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Light] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Adaptive front lighting system] func-

tion.

If the [Adaptive front lighting system]

function has been switched on, the cone

of light and the symbol in the vehicle

information display are shown in orange.

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

When you switch the [Adaptive front lighting

system] function on, you activate the follow-

ing functions:

•Freeway mode

•Active light function

•Cornering light function

If you set the low beam headlights for driving

on the right/left, the vehicle information dis-

play shows the [Adaptive front lighting sys-

tem: System Inoperative Inactive For Left-

side Traffic] or [Adaptive front lighting

system: System Inoperative Inactive for

Right-side Traffic] display message instead

of the [Adaptive front lighting] function in the

[Light] submenu.

For further information about the Adaptive

Front Lighting system, see " Adaptive front

lighting system (LED headlight only) (if

equipped)" later in this section

Setting the low beam headlights for driving

on the left/right:

This function is only available on vehicles with

the Adaptive Front Lighting System (see "

Adaptive front lighting system (LED head-

light only) (if equipped)" later in this section).

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Light] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Low-b. Headl. Setting For:] function.

You will see the selected setting: [Right-

side Traffic] or [Left-side Traffic].

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

If you change the setting, conversion does

not take place until the next time the ve-

hicle is stationary.

If you set the low beam headlights for driving

on the right/left, then freeway mode is un-

available. This is only deactivated if the set-

ting for driving on the left/right is set oppo-

site to your vehicle's country version.

An INFINITI retailer can set the low beam

headlights for driving on the left/right.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Setting the brightness of the ambient light-

ing:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Light] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Ambient Light Brightness] function.

You will see the selected setting.

5. Change the setting with <OK>.

If you change the setting, conversion does

not take place until the next time the ve-

hicle is stationary.

6. Press the or button to adjust

the brightness to a level from [Off] to

[Level 5] (bright).

7. Press the <OK> or button to save the

setting.

Activating/deactivating the surround

lighting and exterior lighting delayed

switch-off:

If you have activated the Surround lighting

function and the light switch is set to

<AUTO>, the following functions are acti-

vated when it is dark:

•Surround lighting: the exterior lighting re-

mains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking

with the key. If you start the engine, the

surround lighting is switched off and auto-

matic headlight mode is activated .

•Exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds

after the engine is switched off. If you

close all the doors and the lift gate, the

exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Light] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Surround Lighting] function.

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

When the [Surround Lighting] function is

activated, the light cone and the area

around the vehicle are displayed in orange

in the vehicle information display

6. Press the <OK> button to confirm the set-

ting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-

rior lighting temporarily:

1. Before leaving the vehicle, switch the igni-

tion switch to the OFF position.

2. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is

deactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is

reactivated the next time you start the en-

gine.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment,

when the surround lighting and delayed

switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-

lowing light up:

•Side lights

•Fog lights

•Low beam headlights

•Daytime driving lights

•Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Instruments and controls 2-27

Activating/deactivating the interior light-

ing delay:

If you activate the [Interior Lighting Delay]

function, the interior lighting remains on for

20 seconds after you remove the key from

the ignition lock.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Light] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Interior Lighting Delay] function. If

the [Interior lighting delayed switch-off]

function has been switched on, the vehicle

interior is displayed in orange in the ve-

hicle information display

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Setting permanent speed limiter:

You can set permanent speed limiter using

the [Limit Speed (Winter Tires)] function.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Vehicle] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Limit Speed (Winter Tires)] function.

You will see the selected setting.

5. Press <OK> to confirm.

6. Press the or button to adjust

permanent speed limiter in increments of

ten ([150 mph] to [100 mph]), [240

km/h] to [160 km/h]). The [Off] setting

switches permanent speed limiter off).

7. Press the <OK> or button to store

the entry.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic lock-

ing confirmation:

If you switch on the [Acoustic Lock Feed-

back] function, an acoustic signal sounds

when you lock the vehicle.

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Vehicle] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to select

the [Acoustic Lock Feedback] function.

If the [Acoustic Lock Feedback] function

is activated, the symbol in the ve-

hicle information display lights up orange.

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

Convenience

Switching the [Fold Mirrors in when Lock-

ing] function on/off:

This function is only available when the ve-

hicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in

function.

When you activate the [Fold Mirrors in when

Locking] function, the exterior mirrors are

folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you

unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's

or front passenger door, the exterior mirrors

fold out again.

If you have switched on the [Fold Mirrors in

when Locking] function and you fold in the

exterior mirrors using the button on the door

(see "Folding" in the "3. Pre-driving checks

and adjustments" section), they will not fold

out automatically. The exterior mirrors can

then only be folded out using the button on

the door.

2-28 Instruments and controls

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings]

menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Convenience] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

Press the or button to select the

[Fold Mirrors in when Locking] function.

If the [Fold Mirrors in when Locking]

function is activated, the vehicle's exterior

mirror is shown in orange in the vehicle

information display.

5. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

Resetting to factory settings

Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Settings] menu.

2. Press the or button to select

[Factory Setting] submenu.

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

The [Reset All Settings?] message appears.

4. Press the or button to select

[No] or [Yes].

ress the <OK> button to confirm the selec-

tion.

If you have selected [Yes], the vehicle in-

formation display shows a confirmation

message.

For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:

the [Limit Speed (Winter Tires)] function in

permanent speed limiter can only be set in the

[Vehicle] submenu.

If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights

function in the Lights submenu, you must switch

the ignition switch to the ACC position.

DISPLAY MESSAGES

Display messages appear in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

Display messages with graphic symbols are

simplified in the Owner's Manual and may

differ from the symbols in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

Certain display messages are accompanied

by an audible warning tone or a continuous

tone.

When the ignition is switched off, all display

messages are deleted apart from some high-

priority display messages. Once the causes of

the high-priority display messages have been

rectified, these display messages are deleted as

well.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please

observe the notes on parking (see "Parking" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section).

Hiding display messages

Press the <OK> or button to hide the

display message. The display message is hid-

den.

The vehicle information display shows high-

priority display messages in red. Some high-

priority display messages cannot be hidden.

The vehicle information display shows these

messages continuously until the causes for

the messages have been remedied.

Message memory

The vehicle information display saves certain

messages in the message memory. You can

call up these display messages:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Service]

menu.

If there are display messages, the vehicle

information display shows [2 messages],

for example.

2. Press the or button to select

the entry, e.g. [2 messages].

3. Press <OK> to confirm.

4. Press the or button to scroll

through the display messages.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Safety systems

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Currently Unavailable See

Operator's Manual]

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist System), VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control), and hill start assist are temporarily

unavailable.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) may also have failed.

In addition, the , and warning lights may light up in the combination meter.

Possible causes:

•Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

•The on-board voltage may be insufficient.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you

brake hard, for example.

The steering and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking

situation.

If VDC is not operational, VDC is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 12 MPH (20 km/h). If the display

message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed, drive on carefully and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Inoperative See

Operator's Manual]

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist System), VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control), and hill start assist are not available

due to a malfunction.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) may also have failed.

In addition, the , , and warning lights may light up in the combination meter.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you

brake hard, for example.

The steering and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking

situation.

If VDC is not operational, VDC is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully and have the system checked immediately. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Currently Unavailable

See Operator's Manual]

BAS (Brake Assist System), VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control), and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) may also have failed.

In addition, the and warning lights may light up in the combination meter.

The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.

The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

If VDC is not operational, VDC is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 12 MPH (20 km/h). If the display

message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed, drive on carefully and have the system checked. It is recommended you an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Inoperative See

Operator's Manual]

BAS (Brake Assist System), VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control), and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) may also have failed.

In addition, the and warning lights may light up in the combination meter.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.

The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

If VDC is not operational, VDC is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Inoperative See Opera-

tor's Manual]

EBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution) ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist System), VDC (Vehicle Dynamic

Control), and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) may also have failed.

A warning tone sounds.

In addition, the , and warning lights may light up in the combination meter.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore

lock if you brake hard, for example.

The steering and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking

situation.

If VDC is not operational, VDC is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully and have the system checked immediately. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Turn On The Ignition to

Release the Parking

Brake]

The red indicator light lights up.

You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.

Key: turn the key to the ON position in the ignition switch

2-32 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Please Release Parking

Brake]

The red indicator light flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not

fulfilled (see " Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section).

You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.

Release the electric parking brake manually.

The red indicator light flashes and a warning tone sounds.

You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (see "Emergency braking" in the "5. Starting and driving" section)

[Parking Brake See

Operator's Manual]

The yellow warning light lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

1. Switch the ignition off.

2. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.

3. Press the P (Park) button.

4. Have the system checked. It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

The yellow warning light and the red indicator light are lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

1. Switch the ignition off and turn it back on.

2. Release the electric parking brake manually.or

3. Release the electric parking brake automatically (see " Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission)" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: DO NOT drive on. It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

The yellow warning light is lit. The red indicator light flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

1. Switch the ignition off and turn it back on.

2. Release the electric parking brake manually.or

To apply:

1. Switch the ignition off and turn it back on.

2. Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red . indicator light continues to flash:

1 DO NOT drive on

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Press the P (Park) button.

4. Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

The yellow warning light is lit. The red indicator light flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been

applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

1. Switch the ignition off and turn it back on.

2. Apply the electric parking brake manually.If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

3. Press the P (Park) button.

It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

Release the electric parking brake automatically (see " Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission)" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section).

If the electric parking: brake still cannot be released, it is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

The yellow warning light is lit. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red indicator light flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

Insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away.

Press the P (Park) button, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically.

It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e. g. when washing the vehicle in an

automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed.

[Parking Brake

Inoperative]

The yellow warning light is lit. The red indicator light flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has

been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.

1. Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

2. Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released:

1. Switch the ignition off and turn it back on.

2. Apply or release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released, it is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

The yellow warning light is lit. The red indicator light flashes.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

1. Press the P (Park) button.

Consult an INFINITI retailer.

[Brake Immediately]

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.

You cannot start the engine.

1. Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away. You can restart the engine.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Check Brake Fluid Level]

There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the red warning light lights up in the combination meter and a warning tone sounds.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving

under any circumstances.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is necessary, add fluid and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service. See "Brake fluid" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section.

4. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

•Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe,

drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be

dangerous.

•Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

•If the brake fluid level is below the minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has

been checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Brake Pad Wear]

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Emergency Brake

Currently Unavailable See

Operator's Manual]

Forward Emergency Braking is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes:

•The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations

or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

•The system is outside the operating temperature range.

•The on-board voltage is too low.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.

Forward Emergency Braking is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Restart the engine.

[Emergency Brake Inop-

erative]

Forward Emergency Braking is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Radar Sensor (See

Operator's Manual):]

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:

•Forward Emergency Braking

•Intelligent Cruise Control

•Blind Spot Warning

Possible causes:

•The sensors in the radiator trim and/or at the sides of the rear bumpers are dirty.

•The function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. All driving systems/driving safety systems are operative

again.

If the display message does not disappear:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Switch off the engine.

4. Clean the sensors in the following locations:

- In the radiator trim

- At the sides of the rear bumper

5. Restart the engine. The display message disappears.

[SRS Malfunction Service

Required]

The restraint system needs servicing. The warning light also lights up in the combination meter.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly.

WARNING

If this light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For further information about the restraint system, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Front Passenger Airbag

Disabled See Operator's

Manual]

The front-passenger front air bag is disabled during the journey although an adult or person of corresponding stature is on the front

passenger seat.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause

the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes

his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe area away from traffic as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of the vehicle.

5. Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition.

6. Observe the <PASSENGER AIR BAG> indicator lights in the center console and the vehicle information display and check the

following. Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

- The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> and <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator lights must light up simultaneously for

approximately six seconds.

- The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator lights must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator light is on, the automatic

front-passenger front air bag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (see "Front passenger air bag

and status light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section)

- the [Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual] or [Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual]

display messages must not be shown in the vehicle information display.

7. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

8. Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the vehicle information display.

If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> or <ON>

indicator light remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system classifies the

occupant.

If, after taking the steps above, you still believe the system is not operating properly, have it checked immediately. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For further information on the automatic front-passenger front air bag deactivation feature (see "Front passenger air bag and status

light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section).

Instruments and controls 2-39

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Front Passenger Airbag

Enabled See Operator's

Manual]

The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey although:

•A child or child restraint as specified in U.S. regulations is located on the front-passenger seat.

•The front-passenger seat is not occupied.

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe area away from traffic as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Open the front-passenger door.

5. Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front passenger seat.

6. Make sure there are no objects applying additional force to the seat. The system may otherwise detect the additional force and

interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

7. Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition.

8. Observe the <PASSENGER AIR BAG> indicator lights in the center console and the vehicle information display and check the

following. Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

- The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> and <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator lights must light up simultaneously for

approximately six seconds.

- The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator light must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator light is on, the automatic

front-passenger front air bag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (see "Front passenger air bag

and status light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section).

- the [Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual] or [Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual]

display messages must not be shown in the vehicle information display.

7. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

8. Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the vehicle information display.

If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> or <ON>

indicator light remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system classifies the

occupant.

If, after taking the steps above, you still believe the system is not operating properly, have it checked immediately. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For further information on the automatic front-passenger front air bag deactivation feature (see "Front passenger air bag and status

light" in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section).

2-40 Instruments and controls

Lights

NOTE

Vehicles with LEDs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding light will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Check Left Cornering

Light] or [Check Right Cor-

nering Light]

The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Left Low Beam] or

[Check Right Low Beam]

The left or right-hand low beam headlight is faulty.

•Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (see "Lights" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section).

or:

•Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Rear Left Turn Sig-

nal] or [Check Rear Right

Turn Signal]

The rear left or right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Front Left Turn Sig-

nal] or [Check Front Right

Turn Signal]

The front left or right-hand turn signal is faulty.

•Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (see "Lights" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section).

or:

•Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Center Brake Lamp]

The third brake light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Left Brake Lamp] or

[Check Right Brake Lamp]

The left-hand or right-hand brake light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-41

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Check Left Main Beam] or

[Check Right Main Beam]

The left or right-hand high beam headlight is faulty.

•Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (see "Lights" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section).

or:

•Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[License Plate Lamp]

The left or right-hand license plate light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Left Fog Lamp] or

[Check Right Fog Lamp]

The left or right-hand fog light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Rear Fog Lamp]

The rear fog light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Front Left Side-

marker Lamp] or [Check

Front Right Sidemarker

Lamp]

The front left or front right parking light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Backup Light]

The reversing light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Left tail lamp] or

[Check Right tail lamp]

The left or right-hand tail light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Left Daytime Run-

ning Light] or [Check Right

Daytime Running Light]

The left or right-hand daytime driving light is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

2-42 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Adaptive front lighting

system Inoperative]

The Adaptive Front Lighting System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Adaptive Front Lighting System.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Malfunction See Opera-

tor's Manual]

The exterior lighting is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Auto Lamp Function inop-

erative]

The light sensor is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Switch Off Lights]

The side lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.

Turn the light switch to .

[High beam assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's

Manual]

High beam assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:

•The windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.

•Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the [High beam assist Available Again] message is displayed.

[High beam assist Inopera-

tive]

High beam assist is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Engine

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Check Coolant Level See

Operators Manual]

The coolant level is too low.

CAUTION

Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (see "If your vehicle overheats" in the "6. In case of emergency"

section).

If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. have the engine coolant system checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

The fan motor is faulty.

If the coolant temperature is below 250 °F (120 °C), you can continue driving to the nearest place you can have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

2-44 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Coolant Too Hot Stop

Vehicle Turn Engine Off]

The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease tempera-

ture. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued

operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the

"6. In case of emergency" section for immediate action required.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Wait until the engine has cooled down.

4. Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.

5. Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 °C. The engine may

otherwise be damaged.

6. Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.

7. If the temperature increases again, have the system checked immediately. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 250 °F (120 °C).

See "If your vehicle overheats" in the "6. In case of emergency" section.

[See Operator's Manual]

The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.

Possible causes:

•Faulty alternator.

•Torn poly-V-belt.

•A malfunction in the electronics.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Stop Vehicle See

Operator's Manual]

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Observe the instructions in the display message.

4. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Check Engine Oil At Next

Refueling]

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.

CAUTION

Avoid long journeys when there is too little engine oil in the engine. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.

1. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (see "Engine oil" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section).

2. If necessary, top up the engine oil.

3. If the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

[Check Engine Oil Level

(Add 1 Liter)]

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.

CAUTION

Avoid long journeys when there is too little engine oil in the engine. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.

1. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (see "Engine oil" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section).

2. If necessary, top up the engine oil.

3. If the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

[Engine Oil Level Low Stop

vehicle Turn Engine Off]

The engine oil level is too low. There is risk of engine damage.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Check the engine oil level (see "Engine oil" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section)

4. If necessary, top up the engine oil .

2-46 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Engine Oil Pressure Stop

vehicle Turn Engine Off]

The engine oil pressure is too low. There is a serious risk of engine damage.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Running the engine while the engine oil pressure warning is displayed could cause serious damage to the engine.

[Gasoline: Reserve Fuel Re-

fuel Immediately]

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range.

Refuel at the nearest filling station.

There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.

Refuel at the nearest filling station.

Instruments and controls 2-47

Driving systems

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Lane Departure Warning

Currently Unavailable See

Operator's Manual]

Lane Departure Warning is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes:

•The windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.

•Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

•There have been no lane markings for an extended period.

•The lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.

Lane Departure Warning is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Clean the windshield

[Lane Departure Warning

Inoperative]

Lane Departure Warning is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Blind Spot Warning Cur-

rently Unavailable See Op-

erator's Manual]

Blind Spot Warning is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:

•The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

•The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations

or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

•The radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range.

The yellow indicator lights also light up in the exterior mirrors.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.

Blind Spot Warning is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Restart the engine

2-48 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Blind Spot Warning Not

Available When Towing a

Trailer See Operator's

Manual]

Blind Spot Warning is deactivated while towing a trailer.

You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle.

Press <OK> on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

[Blind Spot Warning

Inoperative]

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is faulty.

The BSW indicator lights also light up.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Park Assist Canceled] The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened.

Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You inadvertently touched the steering wheel while steering intervention was active.

While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the steering wheel.

The vehicle has started to skid and VDC has intervened.

Use Intelligent Park Assist again later.

[Park Assist Inoperative] You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers.

Intelligent Park Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

The parking sensor system is faulty.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Park Assist Finished] The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

The display message disappears automatically.

[ICC Off] Intelligent Cruise Control has been deactivated (see " Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range) (if equipped)" in the

"5. Starting and driving" section).

If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[ICC Now Available] Intelligent Cruise Control is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Intelligent Cruise

Control (see " Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range) (if equipped)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section)

[ICC Currently Unavailable

See Operator's Manual]

Intelligent Cruise Control is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes:

•The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

•The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations

or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

•The system is outside the operating temperature range.

•The on-board voltage is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.

Intelligent Cruise Control is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Restart the engine

[ICC Inoperative] Intelligent Cruise Control is faulty. Forward Emergency Braking may also have become inoperative.

A warning tone also sounds.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[ICC Suspended] You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Intelligent Cruise Control is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

[ICC - - - MPH] An activation condition for Intelligent Cruise Control is not fulfilled.

Check the activation conditions for Intelligent Cruise Control (see " Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range) (if

equipped)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section)

[ICC and Speed Limiter

Inoperative]

Intelligent Cruise Control and Speed Limiter are faulty.

A warning tone also sounds.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Cruise Control and Speed

Limiter Inoperative]

Cruise Control and Speed Limiter are faulty.

A warning tone also sounds.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Speed Limiter Suspended] While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), Speed Limiter cannot be activated.

If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 MPH (30 km/h) and store the speed.

[Cruise Control---MPH] An activation condition for Intelligent Cruise Control is not fulfilled.

You have tried to store a speed below 20 MPH (30 km/h), for example.

If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 MPH (30 km/h) and store the speed.

Check the activation conditions for Intelligent Cruise Control (see " Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed range) (if

equipped)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section)

Instruments and controls 2-51

Tires

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Please Correct Tire

Pressure]

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

1. Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (see "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section)

2. If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

3. Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (see "Restarting TPMS" in the "5. Starting and driving" section)

[Check Tire(s)] The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly The wheel position is displayed in the vehicle information display

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

Underinflated tires pose the following risks:

•The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

•The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.

•The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (see "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section).

4. Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.

[Warning Tire Malfunction] The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the vehicle information display.

WARNING

If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:

•A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

•You could lose control of the vehicle.

•Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (see "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section).

2-52 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Tire Press. Monitor

Currently Unavailable]

No signals can be received from the tire pressure sensors due to strong RF interference. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily

malfunctioning.

Drive on. The tire pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.

[Tire Press. Sensor(s)

Missing]

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the

vehicle information display.

Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Tire Press. Monitor

Inoperative No Wheel

Sensors]

The wheels fitted do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated.

Fit wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors The tire pressure monitoring system is activated automatically after driving for a few

minutes.

[Tire Press. Monitor

Inoperative]

The tire pressure monitoring system is faulty.

Instruments and controls 2-53

Vehicle

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Depress Brake to Start

Engine]

(DCT models only). You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position N (Neutral) without depressing the

brake pedal.

Depress the brake pedal.

[To Deselect P or N,

Depress Brake and Start

Engine]

You have attempted to shift the shift lever to position R (Reverse) or D (Drive) without starting the engine.

Start the engine and depress the brake pedal.

NOTE

•It is only possible to move the shift lever from position P (Park) to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then

can the parking lock be deactivated.

•At transmission fluid temperatures below -5 °F (-20 °C) you can only shift out of position P (Park) into another transmission

position when the engine is running.

[Apply Brake to Shift From

'P']

You have attempted to shift the shift lever to position R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) without depressing the brake pedal.

Depress the brake pedal.

[Risk of Rolling Transmis-

sion Not in P]

The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the shift lever is in position R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive).

A warning tone also sounds

WARNING

The vehicle may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Press the P (Park) button.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Close the driver's door fully.

[Service Required Do Not

Shift Gears Visit Dealer]

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.

A warning tone also sounds.

If transmission position D (Drive) is selected, Drive to an INFINITI retailer without shifting the transmission from position D (Drive).

If transmission position R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or P (Park), secure the vehicle against rolling away. It is recommended you consult

an INFINITI retailer.

2-54 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Only Shift to 'P' when

Vehicle is Stationary]

The vehicle is moving.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Shift the shift lever to position P.

[Reversing Not Possible

Service Required]

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot drive in reverse.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Transmission Malfunction] The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Transmission Malfunction

Stop]

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

[Stop vehicle Shift to P

Leave Engine Running]

The automatic transmission has overheated.

Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the automatic transmission is available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the

engine.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away

3. Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message goes out.

[Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-

tion]

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged.

1. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer at the next opportunity.

2. Until then, press the P (Park) button before you switch off the engine.

3. Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

[Trans. Oil Overheated

Drive On With Care]

Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive program are no longer available. Engine power output is reduced

Allow the vehicle to cool down.

Instruments and controls 2-55

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[4WD System Currently

Unavailable]

The 4WD system has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.

Drive on, the airflow cools the 4WD system more quickly.

When the display message goes out, the 4WD system is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.

[4WD system Inoperative] The 4WD system is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The lift gate is open.

WARNING

When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the lift gate is open.

There is a risk of poisoning

Close the lift gate.

The hood is open.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

The open hood may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Close the hood.

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

Close all doors.

2-56 Instruments and controls

Message Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Power Steering

Malfunction See Operator's

Manual]

The power steering assistance is faulty.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

2. If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

3. If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. It is recommended you contact the nearest INFINITI retailer.

[Steering Malfunction See

Operator's Manual]

The electric steering lock is malfunctioning.

WARNING

The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.

There is a risk of an accident.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Do not drive on. It is recommended you contact the nearest INFINITI retailer.

The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly.

3. Insert the key into the ignition lock again.

[Check Washer Fluid]

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

Top up the washer fluid (see "Window washer fluid" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section)

[Wiper Malfunctioning] The windshield wipers are defective.

Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Hazard Warning Flashers

Malfunctioning]

The hazard warning lights are faulty.

Visit an INFINITI retailer.

Instruments and controls 2-57

Key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and solutions

[Key Does Not Belong to

Vehicle]

You have put the wrong key in the ignition switch.

Use the correct key.

[Obtain a New Key]

The key needs to be replaced.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[Replace Key Battery]

The key battery is discharged.

Replace the battery (see "Checking the battery" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section)

[Key Not Detected] (red

display message)

The key is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.

If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Locate the key.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running.

A warning tone also sounds.

If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.

1. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

2. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

3. Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

[Remove 'Start' Button,

Then Insert Key]

The key is continually undetected.

The key detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

•Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

•It is recommended you consult an INFINITI retailer.

[Key Not Detected] (white

display message)

The key is currently undetected.

Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

If the key still cannot be detected, operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition switch if necessary.

2-58 Instruments and controls

IMMOBILISER

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct key.

•To activate with the key: remove the key

from the ignition lock.

•To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key

with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can

start the engine if a valid key has been left

inside the vehicle.

NOTE

The immobiliser is always deactivated when

you start the engine.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)

To arm: lock the vehicle with the key or Intel-

ligent Key. Indicator light 䊊

1flashes. The

alarm system is armed after approximately

15 seconds.

To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key

or Intelligent Key.

Insert the key into the ignition switch.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:

•A door.

•

The vehicle with the emergency key element.

•The lift gate.

•The hood.

NIC2750

SECURITY SYSTEM

Instruments and controls 2-59

To switch the alarm off with the key: press

the or button on the key. The

alarm is switched off

Vehicles with a push button ignition switch:

•Remove the start/stop button from the

ignition lock (see " Push-button ignition

switch (if equipped)" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section)

•Insert the key into the ignition lock. The

alarm stops.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you

close the open door that has triggered it, for

example.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-

scure your vision which may lead to an ac-

cident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

•Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

•Do not operate the washer if the win-

dow washer fluid reservoir is empty.

•Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

•Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

NOTE

•If the wiper operation is interrupted by

snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to

protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the

wiper switch to the “OFF” position and

remove the snow or ice on and around the

wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute,

turn the switch on again to operate the

wiper.

•Do not operate the windshield wipers

when the windshield is dry, as this could

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

that has collected on the windshield can

scratch the glass if wiping takes place

when the windshield is dry.

•If it is necessary to switch on the wipers in

dry weather conditions, always operate

them using washer fluid.

•If the windshield wipers leave smears on

the windshield after the vehicle has been

washed in an automatic car wash, this may

be due to wax or other residue. Clean the

windshield with washer fluid after an au-

tomatic car wash.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-60 Instruments and controls

SWITCHING THE WINDSHIELD

WIPERS ON/OFF

䊊

1Windshield wipers off.

䊊

2Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity).

䊊

3Intermittent wipe, high (rain sen-

sor set to high sensitivity).

䊊

4Continuous wipe, slow.

䊊

5Continuous wipe, fast.

䊊

ASingle wipe/

wipe the windshield using washer fluid.

The windshield wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the combination switch to the desired

position.

Rain sensor (if equipped)

The rain-sensing auto wiper system uses the

rain sensor located on the upper part of the

windshield 䊊

CAUTION

•Do not touch the rain sensor and around

it 䊊

1when the wiper switch is in the

or position and the ignition

switch is in the ON position. The wipers

may operate unexpectedly and cause an

injury or may damage a wiper.

•The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the or position, the

wipers may operate unexpectedly when

dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are

stuck on or around the sensor. The wip-

ers may also operate when exhaust gas

or moisture affect the rain sensor.

•When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher

even though the amount of the rainfall is

small.

•Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto

wiper system when you use a car wash.

•The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain sen-

sor even if it is raining.

•Using genuine wiper blades is recom-

mended for proper operation of the

rain-sensing auto wiper system. For ad-

ditional information, refer to "Wiper

blades" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" sec-

tion.

•Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-

shield becomes dirty in dry weather con-

ditions, the windshield wipers may be

activated inadvertently. This could

damage the windshield wiper blades or

scratch the windshield.

For this reason, you should always

switch off the windshield wipers in dry

weather.

NIC2810

Combination switch

NSD610

Instruments and controls 2-61

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the or

position, the appropriate wiping fre-

quency is automatically set according to the

intensity of the rain. In the position, the

rain sensor is more sensitive than in the

position, causing the windshield wiper

to wipe more frequently.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield

will no longer be wiped properly. This could

prevent you from observing the traffic condi-

tions.

SWITCHING THE REAR WINDOW

WIPER ON/OFF

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-

scure your vision which may lead to an ac-

cident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

•Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

•Do not operate the washer if the win-

dow washer fluid reservoir is empty.

•Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

•Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

䊊

1Switch

䊊

2Wipes with washer fluid

䊊

3Switches on intermittent wiping

䊊

4Switches off intermittent wiping

䊊

5Wipes with washer fluid

1. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

2. Turn switch 䊊

1on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.

When the rear window wiper is switched

on, the symbol appears in the as-

sistance graphic in the combination meter.

Further information on the assistance

graphic (see "Showing the distance

display" earlier in this section).

NIC2617

2-62 Instruments and controls

The defroster switch 䊊

Boperates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position for the

rear window, and (if equipped) for the outside

rear view mirrors.

The defroster is used to reduce the moisture,

fog or frost on the rear window surface and

on the outside mirror surface to improve the

rear view.

When the defroster switch is pushed,

the indicator light illuminates and the de-

froster operates for several minutes. After

the preset time has passed, the defroster will

turn off automatically. To turn off the de-

froster manually, push the defroster switch

again, and the indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

•When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

•When operating the defroster continu-

ously, be sure to start the engine. Oth-

erwise, it may cause the battery to dis-

charge.

•When cleaning the inner side of the win-

dow, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the electrical conductors on the sur-

face of the window.

The windshield de-icer switch (defogger

switch) 䊊

Aoperates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

You can use this function to defrost the wind-

shield or to demist the inside of the wind-

shield and the side windows

NOTE

You should only select the windshield de-icer

function until the windshield is clear again.

When the switch is pushed, the indica-

tor light in the switch illuminates. The climate

control system switches to the following

functions:

•High airflow

•High temperature

•Air distribution to the windshield and front

side windows

•Air recirculation mode off

NAA1659 NAA1659

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH WINDSHIELD DE-ICER SWITCH (IF

EQUIPPED)

Instruments and controls 2-63

NOTE

The “Windshield demisting” function auto-

matically sets the blower output to the opti-

mum demisting effect. As a result, the air-

flow may increase or decrease automatically

after the button is pressed

NOTE

You can adjust the blower output manually

while the “Windshield demisting” function is

in operation: by adjusting the airflow control

for the air-conditioning or climate control

system (see "Heater and air conditioner" in

the "4. Display screen, heater and air condi-

tioner, and audio system" section).

To deactivate the de-icer:

•Press the button. The indicator light

in the button turns off. The previous

settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation

mode remains deactivated.

•Automatic climate control: press the

<AUTO> button. The indicator light in the

button turns off. Airflow and air dis-

tribution are set to automatic mode.

•Air-conditioning system or automatic cli-

mate control: adjust the temperature con-

trol (see "Heater and air conditioner" in the

"4. Display screen, heater and air condi-

tioner, and audio system" section).

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

䊊

1Left-hand parking lights

䊊

2Right-hand parking lights

䊊

3Side lights and license plate light-

ing

䊊

4<AUTO> Automatic headlight mode,

controlled by the light sensor

䊊

5Low beam/high beam headlights

䊊

6Rear fog light

䊊

7Front fog lights (if equipped)

䊊

8Headlight aiming control (halogen head-

lights only)

INFINITI recommends that you consult the

local regulations concerning the use of lights.

If you hear a warning tone when you leave

the vehicle, the side lights may still be

switched on. Turn the light switch to

<AUTO>.

NIC2619

LED headlights

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCHES

2-64 Instruments and controls

The exterior lighting (except the side lights/

parking lights) switches off automatically if

you:

•Remove the key from the ignition switch (if

equipped).

•Open the driver's door with the ignition

switch in the OFF position.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running

to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Automatic headlight mode

<AUTO> is the preferred light switch setting.

The light setting is automatically selected ac-

cording to the brightness of the ambient light

(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-

ditions such as fog, snow or spray):

•Ignition switch in ACC or ON position: the

side lights are switched on or off auto-

matically depending on the brightness of

the ambient light.

•With the engine running: if you have

switched on the daytime driving lights

function in the vehicle information display,

the side lights and low beam headlights

are switched on or off automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

To switch on automatic headlight mode: turn

the light switch to <AUTO>.

WARNING

When the light switch is set to <AUTO>, the

low-beam headlights may not be switched

on automatically if there is fog, snow or

other causes of poor visibility due to the

weather conditions such as spray. There is

a risk of an accident

In such situations, turn the light switch to

The automatic headlight feature is only an

aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle

lighting at all times.

The daytime driving lights improve the de-

tectability of your vehicle during the day.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.

It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

When the side lights and low-beam head-

lights are switched on, the green (side

lights) and (low-beam headlights) indi-

cator lights in the combination meter light up.

Low-beam headlights

When the ignition is switched on and the light

switch is in the position, the side lights

and low-beam headlights are switched on

even if the light sensor does not sense dark

ambient light conditions. This is advanta-

geous when there is fog or rain.

To switch on the low-beam headlights:

•Switch the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, or start the engine.

•Turn the light switch to . The green

indicator light in the combination

meter lights up.

NIC2697

Halogen headlights

Instruments and controls 2-65

Side lights

NOTE

Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-

ciently lit according to legal standards. To

reduce the chance of a discharged vehicle

battery, avoid the continuous use of the

sidelights or parking lights for several

hours.

To switch on: turn the light switch to .

The green indicator light in the combi-

nation meter lights up.

Parking lights

Switching on the parking lights ensures that

the corresponding side of the vehicle is illumi-

nated.

To switch on the parking lights:

•The key is not in the ignition switch or the

switch is in the OFF position.

•Turn the light switch to (left-hand

side of the vehicle) or (right-hand

side of the vehicle).

COMBINATION SWITCH

䊊

1Turn signal, right

䊊

2Turn signal, left

䊊

3High beam headlights

䊊

4Headlight flasher

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever

until the lane change is completed. Move the

lever up or down until the turn signal begins

to flash, but the lever does not latch, and

release the lever. The turn signal will auto-

matically flash three times. Choose the ap-

propriate method to signal a lane change

based on road and traffic conditions.

High beam headlights

To switch on the high beam headlights:

•Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

or start the engine.

•Turn the light switch to or <AUTO>.

•Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow 䊊

In the <AUTO> position, the high beam

headlights are only switched on when it is

dark and the engine is running.

The blue indicator light in the com-

bination meter lights up when the high

beam headlights are switched on.

To switch off the high beam headlights:

•Move the combination switch back to its

normal position. The blue indicator

light in the combination meter goes out.

NOTE

Vehicles with High beam Assist: when High

beam Assist is active, it controls activation

and deactivation of the high beam head-

lights (see " High beam assist (LED headlight

only)" later in this section)

NIC2618

2-66 Instruments and controls

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING

SYSTEM (LED HEADLIGHT

ONLY) (IF EQUIPPED)

The Adaptive Front Lighting System is a sys-

tem that adjusts the headlights automatically

to suit the prevailing driving and weather

conditions. It offers advanced functions for

improved illumination of the road surface,

e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or

weather conditions. The system includes the

active light function, cornering light function

and freeway mode. The system is only active

when it is dark.

You can activate or deactivate the “Adaptive

Front Lighting System” function using the

vehicle information display (see "Switching

the Adaptive Front Lighting System on/off"

earlier in this section)

Active light function

The active light function is a system that

moves the headlights according to the steer-

ing movements of the front wheels. In this

way relevant areas remain illuminated while

you are driving. This helps you to recognize

pedestrians, cyclists and animals. It is active

when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the il-

lumination of the road over a wide angle in

the direction you are turning, enabling better

visibility in tight bends, for example. It can

only be activated when the low-beam head-

lights are switched on. It is active if you are

driving at speeds below 25 MPH (40 km/h)

and switch on the turn signal or turn the

steering wheel.

The cornering light function may remain lit for

a short time, but is automatically switched off

after no longer than three minutes.

NSD593 NSD592

Instruments and controls 2-67

Freeway mode

Freeway mode adjusts the light beam to re-

duce the amount of light that shines on the

opposite lane of the freeway, and oncoming

traffic.

Freeway mode is active if you are driving at a

speed above 68 MPH (110 km/h) and do not

make any large steering movements for at

least 3300 ft (1000 m) or if you are driving at

a speed above 81 MPH (130 km/h).

It is not active if you are driving at speeds

below 50 MPH (80 km/h) following activa-

tion.

HIGH BEAM ASSIST (LED

HEADLIGHT ONLY)

You can use this function to set the head-

lights to change between low beam and high

beam automatically. The system recognizes

vehicles with their lights on, either approach-

ing from the opposite direction or traveling in

front of your vehicle, and consequently

switches the headlights from high beam to

low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low

beam headlight range depending on the dis-

tance to the other vehicle. Once the system

no longer detects any other vehicles, it

switches on the high beam headlights again.

The system's optical sensor is located behind

the windshield near the overhead control

panel.

WARNING

•The high beam assist system is a conve-

nience but is not a substitute for safe

driving operation. The driver should re-

main alert at all times, ensure safe driv-

ing practices and switch the high beams

and low beam manually when necessary.

•The high beam or low beam may not

switch automatically under the follow-

ing conditions. Switch the high beam

and low beam manually.

–During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

wind, etc.).

–When a light source similar to a head-

light or tail light is in the vicinity of

the vehicle.

–When the headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the leading vehicle are

turned off, when the color of the light

is affected due to foreign materials

on the lights, or when the light beam

is out of position.

–When there is a sudden, continuous

change in brightness.

–When driving on a road that passes

over rolling hills, or a road that has

level differences.

–When driving on a road with many

curves.

NSD594 NDS595

2-68 Instruments and controls

–When a sign or mirror-like surface is

reflecting intense light towards the

front of the vehicle.

–When the container, etc. being towed

by a leading vehicle is reflecting in-

tense light.

–When a headlight on your vehicle is

damaged or dirty.

–When the vehicle is leaning at an

angle due to a punctured tire, being

towed, etc.

•The timing of switching the low beam

and high beam may change under the

following situations.

–

The brightness of the headlights of the

oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.

–

The movement and direction of the on-

coming vehicle and the leading vehicle.

–When only one light on the oncoming

vehicle or the leading vehicle is illumi-

nated.

–

When the oncoming vehicle or the lead-

ing vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.

–Road conditions (incline, curve, the

road surface, etc.).

–The number of passengers and the

amount of luggage.

•High beam Assist does not recognize

road users:

–Who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians.

–Who have low intensity lighting, e. g.

cyclists.

–Whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a

barrier.

•In very rare cases, High beam Assist rec-

ognizes road users too late or not at all.

In this, or in similar situations, the auto-

matic high beam headlights will not be

deactivated or activated regardless.

There is a risk of an accident.

•Always carefully observe the traffic

conditions and switch off the high beam

headlights in good time.

CAUTION

High beam Assist cannot compensate for

road and weather circumstances while

driving. The system saves the driver from

having to operate the switch. The driver

always remains responsible for choosing

the correct light setting.

Specific situations in which to operate the

headlight switch manually:

•In heavy rain, snowy conditions. (gen-

eral poor visibility and bad weather con-

ditions).

•When the vehicle sensors are dirty, cov-

ered or broken.

Switching High Beam Assist on/off

To switch on:

Turn the light switch to <AUTO> and press

the combination switch beyond the pressure

point in the direction of arrow 䊊

3. The

indicator light in the vehicle information dis-

play lights up when it is dark and the light

sensor switches on the low-beam headlights.

If you are driving at speeds above approxi-

mately 28 MPH (45 km/h) the headlight

range is set automatically depending on the

distance between the vehicle and other road

users.

If you are driving at speeds above approxi-

mately 34 MPH (55 km/h) and no other road

users are detected, the high beam headlights

are switched on automatically. The

NIC2618

Instruments and controls 2-69

indicator light in the combination meter also

lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approxi-

mately 28 MPH (45 km/h) or other road

users are detected or the roads are ad-

equately lit The high beam headlights are

switched off automatically. The indica-

tor light in the combination meter goes out.

The indicator light in the vehicle infor-

mation display remains lit.

To deactivate:

Move the combination switch back to its nor-

mal position The indicator light in the

vehicle information display goes out.

HEADLIGHTS MISTED UP ON

THE INSIDE

Certain climatic and physical conditions may

cause moisture to form in the headlight. This

moisture does not affect the functionality of

the headlight.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The light sensor in the combination meter

automatically controls the brightness of the

instrument panel

In daylight, the displays in the combination

meter are not illuminated

The lighting in the combination meter, dis-

plays and controls in the vehicle interior can

be adjusted using the brightness control

knob.

The brightness control knob 䊊

1is located

behind the steering wheel.

Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or

counterclockwise. If the light switch is set to

or the brightness is dependent

upon the brightness of the ambient light.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

In conditions where visibility is poor due to

fog, snow or rain, the fog lights improve vis-

ibility as well as making it easier for other

road users to see you. They can be operated

together with the side lights or together with

the side lights and low beam headlights.

To switch on the fog lights:

•Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

or start the engine.

•Turn the light switch to or <AUTO>.

•Press the button. The green

indicator light in the combination meter

lights up

NIC2615 NIC2699

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

2-70 Instruments and controls

To switch off the front fog lights:

•press the button The green indi-

cator light in the combination meter turns

off.

Only vehicles with front fog lights are

equipped with the “Fog lights” function.

REAR FOG LIGHT

The rear fog light improves the visibility of

your vehicle in heavy fog for the following

traffic. Please observe the country-specific

laws on the use of rear fog lights.

NOTE

The front fog lights must be switched on be-

fore the rear fog light will operate.

To switch on the rear fog light:

•Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

or start the engine.

•Turn the light switch to or <AUTO>.

•Press the button. The yellow

indicator light in the combination meter

lights up

To switch off the rear fog light:

•press the button The yellow

indicator light in the combination meter

turns off.

The rear fog light should be used only when

visibility is seriously reduced. (Generally, to

less than 50 m (116 ft))

To sound the horn, push the center pad area

of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

NIC2717

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-71

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

•The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

•Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the seat.

•Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

•Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

•Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

•When cleaning the seat, never use gaso-

line, benzine, thinner, or any similar ma-

terials.

•If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches are located on the center con-

sole and can be operated independently, for

the left-hand side seat and for the right-hand

side seat.

The three red indicator lights in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected The

system automatically switches from level 3 to

level 2 after approximately eight minutes The

system automatically switches from level 2 to

level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The sys-

tem automatically switches off approximately

20 minutes after it is set to level 1

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

NOTE

The seat heater can only be activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON po-

sition.

NIC2634

SEAT HEATING (IF EQUIPPED)

2-72 Instruments and controls

2. Start the engine.

3. Select the heat range:

•To switch on: press button 䊊

1repeat-

edly until the desired heating level is

set.

•To switch off: press button 䊊

1repeat-

edly until all the indicator lights turn off.

NOTE

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

•Make sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in

motion and before closing the windows.

Use the window lock switch to prevent

unexpected use of the power windows.

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including en-

trapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your ve-

hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to cause a

significant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

The switches for all side windows are located on

the driver's door. There is also a switch on each

door for the corresponding side window The

switches on the driver's door take precedence.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated

when a window is closed by automatic op-

eration.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which can-

not be detected. Make sure that all passen-

gers have their hands, etc., inside the

vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re-

placed, or jump started, the power window

auto-reverse function may not operate prop-

erly. If this occurs, it is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer to re-initialize the power

window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught

in a window equipped with automatic opera-

tion as it is closing, the window will be imme-

diately lowered.

Driver’s window switch

The power windows operate when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-73

1. Front left side window

2. Front right side window

3. Rear left side window

4. Rear right side window

The driver’s switch, the main switch, can con-

trol all windows.

•To open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding button.

•To open fully: press the button beyond the

point of resistance to the second detent

and release it. Automatic operation is

started.

•To close manually: pull the corresponding

button and hold it.

•To close fully: pull the button beyond the

point of resistance and release it. Auto-

matic operation is started.

•To interrupt automatic operation: press/

pull the corresponding switch again.

NOTE

•If you press/pull the switch beyond the

point of resistance, automatic operation is

started in the corresponding direction. You

can stop automatic operation by pressing/

pulling again.

•You can continue to operate the side win-

dows after switching off the engine or

removing the key. This function remains

active for five minutes or until the driver's

or front-passenger door is opened.

•The side windows cannot be operated

from the rear when the override feature

for the side windows is activated.

Locking rear side windows:

To enable/disable the override feature for

the rear side windows, press button 䊊

2.If

indicator light 䊊

1is lit, operation of the rear

side windows is disabled. Operation is only

possible using the switches in the driver's

door. If indicator light 䊊

1is off, operation is

possible using the switches in the rear com-

partment.

NIC2715 NIC2716

2-74 Instruments and controls

Passenger’s window switch

The passenger’s switch can control its corre-

sponding window.

Convenience opening feature

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: you can

ventilate the vehicle before you start driving.

The key can also be used to carry out the

following functions simultaneously:

•Unlock the vehicle

•Open the side windows

NOTE

The convenience opening feature can only be

operated using the key.

The key must be in close proximity to the

vehicle.

Press and hold the button until the side

windows are in the desired position.

To interrupt convenience opening: release

the button.

Convenience closing feature

WARNING

When the convenience closing feature is

operating, parts of the body could become

trapped in the closing area of the side win-

dow. There is a risk of injury. Observe the

complete closing procedure when the con-

venience closing feature is operating.

When closing make sure that no parts of

the body are in the closing area.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: The key can

also be used to carry out the following func-

tions simultaneously:

•Lock the vehicle

•Close the side windows

The driver's door and the door at which the

handle is used must both be closed. The key

must be outside the vehicle. The gap between

the key and the corresponding door handle

should not be greater than 1 m.

Press and hold the button until the side

windows are fully closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release the

button.

You can also use the keyless locking feature

to activate convenience closing:

NIC2640

Instruments and controls 2-75

Touch recessed sensor surface 䊊

1on the

door handle until the side windows are fully

closed.

NOTE

Make sure you only touch recessed sensor

surface 䊊

To interrupt convenience opening: release

the recessed sensor surface 䊊

1on the door

handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,

you must reset it.

1. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

2. Close the door.

3. Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is

completely closed

4. Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

1. Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the side

window is completely closed.

2. Hold the switch for an additional second.

3. If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,

the side window has been reset correctly.

If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after performing

the procedure above, have your vehicle

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

䊊

1Close

䊊

2Open

CAUTION

•Do not place heavy objects on the glass

roof or surrounding area.

•Do not hang from the sunshade or hang

any objects from it. It may cause damage

or deformation to the sunshade.

•Close the sunshade when you leave the

vehicle for extended periods of time to

prevent the inside of the vehicle from

reaching high temperatures.

SUNSHADE OPERATION

The sunshade operates only when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

NPA1478 NIC2646

FIXED GLASS ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

2-76 Instruments and controls

WARNING

To avoid personal injury, keep your hands,

fingers and head away from the sunshade

arm, the arm rail and sunshade inlet port.

NOTE

The following notes cover situations where

strong sun shining on the roof of the vehicle

causes the area around the sunshade motor

to reach high temperatures:

•If the temperature of the sunshade motor

reaches a value between 185 °F (85 °C)

and 212 °F (100 °C), “restricted mode” is

enabled, and the sunshade will only be

allowed to CLOSE.

•If the temperature of the sunshade motor

exceeds 212 °F (100 °C), the sunshade will

not operate.

Opening and closing

Manual control:

To close the sunshade, press and hold the

“CLOSE” side of the switch 䊊

1To stop the

sunshade from closing fully, release the

switch.

To open the sunshade press and hold the

“OPEN” side of the switch 䊊

2To stop the

sunshade from opening fully, release the

switch.

Automatic operation:

To fully open or close the sunshade auto-

matically, press briefly on the open or close

side of the switch and then release. To stop

the sunshade from opening or closing, press

either side of the switch.

Auto-reverse function:

When the control unit detects something

caught by the sunshade, the sunshade will

open automatically.

NOTE

The auto-reverse function remains active

whether the sunshade is being closed manu-

ally or automatically.

If the battery cable is disconnected, the clock

will need to be re-adjusted to the correct

time.

ADJUSTING TIME

Set the time using the INFINITI controller and

the [Settings] menu available in the central

display (see "Clock settings" in the "4. Display

screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio

system" section).

NOTE

On vehicles fitted with a navigation system,

the clock is automatically updated via GPS.

The initial clock setting may be incorrect.

NSD659

CLOCK

Instruments and controls 2-77

In the center console (LHD)

Rear console

Luggage compartment

The power outlet is used for powering elec-

trical accessories such as a cellular telephone.

An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-

board voltage does not drop too low. If the

on board voltage is too low, the power to the

sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that

there is sufficient power to start the engine.

CAUTION

•The outlet and plug may be hot during or

immediately after use.

•Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for additional

information.

•Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 180W (15A) power draw. Do

not use double adapters or more than

one electrical accessory.

•Use this power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

•Avoid using when the air conditioner,

headlights or rear window defogger is

on.

•Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may blow.

•Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,

be sure that the electrical accessory be-

ing used is turned OFF.

•When not in use, be sure to close the cap.

Do not allow water to contact the

outlet.

NIC2690

NIC2683

NIC2684

POWER OUTLET

2-78 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Keep the storage lids closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handle 䊊

To close, push the lid 䊊

2until the lock latches.

NOTE

To lock/unlock the glove box, use the me-

chanical key. For the mechanical key usage,

see "Mechanical key" in the "3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments" section.

FRONT CONSOLE

COMPARTMENT

To open the front console compartment,

push lid 䊊

1down and release. The lid will

open.

To close, push the lid 䊊

1down until the lock

latches.

NIC2823 NIC2663

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-79

CONSOLE BOX

To open, pull up the lid from the front.

CARD HOLDER

Pull the sun visor down and slide a card in the

card holder 䊊

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

•Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

•Do not recline the rear seatback when

you use the cup holders on the rear arm-

rest (if equipped). Doing so may cause

the beverages to spill over, and if they

are hot, they may scald the passengers.

•Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

NIC2665 NIC2676

2-80 Instruments and controls

The cup holders 䊊

1for rear passengers are

located on the rear center armrest (if

equipped).

To open the rear cup holders (if equipped),

press the front of the cup holder 䊊

To close, slide the cup holder 䊊

1back until it

engages.

CAUTION

Close the cup holder before folding the rear

armrest up, otherwise the cup holder could

be damaged.

COAT HOOKS

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 2 lb

(1 kg) to the hook.

The coat hooks are equipped at the rear as-

sist grips.

CARGO TIE-DOWN HOOKS

䊊

1Cargo tie-down hook

WARNING

•Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

•Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

•Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

NIC2674

Front

NIC2675

Rear (if equipped)

SIC3505Z

Instruments and controls 2-81

could result in serious injury or death in

an accident or sudden stop.

•Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

•The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in the

cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

CAUTION

•Do not apply a total load of more than

22 lb (10 kg) to a single eyelet.

•Secure the load using the cargo tie-

down hooks.

•Distribute the load on the cargo tie-

down hooks evenly.

•Do not use elastic straps or nets to se-

cure a load. These are only intended as

anti-slip protection for light loads.

•Do not route tie-down ropes or straps

across sharp edges or corners.

•Pad sharp edges for protection.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks 䊊

1are for shopping bags,

etc.

CAUTION

•Do not apply a total load of more than 7

lb (3 kg) to the hook.

•Do not use luggage hooks to secure a

load.

NIC2670 NIC2671

2-82 Instruments and controls

FRONT SEAT STORAGE BOXES

(IF EQUIPPED)

To open the front seat storage boxes, pull

handle 䊊

1up and fold cover 䊊

2forwards.

CAUTION

The maximum permissible load for the

front seat storage box is 2.6 lb (1.2 kg).

MAP POCKET (IF EQUIPPED)

Map pockets are located in the doors.

STORAGE NETS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the nets to

help prevent injury in an accident or sudden

stop.

Storage nets are fitted in the front-passenger

footwell and on the back of the driver's and

front passenger seat.

NIC2666 NIC2685 NIC2687

Instruments and controls 2-83

PARCEL SHELF

WARNING

•Never put anything on the parcel shelf,

no matter how small. Any object on it

could cause an injury in case of an acci-

dent or if the brakes are applied sud-

denly.

•Do not leave the parcel shelf in position

when it is disengaged from the grooves.

•Properly secure all cargo to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a

sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury

•Properly secure cargo and do not allow

it to contact the top tether strap when it

is attached to the top tether anchor.

Cargo that is not properly secured or

cargo that contacts the top tether strap

may damage the top tether strap during

a collision. If the cargo cover contacts

the top tether strap when it is attached

to the top tether anchor, remove the

cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it

on the cargo floor below its attachment

location. If the cargo cover is not re-

moved, it may damage the top tether

strap during a collision. Your child could

be seriously injured or killed in a collision

if the child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

•Do not use the cargo cover if the rear

seats are folded down.

Removal

1. Open the lift gate (see "Lift gate lock" in

the "2. Instruments and controls" section).

2. Detach both of the cords (left and right)

䊊

1from the inside of the lift gate.

3. Detach the parcel shelf 䊊

2by simply pull-

ing it rearwards through the lift gate

opening.

CAUTION

Make sure the parcel shelf is carefully

stored when not in use in order to prevent

any damage.

Installation

1. Open the lift gate.

2. Insert the parcel shelf by pushing it for-

wards as far as possible through the lift

gate opening.

3. Attach the corresponding cords to each

side 䊊

1of the lift gate.

4. Close the lift gate (see "Lift gate lock" in

the "2. Instruments and controls" section).

ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are

available through an INFINITI retailer. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for cross bar or other equipment information.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the

cross bars. Do not load more than 221 lb

(100 kg) on the cross bars. Observe the maxi-

mum load limit shown on the crossbars or

roof carriers when you attach them on the

roof rails.

NIC2672

2-84 Instruments and controls

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side

rails. Cross bars (if so equipped) must be in-

stalled before applying load/cargo/luggage

to the roof of the vehicle.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or

its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front

and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located

on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification

label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For

additional information, refer to "Vehicle load-

ing information" in the "10. Technical infor-

mation" section.

WARNING

•Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying ca-

pacity, especially if the significant por-

tion of that load is carried on the roof

rack.

•Heavy loading of the roof rack has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or unusual

handling maneuvers.

•Roof rack load should be evenly distrib-

uted.

•Do not exceed maximum roof rack load

weight capacity.

•Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Always install the cross bars (if so

equipped) onto the roof side rails before

loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo

directly onto the roof side rails or the vehi-

cle's roof may cause vehicle damage. SKI HATCH (IF EQUIPPED)

To open the ski hatch:

1. Fold down rear seat armrest.

2. Pull the center head restraint on the rear

bench seat into the uppermost position.

3. Slide locking mechanism 䊊

1in the direc-

tion of the arrow

4. Swing flap 䊊

2fully to the side. The flap is

held open by a magnet.

To close the ski hatch:

1. Swing flap 䊊

1in the luggage compart-

ment back until it engages.

2. Fold armrest fully up if necessary.

NIC2668

Instruments and controls 2-85

COMPARTMENT UNDER TRUNK

FLOOR

Lift the trunk floor to access the underfloor

storage area.

CAUTION

•Turn off the lights when you leave the

vehicle.

•Do not use the lights for extended peri-

ods of time with the engine stopped.

This could result in a discharged battery.

FRONT OVERHEAD CONTROL

PANEL

䊊

1Switches the left-hand front reading

light on/off

䊊

2Switches the front interior lighting on

䊊

3Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

䊊

4Switches the right-hand front reading

light on/off

䊊

5Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

䊊

6Switches the automatic interior lighting

control on

Automatic interior lighting control

•To switch on: set the switch to center po-

sition 䊊

•To switch off: press switch 䊊

NIC2673 NIC2630

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-86 Instruments and controls

The interior lighting automatically switches

on if you:

•Unlock the vehicle

•Open a door

•Remove the key from the ignition lock.

The interior lighting is activated for a short

time when the key is removed from the igni-

tion lock. You can activate this delayed

switch-off using the vehicle information dis-

play (see "Activating/deactivating the interior

lighting delay" earlier in this section). REAR READING LIGHTS

(IF EQUIPPED)

䊊

1Switches the left hand reading light on/

off

䊊

2Switches the right hand reading light on/

off

REAR ROOM LIGHT

(IF EQUIPPED)

The rear room light (without switches) can be

switched on and off using the front overhead

control panel.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover.

The vanity mirror light illuminates when the

vanity mirror cover is opened. When the cover

is closed, the light will turn off.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

The light illuminates while the lift gate is

opened. When the lift gate is closed, the light

will turn off.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

The interior light will automatically turn off

after a period of time when the ignition

switch has been put in the OFF position. To

turn on the light again, put the ignition switch

in the ON position.

NIC2632 SIC3869Z

Instruments and controls 2-87

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, inte-

grated in the vehicle's inside rear view mirror,

provides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-held

transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

•Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and

security systems.

•Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the ve-

hicle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-

gramming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original transmit-

ter for future programming procedures (Ex-

ample: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of

the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver buttons should be

erased for security purposes. For additional

information, refer to "Programming

HomeLink® " later in this section.

WARNING

•Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models manu-

factured after April 1, 1982). A garage

door opener which cannot detect an ob-

ject in the path of a closing garage door

and then automatically stop and re-

verse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features increases

the risk of serious injury or death.

•During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

•Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver.

NOTE

Certain garage door drives are incompatible

with the integrated garage door opener. If

you have difficulty programing the inte-

grated garage door opener, it is recom-

mended you contact your INFINITI retailer.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® but-

tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call

1-800-355-3515.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED)

2-88 Instruments and controls

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

2. Press and hold one of buttons 䊊

2to 䊊

4on

the HomeLink®.

HomeLink® is now in programing mode.

After a short time, indicator light 䊊

1lights

up yellow.

Indicator light 䊊

1lights up yellow as soon

as button 䊊

2,䊊

3or 䊊

4is programed for

the first time. If the selected button has

already been programed, indicator light

䊊

1will only light up yellow after ten sec-

onds have elapsed.

3. Release button 䊊

2,䊊

3or 䊊

4. Indicator

light 䊊

1flashes yellow.

4. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 䊊

52–8 inches (5–20 cm) away

from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

5. Press and hold button 䊊

6on the hand held

transmitter until indicator light 䊊

1lights

up green. When indicator light 䊊

1: lights

up green: programing is finished.

When indicator light 䊊

1flashes green:

programing was successful. The next step

is to synchronize the rolling code.

6. Release button 䊊

6on the hand held trans-

mitter 䊊

5for the garage door drive sys-

tem.

If indicator light 䊊

1lights up red: repeat

the programing procedure for the corre-

sponding button on the rear-view mirror.

When doing so, vary the distance be-

tween the hand held transmitter 䊊

5and

the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between the hand

held transmitter 䊊

5and the integrated ga-

rage door opener depends on the garage

door drive system. Several attempts might

be necessary. You should test every posi-

tion for at least 25 seconds before trying

another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code

If the garage door system uses a rolling code,

you will also have to synchronize the garage

door system with the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you

will need to use the programing button on the

door drive control panel. The programing

button may be positioned at different loca-

tions depending on the manufacturer. It is

usually located on the door drive unit on the

garage ceiling.

Familiarize yourself with the garage door

drive operating instructions before carrying

out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the ga-

rage door or gate opener drive. Make sure

that neither your vehicle nor any persons/

objects are present within the sweep of the

door or gate.

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

2. Get out of the vehicle.

3. Press the programing button on the door

drive unit.

Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-

tiate the next step.

4. Get into the vehicle.

5. Press previously programed button 䊊

2,䊊

or 䊊

4on the HomeLink® until the door

closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then com-

plete.

NDI1631

Instruments and controls 2-89

If you live in Canada

Canadian radio frequency laws require a

"break" (or interruption) of the transmission

signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.

Therefore, these signals may not last long

enough for the integrated garage door

opener. The signal is not recognized during

programing. Comparable with Canadian law,

some U.S. garage door openers also feature a

"break".

Proceed as follows:

•If you live in Canada

•If you have difficulties programing the ga-

rage door opener (regardless of where you

live) when using the programing steps.

1. Press and hold one of buttons 䊊

2to 䊊

4on

the HomeLink®. After a short time, indi-

cator light 䊊

1lights up yellow.

2. Release the button.

Indicator light 䊊

1flashes yellow.

3. Press button 䊊

6of the hand held trans-

mitter 䊊

5for two seconds, then release it

for two seconds.

4. Press button 䊊

6again for two seconds.

5. Repeat this sequence on button 䊊

6of the

hand held transmitter 䊊

5until indicator

light 䊊

1lights up green.

When indicator light 䊊

1lights up green:

programing is finished.

When indicator light 䊊

1flashes green:

programing was successful. The next step

is to synchronize the rolling code.

6. Release button 䊊

6of the hand held trans-

mitter 䊊

5for the garage door drive.

If indicator light 䊊

1lights up red: repeat

the programing process for the corre-

sponding button on the rear-view mirror.

When doing so, vary the distance be-

tween the hand held transmitter 䊊

5and

the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between the hand

held transmitter 䊊

5and the HomeLink®

depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least 25

seconds before trying another position.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

•Check the transmitter frequency used by

garage door drive hand-held transmitter

䊊

5and whether it is supported. The trans-

mitter frequency can usually be found on

the back of the garage door drive hand-

held transmitter. HomeLink® is compat-

ible with devices that have units which

operate in the frequency range of 280 to

433 MHz.

•Replace the hand-held transmitter 䊊

5bat-

teries with new batteries.

This increases the likelihood that the hand-

held transmitter 䊊

5will transmit a strong

and precise signal to the HomeLink®.

•When programing, hold the hand-held

transmitter 䊊

5at varying distances and

angles from the button which you are pro-

graming. Try various angles at a distance

between 2 and 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or at

the same angle but at varying distances.

•If another hand-held transmitter is avail-

able for the same garage door drive, re-

peat the same programing steps with this

hand-held transmitter 䊊

5. Before per-

forming these steps, make sure that new

batteries have been installed in the hand-

held transmitter 䊊

•Note that some hand-held transmitters

only transmit for a limited amount of time

(the indicator light on the hand-held trans-

mitter goes out). Press button 䊊

6on re-

mote hand-held transmitter 䊊

5again be-

fore transmission ends.

2-90 Instruments and controls

•Align the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signal

reception/ transmission.

If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® but-

tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate the

programmed device.

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

2. Press button 䊊

2,䊊

3or 䊊

4which you have

programed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code:

indicator light 䊊

1lights up green

Garage door system with a rolling code:

indicator light 䊊

1flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as long

as the button is pressed. The transmission is

halted after a maximum of ten seconds and

indicator light 䊊

1lights up yellow. Press but-

ton 䊊

2,䊊

3or 䊊

4again if necessary.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter

of the device may also be used at any time.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Make sure that you clear the memory of the

integrated garage door opener before selling

the vehicle.

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

2. Press and hold buttons 䊊

2and 䊊

The indicator light initially lights up yellow

and then green.

3. Release buttons 䊊

2and 䊊

The memory of the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device that

has been programmed into HomeLink®.

Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device

or call the manufacturer of those devices for

additional information or contact an

INFINITI retailer.

Instruments and controls 2-91

MEMO

2-92 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ..............................3-2

INFINITI Intelligent key ................3-2

INFINITI Vehicle immobilizer system keys.....3-3

Doors .............................3-4

Locking with the key ..................3-4

Locking with the mechanical key ..........3-5

Locking with inside door knob ............3-6

Locking with Power door lock switch .......3-6

Automatic door locks .................3-6

Child safety rear door lock ..............3-7

Lift gate lock .......................3-7

INFINITI Intelligent Key system .............3-8

Operating range.....................3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..........3-10

INFINITI Intelligent Key operation ........3-10

Changing the settings of the locking system . .3-11

Troubleshooting guide ................3-12

Hood .............................3-15

Fuel-filler door .......................3-16

Opening fuel-filler door ...............3-16

Fuel-filler cap......................3-16

Steering wheel .......................3-17

Sun visors ..........................3-18

Vanity mirror ......................3-18

Mirrors............................3-18

Automatic anti-glare rear view mirror ......3-18

Outside mirrors ....................3-18

Memory function (if equipped) .............3-21

Storing settings ....................3-22

Calling up a stored setting .............3-22

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intel-

ligent Keys which are registered to your vehi-

cle's Intelligent Key System components and

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be reg-

istered and used with one vehicle. The new

keys must be registered prior to use with the

Intelligent Key System and INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is rec-

ommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service. Since the registration process

requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent

Key components when registering new keys,

be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you

have to the INFINITI retailer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle.

If you lose your keys, it is recommended that

you visit an INFINITI retailer for duplicates by

using the key number. INFINITI does not re-

cord key numbers so it is very important to

keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be

duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occurrences

which will damage the Intelligent Key:

•Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

•Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

•Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

•Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

•Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

•Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140 °F (60 °C).

•Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

•Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that In-

telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent

Key from unauthorized use to unlock the ve-

hicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, please contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

Mechanical key

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key.

NPA1497

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Push release catch 䊊

1in the direction of the

arrow and, at the same time, remove emer-

gency key element 䊊

2from the key.

Valet hand-off

To prevent the glove box from being opened

during valet hand-off, follow the procedure

below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical

key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to "Storage"

in the "2. Instruments and controls" section.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the

locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing

key can be duplicated without knowing the

key number. As many as four INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System keys can be used

with one vehicle. You should bring all

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

that you have to the INFINITI retailer for

registration. This is because the registration

process will erase the memory of all key

codes previously registered into the INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the regis-

tration process, these components will only

recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to the retailer at the

time of registration will no longer be able to

start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

NPA1494

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to open

the doors.

WARNING

•Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

•Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls or move the

vehicle. Unattended children could be-

come involved in serious accidents.

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or death

to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH THE KEY

䊊

1Locks the vehicle.

䊊

2Unlocks the vehicle.

䊊

3Panic button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approxi-

mately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle

will lock again and protection against theft is

reactivated.

To lock centrally, press button 䊊

1. The key

centrally locks:

•Doors

•Lift gate

•Fuel filler lid

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once

When locking, they flash three times.

Intelligent Key

You can combine the Intelligent Key func-

tions with the functions of a conventional

key. Unlock the vehicle by using Intelligent

Key function, for instance, and lock it using

the button on the key.

The driver's door and the door at which the

handle is used, must both be closed. The key

must be outside the vehicle. When locking or

unlocking with Intelligent Key, the distance

between the key and the corresponding door

handle must not be greater than 1 m.

NPA1493

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface

of the door handle.

To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 䊊

or 䊊

Make sure that you do not touch the inner

surface of the door handle.

Convenience closing feature: touch recessed

sensor surface 䊊

1for an extended period.

(See "Convenience closing feature" in the

"2. Instruments and controls" section).

To unlock the lift gate: press the lift gate

switch 䊊

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once

When locking, they flash three times.

NOTE

When the locator lighting is activated, it

lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is

unlocked with the Intelligent Key (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).

You can also set an audible signal to confirm

that the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated or deactivated using

the on-board computer (see "Activating/

deactivating the acoustic locking confirma-

tion" in the "2. Instruments and controls"

section)

LOCKING WITH THE

MECHANICAL KEY

The driver's door can be locked/unlocked

from outside using the mechanical key if the

battery is dead.

To lock the door, insert the mechanical key

into the driver's door key cylinder and turn it

towards the front of the vehicle 䊊

To unlock the door, turn the key towards the

rear of the vehicle 䊊

See "Mechanical key" earlier in this section for

instructions on accessing the Intelligent Key

system mechanical key.

NOTE

The alarm system will be triggered when the

door is opened using the mechanical key

(alarm equipped models). To stop the alarm,

NPA1489 NPA1479 SPA2602Z

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

turn the ignition key to the ON position or

press the unlock button ( ) on the key.

There are several ways to deactivate the

alarm:

•To deactivate the alarm with the key:

press the or button on the key.

Insert the key into the ignition lock.

•Lock or unlock the vehicle using Intelligent

Key. The key must be outside the vehicle

If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency

key element, the fuel filler lid will not be un-

locked automatically. To unlock the fuel filler

lid, insert the key into the ignition lock.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE DOOR

KNOB

To unlock and open the door, pull the door

lock knob and 䊊

1up pull the inside door

handle 䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

䊊

1Press to unlock

䊊

2Press to lock

The power door lock switch, located on the

door trimming, can be used to unlock 䊊

1or

lock 䊊

2all doors.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

The vehicle is locked automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the vehicle speed

reaches around 10 MPH (16 km/h).

All doors unlock automatically when the igni-

tion is placed in the OFF position.

NPA1476 NPA1477

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

You could therefore be locked out if:

•The vehicle is being pushed.

•The vehicle is being towed.

•The vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-

eter.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR

LOCK

The child safety lock helps prevent doors

from being opened accidentally, especially

when small children are in the vehicle.

When the switch is in the LOCK 䊊

2position,

the rear door can only be opened from the

outside.

LIFT GATE LOCK

To open the lift gate, unlock it first with one

of the following operations, then push the

button 䊊

•Push the button on the key or Intel-

ligent Key (if equipped). See "INFINITI In-

telligent Key system" later in this section.

•Unlock all the doors using the key.

To close the lift gate, pull it down until it

securely locks.

NIC2641 NPA1479

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

䊊

1Locks the vehicle.

䊊

2Unlocks the vehicle.

䊊

3Panic button.

WARNING

•

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-

tric medical equipment. Those who use a

pacemaker should contact the electric

medical equipment manufacturer for the

possible influences before use.

•The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure that the buttons are not op-

erated unintentionally when the unit is

stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote control function

or touching the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or

conditions may affect the Intelligent Key sys-

tem operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

•Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

•Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating

with the vehicle as it receives radio waves.

The Intelligent Key system transmits weak

radio waves. Environmental conditions may

interfere with the operation of the Intelligent

Key system under the following operating

conditions:

•When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

•When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans-

ceiver or a CB radio.

•When the Intelligent Key is in contact with

or covered by metallic materials.

•When any type of radio wave remote con-

trol is used nearby.

•When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

•When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key function

or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the bat-

tery's life is approximately two years. If the

battery is discharged, replace it with a new

one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an

indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, refer

to "Safety systems" in the "2. Instruments and

controls" section.

NPA1493

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and per-

sonal computer, the battery life may become

shorter.

For additional information, refer to "Intelli-

gent Key battery replacement" in the "8. Do-

it-yourself" section.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be reg-

istered and used with one vehicle. For infor-

mation about the purchase and use of addi-

tional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that

you visit an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occurrences

which will damage the Intelligent Key:

•Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

•Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

•Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

•Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

•Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

•Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140 °F (60 °C).

•Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

•Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that In-

telligent Key from the vehicle. This may pre-

vent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent

Key to operate the vehicle. For information

regarding the erasing procedure, it is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-

fied operating range from the request switch

䊊

NPA1498

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key operating range becomes narrower, and

the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operat-

ing range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelligent

Key, to push the request switch to lock/

unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

•Do not touch the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in your

hand as illustrated. The close distance to

the door handle will cause the Intelligent

Key system to have difficulty recognizing

that the Intelligent Key is outside the ve-

hicle.

•To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry

the Intelligent Key

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket

or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch within the

range of operation.

Locking doors

1. Push the P (Park) button to engage the P

(Park) position, place the ignition switch in

the LOCK position and make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Touch any sensor surface 䊊

1or 䊊

WPD0375Z NPA1489

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4. All doors and the lift gate will lock.

5. The turn signals flash three times.

NOTE

•Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

•The driver's door and the door at which the

handle is used, must both be closed.

•The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

•When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the In-

telligent Key in your possession before

operating the request switch to prevent

the Intelligent Key from being left in the

vehicle.

•The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Touch the inner surface of the door

handle.

3. All doors and the lift gate will unlock.

4. The turn signals flash once.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS OF

THE LOCKING SYSTEM

You can change the settings of the locking

system. This means that only the driver's door

and the fuel-filler lid are unlocked when the

vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-

quently travel alone.

To change the setting: simultaneously press

the and buttons for approxi-

mately 6 seconds.

NOTE

If the setting of the locking system is

changed within the signal range of the ve-

hicle, pressing the and button will

lock or unlock the vehicle.

The key now functions as follows:

To unlock the driver's door: press the

button once.

To unlock centrally: press the button

twice.

To lock centrally: press the button.

The Intelligent Key function is changed as

follows:

To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner

surface of the door handle on the driver's

door.

To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface

of the door handle on the front passenger

door or the rear door.

To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor sur-

face on one of the door handles

To restore the factory settings: simultane-

ously press the and button for

approximately 6 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible cause Remedy

You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using

the key

The key battery is discharged or nearly dis-

charged: •Vehicles without Intelligent Key: try again to lock/unlock the

vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip

of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press

the / button.

If this does not work:

•Check the key battery (see "Checking the battery" in the "8.

Do-it-yourself" section) and replace it necessary

•Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

There is interference from a powerful source

of radio waves •Vehicles without Intelligent Key: try again to lock/unlock the

vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip

of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press

the / button.

If this does not work:

•Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

The key is faulty •Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

•Have the key checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible cause Remedy

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle

using Intelligent Key

The key battery is discharged or nearly dis-

charged •Check the key battery (see "Checking the battery" in the "8.

Do-it-yourself" section) and replace it necessary

If this does not work:

•Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

There is interference from a powerful source

of radio waves •Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

There is a fault with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem •Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the

key.

•Have the vehicle and key checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote

control function

•Unlock (see "Locking with the mechanical key" later in this sec-

tion) or lock the vehicle using the emergency key element

•Have the vehicle and key checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

The engine cannot be started using the key The on-board voltage is too low •Switch off non-essential consumers, e. g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again

If this does not work:

•Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (see "Battery"

in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section)

•Jump-start the vehicle (see "Jump starting" in the "6. In case of

emergency" section)

•Have the system checked. It is recommended you consult an

INFINITI retailer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Symptom Possible cause Remedy

The engine cannot be started using the push

button ignition switch. The key is in the ve-

hicle

The vehicle is locked with the Intelligent Key. •Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The key battery is weak or discharged. •Check the key battery (see "Checking the battery" in the "8.

Do-it-yourself" section) and replace it necessary

If this does not work:

•Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source

of radio waves. •Start the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

You have lost a key — •Have the key deactivated. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

•Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers

•If necessary, have the locks changed as well

You have lost the emergency key element •Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers

•If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Make sure that the windshield wipers are

switched off.

2. Pull the hood lock release lever 䊊

1, lo-

cated below the instrument panel on the

driver's side; the hood will spring up

slightly.

3. Push the lever 䊊

2at the front of the hood,

to the left with your fingertips and raise

the hood.

NDI1603 NDI1627

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

4. Insert the support rod 䊊

3into the slot 䊊

on the underside of the hood.

5. When closing the hood, replace the sup-

port rod in its original position 䊊

5, slowly

lower the hood to about8–12in.(20–

30 cm) above the hood lock, then let it

drop. Make sure the hood is securely

latched.

WARNING

•Make sure the hood is completely closed

and latched before driving. Failure to do

so could cause the hood to fly open and

result in an accident.

•If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

OPENING FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock it using

one of the following operations, then push

the right side of the door 䊊

•Push the door handle request switch with

the Intelligent Key carried with you.

•Push the “UNLOCK” button on the

Intelligent Key.

•Push the power door lock switch to the

“UNLOCK” position.

To close the fuel-filler door, close the door

until it securely latches. To lock the fuel filler

door, lock the vehicle using the intelligent key.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise

until a single click is heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

WARNING

•Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled. Al-

ways stop the engine and do not smoke

or allow open flames or sparks near the

vehicle when refueling.

•Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off au-

tomatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

•Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury.

NDI1605 NPA1482

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

•Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

•Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable liq-

uid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death when filling portable fuel contain-

ers:

–Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

–Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

–Keep the pump nozzle in contact with

the container while you are filling it.

–Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

•Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to "Fuel Recommendation" in the

"Technical and consumer information"

section of this manual.

•If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush

it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

WARNING

•Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

•Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of po-

sition in any way, you are at greater risk

of injury or death in a crash. You may

also receive serious or fatal injuries from

the air bag if you are up against it when

it inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

Release the lock lever 䊊

1as illustrated and

adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-

tion (up or down 䊊

2, forwards or backwards

䊊

3). Firmly push the lock lever back into posi-

tion to lock the steering wheel in place.

NPA1481

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side 䊊

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror 䊊

3, pull down

the sun visor 䊊

1and pull up the cover 䊊

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REAR

VIEW MIRROR

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims according to the intensity of the head-

lights of the vehicle following you. The auto-

matic anti-glare feature operates only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position. It will not

operate if reverse gear is engaged or if the inte-

rior lighting is switched on.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The driver's-side outside mirror is designed so

that it automatically dims according to the

intensity of the headlights of the vehicle fol-

lowing you. The automatic anti-glare feature

operates only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position. It will not operate if reverse

gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is

switched on.

SIC2872

NIC2676 NDI1630

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Adjusting

The outside rear view mirror remote control

will operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

1. Move the switch to select the left 䊊

1or

right mirror 䊊

2. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch 䊊

Defogging

The exterior rear view mirrors will be heated

when the rear window defogger switch is

operated.

WARNING

•Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

•Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Folding

Manual type (if equipped):

Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing

it towards the rear of the vehicle.

Remote control type (if equipped):

The exterior rear view mirror remote control

operates when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Briefly press button 䊊

1. Both exterior mirrors

fold in or out.

Power folding outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

•Do not touch the mirrors while they are

moving. Your hand may be pinched, and

the mirror may malfunction.

•Do not drive with the mirrors stored.

You will be unable to see behind the

vehicle.

The exterior rear-view mirrors automatically

unfold when the ignition is switched on or

when the vehicle doors are unlocked. Use the

[Fold Mirrors in when Locking] option under

the [CONVENIENCE] menu of the Vehicle

NIC2636 NIC2638

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Information Display to specify that the mir-

rors are to be automatically folded and un-

folded. The Auto fold feature can also be

switched off. See "Switching the [Fold Mir-

rors in when Locking] function on/off" in the

"2. Instruments and controls" section.

If the [Fold Mirrors in when Locking] option

has been activated in the Vehicle information

display:

•The exterior mirrors fold in automatically

as soon as you lock the vehicle from the

outside.

•The exterior mirrors fold out again auto-

matically as soon as you unlock the vehicle

and then open the driver's or front-

passenger door.

Automatic parking positioner (if so

equipped)

The Parking position for the exterior mirror

on the front-passenger side function is only

available if the vehicle is equipped with the

Memory package.

䊊

1Button for the exterior mirror on the left

hand side.

䊊

2Button for the exterior mirror on the right

hand side.

䊊

3Adjustment button.

䊊

4Memory button M.

Setting and storing the parking position

using reverse gear:

You can set the front-passenger side exterior

mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on

that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.

You can store this position.

1. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

2. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

3. Press button 䊊

2for the external mirror on

the front-passenger side.

4. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror

on the front-passenger side moves to the

preset parking position.

5. Use adjustment button 䊊

3to adjust the

exterior mirror. You should see the rear

wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror

The parking position is stored.

NOTE

•If you shift the transmission to another

position, the exterior mirror on the front

passenger side returns to the driving posi-

tion.

•If the driver's side mirror is currently se-

lected, the passenger side mirror will not

move when reverse gear is engaged.

Setting and storing the parking position

using the memory button:

You can set the front-passenger side exterior

mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on

that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.

This setting can be stored using memory but-

ton M 䊊

1. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

2. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

3. Press button 䊊

2for the external mirror on

the front-passenger side.

NIC2639

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror

on the front-passenger side moves to the

preset parking position.

5. Use adjustment button 䊊

3to adjust the

exterior mirror. You should see the rear

wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

6. Press memory button M 䊊

4and one of the

arrows on adjustment button 䊊

3within

three seconds. The parking position is

stored if the exterior mirror does not

move.

7. If the mirror moves out of position, repeat

the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position:

1. Switch the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition.

2. Adjust the exterior mirror on the front

passenger side with the corresponding

button.

3. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror

on the front-passenger side moves to the

stored parking position

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves back to its original position:

•As soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h.

•About ten seconds after you have disen-

gaged reverse gear.

•If you press button 䊊

1for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side.

WARNING

•If you use the memory function on the

driver's side while driving, the adjust-

ments could cause you to lose control of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the

driver's side while the vehicle is station-

ary.

Only use the memory function on the

driver's side while the vehicle is station-

ary.

•If the memory function adjusts the seat,

you and other vehicle occupants-

particularly children-could become

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making

adjustments, make sure that no one has

any part of their body within the sweep

NIC2637

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

of the seat. If someone becomes

trapped, immediately release the

memory function position button The

adjustment is stopped.

•If children activate the memory func-

tion, they could become trapped, espe-

cially if they are unattended. There is a

risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any

time, e.g. even when the key isn't in the igni-

tion lock.

STORING SETTINGS

With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings.

•Seat and seatback position

•Driver's side: position of the exterior mir-

rors on the driver's and front-passenger

sides.

To store settings:

Adjust the seat (see "Power seat adjustment"

in the "1. Safety — seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system" section).

2. Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's

side (see "Adjusting" in the "3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments" section).

3. Briefly press the M memory button 䊊

and then press preset position button 1, 2

or 3 䊊

2within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected

preset position. A tone sounds when the

settings have been completed.

CALLING UP A STORED SETTING

Press and hold the relevant preset position

button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior

mirrors are in the stored position.

NOTE

The setting procedure is interrupted as soon

as you release the storage position button.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

4 Display screen, heater and air

conditioner, and audio system

Safety precautions .....................4-2

Center multi function control panel...........4-2

INFINITI Controller...................4-2

Steering wheel mounted controls ..........4-3

USB connection ports .................4-4

Starting system .....................4-4

Touch panel operation.................4-4

Operating menu screen ................4-6

Scrolling message or list ................4-7

Selecting item ......................4-7

Adjusting volume and settings ............4-7

How to input letters and numbers .........4-8

How to operate display ................4-9

Menu button operation ...............4-10

System status screen .................4-11

Items to be set initially ................4-11

Additional system information ...........4-16

RearView monitor (if so equipped) ..........4-17

RearView Monitor system operation .......4-18

How to read the displayed lines ..........4-19

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ........................4-19

How to park with predicted course lines.....4-21

Adjusting the screen .................4-22

RearView Monitor setting .............4-23

RearView Monitor system limitations ......4-24

System maintenance .................4-25

Around View Monitor (if so equipped) .......4-25

Around View Monitor system operation.....4-26

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ........................4-30

How to park with predicted course lines.....4-31

How to switch the display .............4-33

Adjusting the screen .................4-33

Around View Monitor setting ...........4-34

Around View

Monitor system limitations . . .4-34

System maintenance .................4-37

Sonar function settings (if so equipped) .....4-37

Moving Object Detection (if so equipped) .....4-38

MOD system operation ...............4-39

MOD setting......................4-40

MOD system limitations...............4-41

MOD malfunction...................4-41

System maintenance .................4-41

Ventilators .........................4-42

Center ventilators...................4-42

Side ventilators ....................4-42

Rear ventilators (if equipped)............4-42

Heater and air conditioner ...............4-43

Air conditioning system ...............4-44

Automatic climate control (2–zone) .......4-48

Servicing air conditioner ...............4-52

Audio system (if equipped) ...............4-53

Audio operation precautions ............4-53

Names and functions of audio control

buttons .........................4-64

Main audio operation ................4-65

Radio...........................4-67

Compact Disc (CD) player ..............4-71

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port . . .4-72

iPod player .......................4-75

Bluetooth® streaming audio ............4-78

Audio settings .....................4-82

Disc/USB memory device care and

cleaningDiscs .....................4-84

USB memory device .................4-84

Gracenote® End User License Agreement . . .4-84

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .......4-85

Regulatory information ...............4-87

Phone ..........................4-88

Connecting Bluetooth® device ..........4-90

Hands-free text messaging assistant.......4-91

Phone and text message settings .........4-94

Bluetooth® information ...............4-98

INFINITI InTouch Apps overview ...........4-98

Using Applications ..................4-99

Vehicle Apps ......................4-99

Vehicle Apps Manager (if equipped) ......4-102

Major Apps available for use in this system. .4-103

Examples of how Vehicle Apps is used . . . .4-104

Mobile Apps .....................4-104

Getting user ID and password ..........4-104

Notes on linking smartphone App to vehicle .4-105

Using smartphone applications .........4-105

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.........4-105

Using Voice Recognition system.........4-105

Before starting....................4-105

Giving voice commands ..............4-106

Voice recognition settings .............4-116

Information menu ....................4-117

SiriusXM Travel Link® ...............4-118

Settings menu ....................4-122

Troubleshooting guide .................4-124

Customer assistance ................4-124

System unit ......................4-124

Audio system .....................4-125

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . .4-132

Monitor system ...................4-135

Voice recognition ..................4-136

WARNING

•Do not adjust the heater and air condi-

tioner controls or audio controls while

driving so that full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

•Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the sys-

tem may result in accident, fire or elec-

tric shock.

•If you noticed any foreign objects enter-

ing the system hardware, spilled liquid

on the system, or noticed smoke or

fumes coming out from the system, or

any other unusual operation is ob-

served, stop using the system immedi-

ately. It is recommended that you con-

tact the nearest INFINITI retailer.

Ignoring such conditions may lead to an

accident, fire or electric shock.

•Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may lead to an accident,

fire, or electric shock.

•Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view the im-

ages on the front center display screen.

CAUTION

Do not use the system when the engine is

not running for extended periods of time to

prevent battery discharge.

INFINITI CONTROLLER

䊊

1<MAP/VOICE> (models with navigation

system)

Push to display the vehicle’s current location

on the map.

NAA1625

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CENTER MULTI FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL

4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Push again to display the Display View Bar

and the display views.

Push and hold to hear the current guidance

for a programmed route.

<>(models without navigation system).

Push to display the hands-free phone opera-

tion screen.

When you receive a phone call, push this

switch to answer the call.

䊊

2<MENU> Almost all functions, such as

navigation, apps, phone connection, infor-

mation screen display and other settings can

be accessed from this menu. Icons and menus

displayed on the screen may differ depending

on the models and specifications.

䊊

3< /OK> Push to enter the selected

item. Nudge or rotate to select an item on the

screen or to adjust a setting (volume, bright-

ness, etc.).

䊊

4<>Push to go back to the previous

screen.

䊊

5<AUDIO> Display the audio screen.

When <AUDIO> is pushed while the audio

screen is displayed, the source list screen will

be displayed.

䊊

6< / CAMERA > (models with

Around View Monitor system).

Push to view the Around View Monitor

screen.

Push and hold to control the brightness.

<> (models without Around View

Monitor system)

Push for brightness control. Push and hold to

turn the display on/off.

STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED

CONTROLS

The steering wheel switch controls the vol-

ume, voice recognition or Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone, or selects a menu.

It can also control audio and hands-free text

messaging assistant features that are shown

on the display.

䊊

1< > (TALK):

Push to enter the voice recognition

mode.

Giving voice commands page 4-106

䊊

2< > (Phone End) :

End an active call and reject an incoming

call.

䊊

3Volume control switch:

The volume control switch allows you to

adjust the volume of the speakers by

pushing the + or − button.

䊊

4< > (Mute):

Push to turn on/off the audio system.

䊊

5<>(Phone Send):

Make a call and accept an incoming call.

NAA1624

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3

USB CONNECTION PORTS

The front console compartment contains the

USB connection ports.

䊊

1USB/iPod connection port:

Connect to play media from an iPod®,

iPhone® or a USB memory device. When

using INFINITI InTouch Apps with an

iPhone®, connect via a USB cable. Refer

to the device manufacturer’s owner in-

formation regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

CAUTION

•Depending on the size and shape of USB

device, the console lid may not fully

close. Do not force the console lid closed

as this may damage the USB device.

NOTE

•Even when iPods® or iPhones® are con-

nected to both of the two USB/iPod ®

connection ports, the system recognizes

only one of the connected iPods® or iP-

hones® at a time.

•Only one of the two connected USB de-

vices can be operated by the voice recog-

nition system.

STARTING SYSTEM

The system starts when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

Start-up warning (models with

navigation system)

For this system, when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position, the

start-up screen is displayed.

Touch [OK] after reading and agreeing to the

message. If you do not agree to the message,

some of Infiniti InTouch

functions will be

disabled.

NOTE

•Do not keep the INFINITI InTouch system

turned on with the engine stopped. Doing

so may discharge the vehicle battery.

When you use INFINITI InTouch, always

keep the engine running.

•Once you select [Decline] on the start-up

screen, the [OK]/[Decline] screen will not

be displayed for 30 days.

TOUCH PANEL OPERATION

CAUTION

•The glass screen on the liquid crystal dis-

play may break if it is hit with a hard or

sharp object. If the glass screen breaks,

do not touch it. Doing so could result in

an injury.

•To clean the display, use a soft, dry

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary,

use a small amount of neutral detergent

with a soft cloth. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

•Do not splash any liquid such as water or

car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

NAA1628

4-4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

WARNING

•ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

•Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an

accident.

Screen illustrations

•The illustrations in this manual are repre-

sentatives of various models and may not

be identical with the design and specifica-

tions of your vehicle.

•Icons and menu items displayed on the

screen may be abbreviated or omitted

from the screen illustrations when appro-

priate. The omitted icons and menu items

are described as dotted lines as illustrated.

Basic touch panel operation methods are ex-

plained here. •Touch

Select and execute the selected key on the

screen.

5GH0158XZ NAA1783

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-5

•Swipe

Menu screen pages will skip to the next page.

•Drag

Drag the scroll bar up or down to scroll the

menu screen.

OPERATING MENU SCREEN

䊊

1Touch to scroll to the previous page.

䊊

2Touch the preferred icon to execute a

function and display the next screen.

䊊

3Touch to scroll to the next page.

䊊

4Indicates the position of the currently

displayed page out of the total number of

available pages.

A swipe gesture can also be used to move

quickly between screens.

NAA1707

NAA1724 NAA1729

4-6 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

SCROLLING MESSAGE OR LIST

䊊

1Drag the scroll bar up or down to scroll

the message or list up or down.

䊊

2Touch the preferred item.

䊊

3If a listed item name is not completely

displayed (due to length), touch to

display the hidden part of the name.

䊊

4Touch [ ]or[ ] to scroll the

message or list one item at a time.

Touch [ ]or[ ] to skip to the next

page.

SELECTING ITEM

Touch an item to select it.

Touch [ ] to return to the previous

screen.

ADJUSTING VOLUME AND

SETTINGS

Level of volume, brightness, etc. can be ad-

justed.

NAA1725 5GH0030XZ NAA1730

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-7

Touch adjustment keys, such as [+]/[-], [L]/

[R], etc., to adjust each item. Each time a key

is touched, the indicator moves along the bar.

HOW TO INPUT LETTERS AND

NUMBERS

The keyboard screen differs depending on

the model and specification.

Character (letters and numbers)

input screen

Alphanumeric characters can be entered us-

ing the keyboard.

The designs and the displayed items may vary

depending on the type of screen. 䊊

1Touch a character on the displayed key-

board. The selected character is entered.

䊊

2Entered characters are displayed.

䊊

3Touch [Delete] to delete the last charac-

ter entered.

Touch and hold [Delete] to delete all the

characters entered.

䊊

4The symbol keys are displayed by touch-

ing [Symbols]. The alphabet keys are dis-

played by touching [A-Z].

䊊

5Touch [Space] to enter a space.

䊊

6Touch or to move the cursor.

䊊

7Touch [CAPS] to toggle between upper

and lower case letters.

NAA1710 NAA1711

4-8 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

HOW TO OPERATE DISPLAY

Touch screen display

To operate the display, touch the display di-

rectly or use the INFINITI controller.

Shortcut menu

Models with navigation system:

The shortcut menu can be displayed on the

display. The display may differ depending on

the conditions of the current map screen. While the current vehicle location is displayed

on the map, push </OK> on the INFINITI

controller to display the shortcut menu on the

display.

Available items:

•[Audio Source]

•[Audio List]

•[Call History]

•[Phonebook]

•[Cancel Route]*

•[Nearby Places]*

•[Store Location]*

•[View Settings]*

•[Store Location]*

•[Select Add/Edit]*

* For these items see the separately provided

navigation manual (if equipped).

Models without navigation system:

The shortcut menu can be displayed on the

display.

Push </OK> on the INFINITI controller

to display the shortcut menu.

NAA1712

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-9

Available items:

•[Audio Source]

•[Audio List]

•[Call History]

•[Phonebook]

•[Select Add/Edit]

Edit shortcut menu:

The following procedure can be used to edit

or sort the shortcut menu.

1. Select [Select Add/Edit] to register a new

item to the menu, or to change an existing

menu item.

2. Select the preferred setting.

•[Change Order]

Change the order in which shortcut menu

items are shown.

•[Edit Shortcut Items]

Select items to be displayed in the shortcut

menu.

MENU BUTTON OPERATION

Push <MENU> to display functions on the

display.

•[Navigation]

•[Phone]

•[Apps]

•[Information]

•[Settings]

5GH0183XZ NAA1651

4-10 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

SYSTEM STATUS SCREEN

By pushing <STATUS> on the audio switch

the current status of the system can be dis-

played.

Models with navigation system:

Touch [<] / [>] to switch between air condi-

tioner status and navigation route informa-

tion screen.

ITEMS TO BE SET INITIALLY

The initial setting operations included in this

section should be performed before using the

system for the first time.

Screen settings

The display can be turned on/off and the

image quality of the display can be adjusted in

this menu.

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Screen].

4. Touch the preferred item to be adjusted.

Available items

[Display Set-

tings]

Adjust the image quality of the

display.

See "Display settings" later in this

section

[Display OFF] Turns the screen off.

To turn the display back on, push

and hold <CAMERA /

>(models with Around View

Monitor) or <>(models

without Around View Monitor)

for more than 2 seconds.

[Day/Night] Adjust the screen brightness.

[Change Map

Color]*

Toggles the map color between

the daytime mode and the night

time mode.

[Reset Set-

tings]

Return the display settings to de-

fault.

*: For models with navigation system.

NAA1731

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-11

Display settings

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

2. Touch [Screen] and touch [Display Set-

tings].

Available settings

[Brightness] Adjust the brightness.

[Contrast] Adjust the contrast.

[Black Level] Adjust the black level.

4-12 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Volume settings

Volume setting items can be turned on/off and the sound for various functions including audio, phone (ringtone, incoming, and outgoing

volumes), navigation voice guidance (if equipped) and the system beeps can be adjusted.

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Volume].

Setting item Action

[Volume Adjustment] [Audio Volume] Adjust the volume level of the audio system.

[Voice Guidance]* Turn the voice guidance on/off.

[Guidance Volume]* Adjust the volume level of voice guidance.

[Ringtone Volume] Adjust the ringtone volume level.

[Incoming Call Vol.] Adjust the incoming call volume.

[Outgoing Call Vol.] Adjust the outgoing call volume.

[InTouch Services Vol.]* Adjust the volume level of the InTouch

Services information channel.

Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[Sonar Volume] Adjust the warning tone volume by touching [+]/[-].

[Button Beep Sound] Turn the button beep sound and alarm for prohibited operation on/off.

*: For models with navigation system.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-13

Language settings

From the Language screen, you can change the display language used by the system.

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Other].

4. Touch [Language].

Setting item Action

[System Language] Select the preferred language.

•Do not turn the ignition switch while changing the language.

•If the selected language is also supported by the combination meter, a confirmation message asking if you also wish to change the meter

language is displayed. Select [Yes] to apply the language setting to the meter as well.

•Depending on the language selected, available voice commands for the voice recognition system may differ.

4-14 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Clock settings

Clock settings can be changed.

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Clock].

Setting item Action

[On-Screen Clock] Set the clock display on/off. When this item is on, the clock display appears.

[Daylight Savings Time] Select the setting for the daylight saving time from ON, OFF or Auto*. Each time this item is touched the

setting is changed.

[Clock Format (24h)] Toggle the clock format between 12-hour and 24-hour clocks. When the indicator light illuminates, the

clock is set to the 24-hour format.

[Time Zone] Select an appropriate time zone from the destination list. If [Auto]* is selected, the system selects the time

zone automatically.

[Offset Adjustment]* Adjust the offset value (hour and minutes).

[>]** [Time Adjustment] Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the value.

[Calendar Adjustment] Adjust the year, month, and day.

*: For models with navigation system.

**: For models without navigation system.

Time is synchronized to the combination meter once the calendar setting is set.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-15

ADDITIONAL SYSTEM

INFORMATION

System Start-Up

Due to the large number of features and

capabilities that the INFINITI InTouch system

needs to load on start-up, it may take up to a

minute for all functions (such as Apps) to be

available. The system will display the mes-

sage indicating that the application is loading

during this time. During the start-up period,

hard button controls for audio will become

available before start-up is complete. Fea-

tures will become available in the following

order.

•Audio volume and music playback

•Audio Full Screen Access

•Full App Availability – System will display

the message indicating the completion of

the application loading process.

System Response Delay

INFINITI InTouch uses an operating system

like those found on many computers, tablets

and cell phones. Like these devices, process-

ing speed may vary, and system response

delays or resets may occur intermittently.

This does not indicate a malfunction, and

further information on system operation can

be found below.

In most situations, simply waiting a few mo-

ments longer should be sufficient for the

pending operations to complete.

If the system temporarily does not respond to

commands, the system can be easily reset.

Simply push down the Audio Power knob for

at least 5 seconds. The system will turn off

and restart.

After restart, all functions should be avail-

able.

•Audio will resume, but if you were using

Bluetooth® Audio or an Audio App, the

connection may need to be re-established.

•If a navigation route was set, the route

should resume automatically (models with

navigation system).

•If a phone call was in progress, the call may

be temporarily transferred back to the

handset.

System Reset

As noted above, intermittent system resets

may occur during normal operation. You may

also wish to reset the system if you find that a

particular feature is not loading or respond-

ing. Often, a quick system reset will resolve

any issue you may be experiencing. After re-

start, all functions will be available as de-

scribed above.

System Updates

Like many digital devices, the INFINITI

InTouch system is designed to allow for soft-

ware updates as enhancements are devel-

oped and additional features added. If you

have questions about system performance, it

is recommended you contact your INFINITI

retailer to ensure that your vehicle has had

the latest available software installed.

Operating Tips

INFINITI InTouch provides several methods

of operation to suit your preferences. The

following are suggested operating tips.

•Operating the INFINITI Controller, Steer-

ing Wheel Controls, or other controls too

quickly can cause a lag between the con-

trol and the display. Operate the controls

carefully and allow the system to respond

to your request.

•INFINITI recommends using Voice Recog-

nition whenever possible to select options

while driving. Some touch screen function-

ality is intentionally unavailable during

driving. Please view the available voice

commands by pushing <>on the steer-

ing wheel and then selecting a category on

the display.

4-16 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•In some situations, the system may not be

able to recognize your command even if

you say the exact command. This can be

due to noise conditions or an accent.

•Bluetooth® Compatibility: Some wireless

devices do not allow phonebook down-

loads, text messaging, or other

Bluetooth® audio functions. Some wire-

less devices may only have partial func-

tionality of these features even though the

phone is compatible for hands-free com-

munication. If your phone is listed as com-

patible and you are still experiencing is-

sues, please confirm that your phone also

has the latest software updates.

Additional help

For additional technical information, please

tiusa.com or call us at 1–800–662–6200,

menu option 6.

䊊

ARearView Monitor display

䊊

BINFINITI controller

䊊

C<MENU> button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RearView Moni-

tor could result in serious injury or death.

NSD627

REARVIEW MONITOR (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-17

•The RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature but it is not a substitute for

proper backing up. Always turn and look

out the windows, and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

•The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to help

avoid damaging the vehicle.

•The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a level paved

surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when clean-

ing dirt or snow from the lens.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the

shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion.

The radio can still be heard while the Rear-

View Monitor is active. To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just above

the vehicle’s rear license plate 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) posi-

tion to operate the RearView Monitor.

NAA1642

4-18 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to

the bumper line 䊊

Aare displayed on the moni-

tor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

•Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

•Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

•Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

•Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when backing

up. The predicted course lines will be dis-

played on the monitor when the shift lever is

in the R (Reverse) position and the steering

wheel is turned. The predicted course lines

will move depending on how much the steer-

ing wheel is turned and will not be displayed

while the steering wheel is in the neutral po-

sition.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predicted course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations

on the ground are for approximate reference

only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or

projecting objects will be actually located at

distances different from those displayed in

the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to

illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the position-

ing of objects behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

viewed in the monitor farther than it appears.

SAA1896Z

NAA1675

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-19

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

viewed in the monitor closer than it appears.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch

the object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the actual

moving course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown further than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the object

NAA1676 SAA1923 SAA1980

4-20 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

when backing up to the position 䊊

Aif the

object projects over the actual moving

course.

HOW TO PARK WITH

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

•If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course line may

not be displayed correctly.

•On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

•The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right because the rear view

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

•If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this

occurs, please perform the following

procedures:

–Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

–Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

•When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines

are wider than the actual width and course.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

SAA1897

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-21

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Aas illustrated when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted

course lines 䊊

Benter the parking space

䊊

4. When the rear of the vehicle enters the

parking space 䊊

C, maneuver the steering

wheel to make the vehicle width guide

lines 䊊

Dparallel to the parking space 䊊

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, press the P (Park) button and

apply the parking brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While the RearView Monitor is displayed,

touch the settings icon .

2. Select the item you wish to adjust:

[Brightness]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Contrast]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Black level]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Tint]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Color]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Reset Settings]:

Return all the settings to default

SAA1898

4-22 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

NOTE

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving. Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

䊊

A[Settings] key

䊊

B<MENU> button

REARVIEW MONITOR SETTING

The RearView Monitor [Predictive Course

Lines] setting can be changed using the fol-

lowing procedure.

NSD628

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-23

1. Push the <MENU> button 䊊

Bon the

INFINITI Controller and touch [Settings]

䊊

Ain the vehicle information display.

2. Touch [Camera]/[Sonar]

3. Touch [Camera]

4. Touch [Predictive Course Lines]

When this item is turned on, the predicted

course line is displayed on the rear view

screen when the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

•

The system cannot completely eliminate

blind spots and may not show every object.

•Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation. The system

will not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show objects close

to the bumper or on the ground.

•Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because a

wide-angle lens is used.

•

Objects in the RearView Monitor will ap-

pear visually opposite than when viewed in

the rear view and outside mirrors.

•Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the num-

ber of occupants, fuel level, vehicle posi-

tion, road conditions and road grade.

•Make sure that the lift gate is securely

closed when backing up.

•Do not put anything on the rear view

camera. The rear view camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

•When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

•Do not strike the camera. It is a precision

instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunc-

tion or cause damage resulting in a fire

or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

•When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects.

•When strong light shines directly on to the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

•Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper.

•The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

•The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

•Objects on the monitor may not be clear in

a dark environment.

•Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp-

ened with mild detergent diluted with

water.

4-24 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

•Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discol-

oration. To clean the camera, wipe with

a cloth dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

•Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-

era 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing it with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a

dry cloth.

䊊

AAround View Monitor display

䊊

BINFINITI controller

䊊

C<MENU> button

䊊

D<CAMERA> button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for the proper use of the Around View

Monitor system could result in serious in-

jury or death.

NAA1688

NSD651

AROUND VIEW MONITOR (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-25

•The Around View Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation because it has

areas where objects cannot be viewed.

The four corners of the vehicle in par-

ticular, are areas where objects do not

always appear in the bird’s-eye, front,

or rear views. Always check your sur-

roundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle. Al-

ways operate the vehicle slowly.

•The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt

or snow from the front of the camera.

The Around View Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as

slot parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen format.

All views are not available at all times.

Available views:

•Front View

An approximately 150-degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

•Rear View

An approximately 150-degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

•Bird's-Eye View

The surrounding view of the vehicle from

above.

•Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Around

View Monitor system uses cameras 䊊

1lo-

cated in the front grille, on the vehicle’s out-

side mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s

rear number plate.

AROUND VIEW MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) posi-

tion or press the <CAMERA> button to oper-

ate the Around View Monitor.

The screen displayed on the Around View

Monitor will automatically return to the pre-

vious screen 3 minutes after the <CAMERA>

button has been pushed while the shift lever

is in a position other than the R (Reverse)

position.

NAA1638

4-26 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Available views

WARNING

•The distance guide lines and the vehicle

width lines should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a paved, level

surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed objects.

•Use the displayed lines and the bird's-

eye view as a reference. The lines and the

bird's-eye view are greatly affected by

the number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road condition and road

grade.

•When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are farther

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

•Objects in the monitor will appear visu-

ally opposite compared to when viewed

in the rear view and outside mirrors.

•Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

•The distance between objects viewed in

the rear view differs from actual dis-

tance because a wide-angle lens is used.

•The displayed lines on the rear view will

appear slightly off to the right because

the rear view camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

Front view

Rear view

SAA1840Z

SAA1896Z

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-27

Front and rear views:

Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

A, are displayed

on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

•Red line 䊊

1: approx.1.5 ft (0.5 m)

•Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

•Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

•Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating

the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the steering

wheel is turned. The predicted course lines

will move depending on how much the steer-

ing wheel is turned and will not be displayed

while the steering wheel is in the straight

ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH).

NOTE

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the neutral position, both

the right and left predicted course lines 䊊

are displayed. When the steering wheel

turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is dis-

played only on the opposite side of the turn.

Bird's-eye view:

WARNING

•Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap-

pear farther than the actual distance.

•Tall objects, such as a curb or a vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

•Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

•The view for the bird's-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

•A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment will

increase as the line proceeds away from

the vehicle.

•Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

4-28 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view

of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle

position.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle.

NOTE

The size of the vehicle icon on the bird's-eye

view may differ somewhat from the actual

vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

are indicated in black.

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in

yellow for several seconds after the bird's-

eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the

first time after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer

to an object, the corner sensor indicator 䊊

appears.

Front-side view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

width and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the ap-

proximate vehicle width including the outside

mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and

side 䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

The corner sensor indicator 䊊

4will appear

when a corner of the vehicle moves closer to

an object.

NAA1681 SAA1842Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models*

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-29

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations

on the ground are for approximate reference

only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or

projecting objects will be actually located at

distances different from those displayed in

the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to

illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the position-

ing of objects behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

viewed in the monitor farther than it appears.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

viewed in the monitor closer than it appears.

NAA1675 NAA1676

4-30 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch

the object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the actual

moving course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the object

when backing up to the position 䊊

Aif the

object projects over the actual moving

course.

HOW TO PARK WITH

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

•If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may not be displayed correctly.

•On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course lines and the actual

course.

•The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right because the rear view

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

•If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this

occurs, please perform the following

procedures:

–Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

–Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

SAA1923 SAA1980

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-31

•When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines

are wider than the actual width and course.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Aas illustrated when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines

䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. When the rear of the vehicle enters the

parking space 䊊

C, maneuver the steering

wheel to make the vehicle width guide

lines 䊊

Dparallel to the parking space 䊊

SAA1897 SAA1898

4-32 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, press the P (Park) button and

apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

The view on the Around View Monitor screen

can be switched by pressing the <CAMERA>

button or by changing the shift lever position.

Press the <CAMERA> button:

When the <CAMERA> button is pushed while

a screen other than a camera screen is dis-

played, the Around View Monitor operates

and the front view and bird's-eye view are

displayed. Push the <CAMERA> button to

switch the display to the front view and

front-side view screen.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Push the <MENU> button 䊊

Bon the

INFINITI Controller and touch [Settings]

䊊

Ain the vehicle information display.

2. Touch [Camera]/[Sonar]

3. Touch [Display]

4. Select the item you wish to adjust:

[Brightness]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Contrast]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Black level]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Tint]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Color]:

Adjust display settings by touching [+]/[-].

[Reset Settings]:

Return all the settings to default

NOTE

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the Around View Monitor while the vehicle is

moving. Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-33

䊊

A[Settings] key

䊊

B<MENU> button

AROUND VIEW MONITOR

SETTING

Around View Monitor settings can be

changed using the following procedure:

1. Push the <MENU> button 䊊

Bon the

INFINITI Controller and touch [Settings]

䊊

Ain the vehicle information display.

2. Touch [Camera]/[Sonar]

3. Touch [Camera]

4. Touch [Moving Object Detection]

Activate or deactivate the Moving Object

Detection (MOD) mode.

AROUND VIEW

® MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

Around View Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious in-

jury or death.

•Do not use the Around View Monitor

with the outside mirror in the stored po-

sition, and make sure that the lift gate is

securely closed when operating the ve-

hicle using the Around View Monitor.

•The apparent distance between objects

viewed on the Around View Monitor dif-

fers from the actual distance.

•The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the cameras.

•When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

NSD628

4-34 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

•Do not strike the cameras. They are pre-

cision instruments. Doing so could cause

a malfunction or cause damage resulting

in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

•There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

•When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

•When strong light is directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

•The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

•The colors of objects on the Around View

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

•Objects on the monitor may not be clear

and the color of the object may differ in a

dark environment.

•There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

•Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth that has

been dampened with a diluted mild clean-

ing agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

There are some areas where the system will

not show objects and the system does not

warn of moving objects. When in the front or

the rear view display, an object below the

bumper or on the ground may not be viewed

䊊

1. When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object

NAA1639

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-35

near the seam 䊊

3of the camera viewing ar-

eas will not appear in the monitor 䊊

System temporarily unavailable

When the [ !] icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View Monitor. This will not hinder normal

driving operation but the system should be

inspected. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

When the [ X] icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving tempo-

rary electronic disturbances from surround-

ing devices. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but the system should be in-

spected. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

NAA1779 NAA1780

4-36 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

•Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discol-

oration. To clean the camera, wipe with

a cloth dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

•Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras, the Around View Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the cameras by

wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

䊊

A[Settings] key

䊊

B<MENU> button SONAR FUNCTION SETTINGS (IF

SO EQUIPPED)

The sonar function settings can be changed

using the following procedure.

1. Push <MENU>䊊

Band touch [Settings] 䊊

NAA1638

NSD628

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-37

2. Touch [Camera/Sonar]

3. Touch [Sonar]

[Sonar sensitivity]:

Adjust the sonar sensor sensitivity level by

touching [+]/[-].

[Sonar volume]:

Adjust the buzzer volume by touching [+]/[-].

䊊

AAround View Monitor display

䊊

BINFINITI controller

䊊

C<MENU> button

䊊

D<CAMERA> button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the Moving Object

Detection system could result in serious in-

jury or death.

NSD651

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

4-38 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with objects

surrounding the vehicle. When maneu-

vering, always use the outside mirror

and rearview mirror and turn and check

the surroundings to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

•The system is deactivated at speeds

above 5 MPH (8 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

•The MOD system is not designed to de-

tect the surrounding stationary objects.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system

can inform the driver of moving objects sur-

rounding the vehicle when driving out of ga-

rages, maneuvering into parking lots and in

other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the

image shown on the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will activate automatically

under the following conditions:

•When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

•When the <CAMERA> button is pressed

to switch from a different screen to the

camera view on the display.

•When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

•When the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position and then back to the ON

position.

NOTE

•The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when in

this view.

•While the parking sensor warning tone is

sounding, the MOD system does not

chime.

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 5 MPH (8 km/h ) or less, the MOD

system detects moving objects in the camera

view. The MOD system will not operate if the

lift gate is open.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard

and a yellow frame 䊊

1will be displayed on

the monitor.

While the MOD system continues to detect

moving objects, the yellow frame continues

to be displayed.

The yellow frame 䊊

1is displayed on each

view in the rear view modes.

NAA1781

Bird's-eye view

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-39

A blue <MOD> icon is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

䊊

A[Settings] key

䊊

B<MENU> button

MOD SETTING

MOD system settings can be changed using

the following procedure.

1. Push the <MENU> button 䊊

Bon the

INFINITI Controller and touch [Settings]

䊊

Ain the vehicle information display.

2. Touch [Camera/Sonar]

3. Touch [Camera]

NAA1782

Front view / rear view

NSD628

4-40 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

4. Touch [Moving Object Detection].

5. Turn the MOD system on/off.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-

cordance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

•Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer (if available). The system

may not function properly.

•Excessive noise (for example, audio sys-

tem volume or open vehicle window) will

interfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

•The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental con-

ditions and surrounding objects such as:

–When there is low contrast between

background and the moving objects.

–When there is blinking source of light.

–When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is pres-

ent.

–When camera orientation is not in its

usual position, such as when mirror is

folded.

–When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

–When the position of the moving ob-

jects in the display is not changed.

•The MOD system might detect some-

thing like flowing water droplets on the

camera lens, white smoke from the muf-

fler, moving shadows, etc.

•The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direc-

tion, distance or shape of the moving

objects.

•If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing

zone may be altered and the MOD sys-

tem may not detect objects properly.

•When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not display ob-

jects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

MOD MALFUNCTION

If the orange MOD icon is displayed in the

view, the system is not functioning properly.

This will not hinder normal driving operation,

but the system should be inspected. It is rec-

ommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

•Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the cameras. This will cause discol-

oration. To clean the cameras, wipe with

a cloth dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

•Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not oper-

ate properly. Clean the cameras by wiping

with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry

cloth.

NAA1689

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-41

CENTER VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by turning the

control wheel.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators

by moving the center knob (up/down, left/

right) until the desired position is achieved.

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by turning the

control wheel.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators

by moving the center knob (up/down, left/

right) until the desired position is achieved.

REAR VENTILATORS (IF

EQUIPPED)

Open/close the ventilators by turning the

control wheel.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators

by moving the center knob (up/down, left/

right) until the desired position is achieved.

NAA1636

Center

NAA1637

Side

NAA1635

Rear

VENTILATORS

4-42 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

WARNING

•The heater and air conditioner operate

only when the engine is running.

•Never leave children or adults who

would normally require the support of

others alone in the vehicle. Pets should

not be left alone either. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or controls

and inadvertently become involved in a

serious accident and injure themselves.

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people or animals.

•Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

•Do not adjust the heating and air condi-

tioning controls while driving so that full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

The heater and air conditioner operate when

the engine is running. The air blower will op-

erate even if the engine is turned off and the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTE

•Condensation forms inside the air condi-

tioning unit when the air conditioner (if

equipped) is running, and is safely dis-

charged underneath your vehicle.

Traces of water on the ground are there-

fore normal.

•Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit.

Odor can enter the passenger compart-

ment through the ventilators.

When parking, set the heater and air con-

ditioner controls to turn off air recircula-

tion to allow fresh air into the passenger

compartment. This should help reduce

odors inside the vehicle.

Observe the settings recommended on the

following pages. The windows could other-

wise mist up. To prevent the windows from

misting up

•Switch off climate control only briefly.

•Switch on air-recirculation mode only

briefly.

•Switch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-

cation function.

•Switch on the windshield demisting func-

tion briefly, if required.

The air-conditioning system/automatic cli-

mate control regulates the temperature and

the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters

undesirable substances from the air.

The air-conditioning system/automatic cli-

mate control can only be operated when the

engine is running. Optimum operation is only

achieved with the side windows closed.

Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the

side panelling clear. Otherwise the vehicle will

not be ventilated correctly.

NOTE

•Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period dur-

ing warm weather. This will speed up the

cooling process and the desired interior

temperature will be reached more quickly.

•The integrated filter filters out most par-

ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-

ters out pollen. With automatic climate

control, gaseous pollutants and odors will

also be reduced. A clogged filter reduces

the amount of air supplied to the vehicle

interior. For this reason, you should always

observe the interval for replacing the filter,

which is specified in the Service Booklet.

As this depends on environmental condi-

tions, for example heavy air pollution, the

interval may be shorter than stated in the

Service Booklet.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-43

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

䊊

1Sets the temperature

䊊

2De-ices/defogs the windshield

䊊

3Set the air distribution

䊊

4Activates/deactivates air-recirculation

mode

䊊

5Sets the airflow

䊊

6Activates/deactivates cooling with air

dehumidification

䊊

7Switches the rear window defroster on/

off

Operating tips

A number of tips and recommendations for

optimum use of the air-conditioning system

are listed below:

•Switch on the air-conditioning system by

turning control knob 䊊

5clockwise to the

desired position (except position 0)

•Set the temperature to 70°F(22°C)

•Recommendation for avoiding misted

windows at low exterior temperatures or

in rain: switch on the cooling with

dehumidification function. Set air distribu-

tion to and if possible switch off

and . Deactivate air-

recirculation mode .

Set airflow control 䊊

5to a setting be-

tween 3 and 6.

•Recommendation for rapid cooling or

heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set

airflow control 䊊

5to a setting between 3

and 6.

•Recommendation for a constant vehicle

interior temperature: set airflow control

䊊

5to a setting between 1 and 3.

NAA1644

4-44 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•Recommendation for air distribution in

winter: select the and settings.

Recommendation for air distribution in

summer: select the or and

settings.

•Only use the "Windshield demisting" func-

tion briefly until the windshield is clear

again

•Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, for

example if there are unpleasant outside

odors or when in a tunnel. The windows

could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is

drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation

mode

•If you change the settings of the climate

control system, the climate status display

appears for approximately three seconds

at the bottom of the screen in the central

display (see separate operating instruc-

tions). You will see the current settings of

the various climate control functions.

Switching air-conditioning system

on/off

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

To switch on: turn control 䊊

5clockwise to the

desired position (except position 0).

To switch off: turn control 䊊

5counter-

clockwise to position 0.

Activating/deactivating the cooling

with air dehumidification function

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function, the air inside the ve-

hicle will not be cooled. The air inside the

vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The

windows can mist up more quickly. There-

fore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air

dehumidification" function briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-

tion is only available when the engine is run-

ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and

dehumidified according to the temperature

selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This

is normal and not a sign that there is a mal-

function.

To activate:

Press the button The indicator light in

the button lights up.

To deactivate:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out. The cooling with

air dehumidification function has a delayed

switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function:

Problem: The indicator light in the but-

ton flashes three times or remains off. The

cooling with air dehumidification function

cannot be activated.

Cause and solution: The cooling with air de-

humidification function has been deactivated

due to a malfunction. Have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

Setting the temperature

You can set the temperature for the entire

vehicle. The set temperature is automatically

maintained at a constant level.

To increase or reduce the temperature: turn

control 䊊

1counterclockwise or clockwise.

Only change the temperature setting in small

increments. Start at 70°F(22°C).

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-45

Setting the air distribution

Directs the airflow through the demis-

ter ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the center

and side air ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the foot-

well air ventilators.

NOTE

•You can also activate several of the air

distribution settings simultaneously. In or-

der to do this, press several of the air dis-

tribution buttons. The air is then routed

through different air ventilators.

•Regardless of the air distribution setting,

airflow is always directed through the side

air ventilators. The side air ventilators can

only be closed if the adjusters are turned

clockwise until they engage.

To set air distribution:

1. Make sure the engine is running.

2. Press one or more of the ,,or

buttons. The corresponding indica-

tor light comes on.

Setting the airflow

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

2. To increase or reduce airflow: turn control

䊊

5counterclockwise or clockwise.

Defogging the windshield

You can use this function to de-ice the wind-

shield or to defog the inside of the windshield

and the side windows.

NOTE

You should only select the "Windshield de-

misting" function until the windshield is clear

again.

Activating the "Windshield demisting"

function:

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

To activate: press the button The indi-

cator light in the button lights up.

The climate control system switches to the

following functions:

•High airflow

•High temperature

•Air distribution to the windshield and front

side windows

•Air-recirculation mode off

NOTE

•The "Windshield demisting" function auto-

matically sets the blower output to the

optimum demisting effect. As a result, the

airflow may increase or decrease auto-

matically after the button is pressed.

•You can adjust the blower output manu-

ally while the "Windshield demisting" func-

tion is in operation. Turn airflow control 䊊

counterclockwise or clockwise.

Deactivating the "Windshield demisting"

function:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out. The previous set-

tings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode

remains deactivated.

Turn temperature control 䊊

1counterclock-

wise or clockwise.

Defogging the windows

Windows misted up on the inside:

1. Activate the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function.

2. If the windows continue to mist up, acti-

vate the "Windshield demisting"

function.

4-46 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

NOTE

You should only select this setting until the

windshield is clear again.

Windows misted up on the outside:

1. Activate the windshield wipers.

2. Set the air distribution to or .

NOTE

You should only select this setting until the

windows are clear again.

Air recirculation mode

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if

unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle

from outside. The air already inside the ve-

hicle will then be recirculated.

If you activate air-recirculation mode, the

windows can mist up more quickly, in particu-

lar at low temperatures. Only use air recircu-

lation mode briefly to prevent the windows

misting up.

Activating air recirculation mode:

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button lights up.

Deactivating air recirculation mode:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out.

NOTE

Air-recirculation mode is deactivated auto-

matically:

•After approximately five minutes at out-

side temperatures below approximately

45°F(7°C).

•After approximately five minutes if the

"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-

tion is deactivated.

•After approximately 30 minutes at outside

temperatures above approximately 45 ° F

(7 °C) if the cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion function is activated.

Idle Stop/Start function

During automatic engine switch-off, the Cli-

mate control only operates at a reduced ca-

pacity. If you require the full climate control

output, you can switch off the Idle Stop/

Start function by pressing the ECO button

(see " Idle Stop/Start System (if equipped)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section).

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-47

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL (2–ZONE)

䊊

1Sets the temperature, left

䊊

2Sets climate control to automatic mode

䊊

3Demists the windshield

䊊

4Increases the airflow

䊊

5Sets the air distribution

䊊

6Display

䊊

7Activates/deactivates air-recirculation

mode

䊊

8Switches climate control on/off

䊊

9Sets the temperature, right

NAA1705

4-48 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

䊊

10 Activates/deactivates the Max Cool

function

䊊

11 Activates/deactivates cooling with air

dehumidification

䊊

12 Reduces the airflow

䊊

13 Switches the rear window heating on/

off

䊊

14 Switches the ZONE function on/off

Operating tips

A number of tips and recommendations to

enable you to get the most out of your auto-

matic climate control are listed below:

•Activate climate control using the

and buttons. The indicator lights in

the and buttons light up.

•Set the temperature to 70°F(22°C)

•Only use the "Windshield demisting" func-

tion briefly until the windshield is clear

again.

•Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, for

example if there are unpleasant outside

odors or when in a tunnel. The windows

could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is

drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation

mode

•Use the function to adopt the tem-

perature settings on the driver's side for

the front-passenger side as well. The indi-

cator light in the button goes out.

•If you change the settings of the climate

control system, the climate status display

appears for approximately three seconds

at the bottom of the screen in the center

display (see separate operating instruc-

tions). You will see the current settings of

the various climate control functions.

Idle Stop/Start function

During automatic engine switch-off, the Cli-

mate control only operates at a reduced ca-

pacity. If you require the full climate control

output, you can switch off the Idle Stop/

Start function by pressing the ECO button

(see " Idle Stop/Start System (if equipped)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section).

Switching automatic climate

control on/off

When the climate control is switched off, the

air supply and air circulation are also

switched off. The windows could mist up.

Therefore, only switch off climate control

briefly.

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

To activate:

Press the button The indicator light in

the button lights up. Airflow and air

distribution are set to automatic mode.

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out. The previous set-

tings are reactivated.

To deactivate:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button lights up.

NOTE

Automatic climate control: switch on climate

control primarily using the button.

Activating/deactivating the cooling

with air dehumidification function

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function, the air inside the ve-

hicle will not be cooled. The air inside the

vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The

windows can mist up more quickly. There-

fore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air

dehumidification" function briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-

tion is only available when the engine is run-

ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and

dehumidified according to the temperature

selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This

is normal and not a sign that there is a mal-

function.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-49

To activate:

Press the button The indicator light in

the button lights up.

To deactivate:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out. The cooling with

air dehumidification function has a delayed

switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function:

Problem: The indicator light in the but-

ton flashes three times or remains off. The

cooling with air dehumidification function

cannot be activated.

Cause and solution: The cooling with air de-

humidification function has been deactivated

due to a malfunction. Have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

Setting automatic climate control

to automatic mode

Only automatic climate control features the

"Control climate control automatically" func-

tion.

In automatic mode, the set temperature is

maintained automatically at a constant level

The system automatically regulates the tem-

perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and

the air distribution.

The automatic mode functions optimally

when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"

function is activated. If desired, cooling with

air dehumidification can be deactivated.

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-

dehumidification" function, the air inside the

vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the

vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The

windows can mist up more quickly. There-

fore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-

dehumidification" function briefly.

To set climate control to automatic mode:

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Set the desired temperature.

To activate: press the button The indi-

cator light in the button lights up. Au-

tomatic air distribution and airflow are acti-

vated.

To switch to manual mode: press the or

button

Press the or button. The indicator

light in the button goes out. Automatic

air distribution and airflow are deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Different temperatures can be set for the

driver's and front-passenger sides. The set

temperature is automatically maintained at a

constant level.

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

To increase or reduce temperature: turn con-

trol 䊊

1or 䊊

9counterclockwise or clockwise.

Only change the temperature setting in small

increments. Start at 70°F(22°C).

Setting the air distribution

Directs the airflow through the demis-

ter ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the center

and side air ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the foot-

well air ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the center

and side air ventilators as well as the

footwell air ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the center

and side air ventilators as well as the

demister ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the foot-

well and demister ventilators.

Directs the airflow through the demis-

ter ventilators, the center and side air

ventilators as well as the footwell air

ventilators.

4-50 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

NOTE

Regardless of the air distribution setting,

airflow is always directed through the side

air ventilators. The side air ventilators can

only be closed if the adjusters are turned

clockwise until they engage.

To set the air distribution:

1. Make sure the engine is running.

2. Press the or button repeat-

edly until the desired symbol appears in

the display.

Setting the airflow

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

2. To increase or reduce airflow: press the

or button.

Switching the ZONE function

on/off

This function is only available with automatic

climate control.

To activate: press the button. The in-

dicator light in the button lights up. The

temperature setting for the driver's side is not

adopted for the front-passenger side.

To deactivate: press the button. The

indicator light in the button goes out.

The temperature setting for the driver's side

is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Defogging the windshield

You can use this function to de-ice the wind-

shield or to defog the inside of the windshield

and the side windows.

NOTE

You should only select the "Windshield de-

misting" function until the windshield is clear

again.

Activating the "Windshield demisting"

function:

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

To activate: press the button The indi-

cator light in the button lights up.

The climate control system switches to the

following functions:

•High airflow

•High temperature

•Air distribution to the windshield and front

side windows

•Air-recirculation mode off

NOTE

•The "Windshield demisting" function auto-

matically sets the blower output to the

optimum demisting effect. As a result, the

airflow may increase or decrease auto-

matically after the button is pressed.

•You can adjust the blower output manu-

ally while the "Windshield demisting" func-

tion is in operation. Press the or

button.

Deactivating the "Windshield demisting"

function:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out. The previous set-

tings are reactivated Air-recirculation mode

remains deactivated.

Turn temperature control 䊊

1or 䊊

9counter-

clockwise or clockwise.

Defogging the windows

Windows misted up on the inside:

1. Activate the "Cooling with air dehu-

midification" function.

2. Activate automatic mode .

3. If the windows continue to mist up, acti-

vate the "Windshield demisting"

function.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-51

NOTE

You should only select this setting until the

windshield is clear again.

Windows misted up on the outside:

1. Activate the windshield wipers.

2. Set the air distribution to or .

NOTE

You should only select this setting until the

windows are clear again.

Air recirculation mode

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if

unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle

from outside. The air already inside the ve-

hicle will then be recirculated.

If you activate air-recirculation mode, the

windows can mist up more quickly, in particu-

lar at low temperatures. Only use air recircu-

lation mode briefly to prevent the windows

misting up.

Activating air recirculation mode:

Make sure the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button lights up.

Air-recirculation mode is activated automati-

cally at high outside temperatures or high

levels of pollution. When air-recirculation

mode is activated automatically, the indicator

light in the button is not lit. Outside air

is added after about 30 minutes.

Deactivating air recirculation mode:

Press the button. The indicator light in

the button goes out.

NOTE

Air-recirculation mode is deactivated auto-

matically:

•After approximately five minutes at out-

side temperatures below approximately

45°F(7°C).

•After approximately five minutes if the

"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-

tion is deactivated.

•After approximately 30 minutes at outside

temperatures above approximately 45 ° F

(7 °C) if the cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion function is activated.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with the proper equipment.

The air conditioner system in your vehicle is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind.

This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant are

required when servicing your vehicle’s air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to the air

conditioner system. (See "Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations" in

the "9. Maintenance and Schedules" section.)

An INFINITI retailer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air conditioner

system.

Air conditioner filter

The air conditioner system is equipped with

an air conditioner filter. To make sure the air

conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates ef-

ficiently, replace the filter in accordance with

the specified maintenance intervals listed in

the separate maintenance booklet. It is rec-

ommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

4-52 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog up

easily when operating the heater or air con-

ditioner.

AUDIO OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

•The driver must not attempt to operate

the audio system while the vehicle is in

motion, so that full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

•Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake before operat-

ing the audio system and playing movies

(if equipped).

CAUTION

•Operate the audio system only when the

vehicle engine is running. Operating the

audio system for extended periods of

time with the engine turned off can dis-

charge the vehicle battery.

•Do not allow the system to get wet. Ex-

cessive moisture such as spilled liquids

may cause the system to malfunction.

Radio

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position before turning on the radio. If you

listen to the radio when the engine is not

running, the ignition switch should be pushed

to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter,

buildings, bridges, mountains and other ex-

ternal influences. Intermittent changes in re-

ception quality are normally caused by these

external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-

the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio

reception. These circuits are designed to ex-

tend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general character-

istics of both FM and AM radio signals that

can affect radio reception quality in a moving

vehicle, even when the best quality equip-

ment is used. These characteristics are com-

pletely normal in a given reception area, and

do not indicate any malfunction in your radio

system.

AUDIO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-53

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, ter-

rain, signal distance and interference from

other vehicles can adversely affect ideal re-

ception. Described below are some of the

factors that can affect radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

FM radio reception

MAXIMUM SIGNAL DISTANCES

•FM : 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km)

•AM : 60 to 130 miles (97 to 209 km)

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to

30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

station) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may some-

times interfere with FM station reception

even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40

km). The strength of the FM signal is directly

related to the distance between the transmit-

ter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-

sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example they will

reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference

from buildings, large hills or due to antenna

position, usually in conjunction with an in-

creased distance from the station transmit-

ter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be

reduced by lowering the treble setting to re-

duce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM radio reception

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along the

ground. In addition, the signals can bounce

off the ionosphere and be bent back to earth.

Because of these characteristics, AM signals

are also subject to interference as they travel

from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: This occurs while the vehicle is pass-

ing through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur for

several seconds during ionospheric turbu-

lence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

SAA0306Z

4-54 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

HD Radio

Technology reception

(for U.S.)

HD Radio

Technology reception needs to

be activated to receive HD Radio broadcasts,

see "Audio settings" later in this section.

This enables you to receive radio broadcasts

digitally (where available), providing a better

quality sound with clear reception. When this

feature is not activated or HD Radio broad-

casts are not available, you will receive ana-

log radio (AM/FM) broadcasts.

Satellite radio reception

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This is

not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 min-

utes with the satellite radio ON and the ve-

hicle outside of any metal or large building for

the satellite radio to receive all of the neces-

sary data.

The satellite radio requires an active SiriusXM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite ser-

vice is a available only to those at least 18 and

older in the 48 contiguous United States.

The satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the

satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

The build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio performance.

Remove the ice to restore satellite radio re-

ception.

Trademarks

HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.

and Foreign Patents. HD Radio

and the

HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary

trademarks of iBiquity Digita; Corp.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

DENSO CORPORATION is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

SiriusXM services require a subscription after

trial period and are sold separately or as a

package. Our satellite service is available only

to those at least 18 and older in the 48 con-

tiguous USA and DC. For more information

visit www.siriusxm.com.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio and

SiriusXM Travel Link monthly subscriptions

are sold separately. Sirius XM Travel Link is

only available in select markets. For more

information, see www.sirius.com/travellink

“Made for iPod®” and “Made for iPhone®”

mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod® or

iPhone®, respectively, and has been certified

by the developer to meet Apple performance

standards. Apple is not responsible for the

operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards. Please

note that the use of this accessory with

iPod® or iPhone® may affect wireless per-

formance.

Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod

classic®, iPod nano®, and iPod touch® are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trade-

mark of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark

of Apple Inc.

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-55

is the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information, visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

Inc., copyright 䊊

c2000 to present

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

䊊

c2000 to present Gracenote. One or more

patents owned by Gracenote apply to this

product and service. See the Gracenote web-

site for a non-exhaustive list of applicable

Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, Musi-

cID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and

logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote”

logo are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Gracenote in the United States

and/or other countries.

App Store SM

Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries. App Store is a service mark of

Apple Inc.

Google Play

Google Play is a trademark of Google Inc.

Google

䊊

Google Calendar

calendaring application is

a trademark of Google Inc.

Compact Disc (CD) player

•Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

•Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

•During cold or rainy weather, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If

this occurs, remove the CD and dehu-

midify or ventilate the player completely.

•The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

•The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tem-

perature is extremely high. Decrease the

temperature before use.

•Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packag-

ing.

•Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

•CDs that are of poor quality, are dirty,

scratched, or covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work properly.

•The following CDs may not work properly:

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

•Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

SAA0480

4-56 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

•This audio system can only play prere-

corded CDs. It has no capabilities to record

or burn CDs.

•If a CD cannot be played, one of the fol-

lowing messages will be displayed.

[Disc Reading Error]

Indicates a CLV/Focus, TOC or Access

error. Check and re-insert the CD. Make

sure that it is inserted correctly.

[Please Eject Disc]

Indicates a mechanism error. If the CD can

be ejected, eject and re-insert the CD. If

the CD cannot be ejected, have the system

checked. It if recommended you contact

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

[File type is not supported]

Indicates that no readable files are found

on the inserted CD. Check the data on your

CD.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

connection port/ iPod

The Media Hub is located in the center con-

sole and consists of the USB connectors.

1) USB/iPod connection port

Connect to play media from an iPod®,

iPhone® or a USB memory device. When

using INFINITI InTouch Apps with an

iPhone®, connect via a USB cable. Refer

to the device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be a

distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

•Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or upside down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

•Do not grab the USB port cover (if

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

•Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased sepa-

rately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a per-

sonal computer.

In some areas, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for

regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is

parked.

NAA1628

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-57

This system supports various USB memory

devices, USB hard drives and iPod players.

Some USB devices may not be supported by

this system.

•Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

•Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is

recommended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

Notes for iPod use:

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

•Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod is connected properly.

•An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod.

•An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis-

connected during a seek operation.

•An incorrect song title may appear when

the Play Mode is changed while using an

iPod nano (2nd Generation)

•Audiobooks may not play in the same or-

der as they appear on an iPod.

•Large video files cause slow responses in

an iPod. The vehicle display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

•If an iPod automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

display may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

4-58 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Specification chart for USB

Supported media USB2.0

Supported file systems FAT32

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5000

Format Sampling rate Supported/Not supported

MPEG1 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 44.1, 48, 32 kHz Supported (32-320 kbps)

MPEG2 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 22.05, 24, 16 kHz Supported (16-160 kbps)

MPEG2.5 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 11.025, 12, 8 kHz Supported (16-160 kbps)

WMA *1 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Supported VER.7/8 (48-192 bps)

VER.9/9.1/9.2 (48-320 bps)

AAC (MPEG4) *2

(Extension “m4a” only)

8, 11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32,

44.1, 48 kHz

Supported (16-320 kbps)

*1 Professional (voice, lossless, multichannel) is not supported.

*2 AAC (MPEG-2) is not supported.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-59

Compressed audio files

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

Explanation of terms:

•MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near

“CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the

size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion

of an audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (sampling: 44.1

kHz, bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compres-

sion reduces certain parts of sound that

seem inaudible to most people.

•WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is

a compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-

age of more digital audio tracks in the

same amount of space when compared to

MP3s at the same level of quality.

•Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digi-

tal audio file is determined by the bit rate

used when encoding the file.

•Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

•Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

•ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is

the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the digital

music file such as song title, artist, album

title, encoding bit rate, and track time du-

ration, etc. ID3 tag information is dis-

played on the Album/Artist/Track title line

on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks or trademarks of Micro-

soft Corporation in the United States of

America and/or other countries.

Playback order:

䊊

ARoot folder

䊊

BFolder

䊊

CAudio file

NAA984

4-60 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown on

the display.

•If there is a file in the top level of a disc/

USB, the root folder is displayed.

•The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware, so the files might not play in the

desired order.

•The music playback order of compressed

audio files is as illustrated.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-61

Specification chart for CD:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported ver-

sions*1

MP3 Version MPEG1 Audio Layer3, MPEG2 Audio Layer3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Sampling fre-

quency

MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3: 8kHz, 11.025kHz, 12kHz

MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz

MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9.1, WMA9.2

Bit rate/

Sampling fre-

quency

Bit rate: Ver7, Ver8: 32-192kbps Ver9,Ver9.1,Ver9.2: 32-192kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: Ver7, Ver8: 8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k Ver9,Ver9.1,Ver9.2: 8k/11.025k/

16k/22k/32k/44.1k/48 kHz

AAC*4 Bit rate/

Sampling fre-

quency

Bit rate: 8-320 kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: 11.025-48kHz

Tag information (Song title, Artist name and Album

name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

AAC Tag (AAC only)

Folder levels CD, CD-R, CD-RW: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 510 (Max. 255 files for one

folder)

Displayable character codes*3 01: SHIFT-JIS, ASCII, ISO-8859-1, UTF-8, UTF-16 BOM, UTF-16 Big Endian, UTF-16 Little Endian, 02:

UNICODE, 03: UTF-16

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions, and information are going to be displayed.

*4 Made by iTunes.

4-62 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Windows Media Player:

This product is protected by certain intellec-

tual property right of Microsoft. Use or dis-

tribution of such technology outside of this

product is prohibited without a license from

Microsoft.

Bluetooth® Audio player

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

DENSO CORPORATION is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

•Some Bluetooth® streaming audio de-

vices may not be recognized by the in-

vehicle audio system.

•It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

streaming audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth® module before using the

Bluetooth® streaming audio.

•The Bluetooth® streaming audio may be

stopped under the following conditions:

– When receiving a hands-free call

– When checking the connection to the

hands-free phone

– When connecting the hands-free

phone or the audio device

– When downloading a phonebook

memory from a connected cellular

phone

•Do not place a Bluetooth® streaming au-

dio device in an area surrounded by metal

or far away from the in-vehicle

Bluetooth® module to prevent tone qual-

ity degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

•While an audio device is connected

through Bluetooth® wireless connection,

the battery of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

•This system supports the Bluetooth® Ad-

vanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)

and Audio/Video Remote Control Profile

(AVRCP).

•Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the

wireless LAN functions at the same time

may slow down or disconnect the commu-

nication and cause undesired noise. It is

recommended that you turn off the wire-

less LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the

Bluetooth® functions.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-63

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF

AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

Main audio buttons

䊊

1<SEEK•CAT•TRACK>:

Functions to seek radio stations or to skip

and fast-forward/rewind through

tracks.

䊊

2< >:

Push to eject a disc.

䊊

3<RADIO>:

Push to switch to the radio mode. The

radio band will switch between AM, FM,

and SXM (SiriusXM) each time the button

is pushed.

䊊

4<MEDIA>:

Each time the button is pushed, a differ-

ent audio source (CD, iPod, USB or

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio) will be se-

lected.

䊊

5Disc slot:

Insert a disc with the label side facing up.

䊊

6<TUNE•CH•FOLDER>:

Functions to manually tune AM/FM , to

select SXM categories and to select

MP3/WMA/AAC folders.

䊊

7Radio memory buttons: Up to six pre-

ferred stations can be registered in the

preset list for each band.

䊊

8<VOL/ >:

Push to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio APPS information will be displayed

when music is played via INFINITI InTouch

Apps.

NAA1704

4-64 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons

䊊

1System on/off: Push to turn on/off the

audio system.

䊊

2Volume control: Push the upper <+> or

lower <-> buttons to increase or decrease

the volume.

INFINITI controller AUDIO button

Push <AUDIO> to display the current audio

screen.

MAIN AUDIO OPERATION

Turning audio system on/off

The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON

position to turn on the audio system. Push

<VOL/ >or < > on the steering wheel

to turn on the last audio source which was

playing immediately before the system was

turned off. To turn off the audio system, push

<VOL/ >or < > on the steering wheel

again.

Selecting audio source

1. Turn on the audio source menu screen by

touching [Source] on the upper left corner

of the audio screen.

2. Select an item from the audio source

menu screen.

•Pushing <RADIO> or <MEDIA> can also

change the audio source.

See "Main audio buttons" earlier in this

section.

•If the audio system has been turned off

while one of the audio sources was play-

ing, turning the audio system back on will

play the audio source that was playing

when the system was turned off.

•The audio source can also be changed

with the source bar on top of the audio

screen.

NAA1620 NAA1726 NAA1714

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-65

•Audio APPS information will be displayed

when music is played via INFINITI InTouch

Apps.

Audio source bar

The audio source can be changed with the

source bar on top of the audio screen. The

source bar display can be turned on/off.

Turning source bar on/off:

You can select whether the source bar on top

of the audio screens is displayed or not. 1. Touch [Source] on the upper left corner of

the audio screen.

2. Touch [Show Source Bar] to turn the in-

dicator on/off.

Editing source bar:

The audio sources to be displayed on the

source bar can be changed.

1. Touch [Source] on the upper left corner of

the audio screen.

2. Touch [Edit Source Bar].

3. Touch one of the keys on the source bar

and then touch one of the audio sources

from the source list to register the audio

source in the source bar.

NAA1715

4-66 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

RADIO

How to view radio operation screen

* For models with radio status indicator and

reception information display.

The radio screen can be viewed and operated

on the display.

䊊

1Radio mode indicator: The current radio

mode is displayed.

䊊

2[Source]: Touch to switch to the source

select screen. See "Selecting audio

source" later in this section

䊊

3[Control]: Touch to display the control

screen. See "Radio Controls" later in this

section

䊊

4HD Radio reception status indicator (for

AM and FM):

The icon is displayed when HD Radio

digital signal is received. The icon flashes

when the radio is acquiring the digital

signal but the sound output is not yet in

the HD mode.

䊊

5Radio band indicator: The currently se-

lected radio band (AM, FM or SXM) is

displayed.

䊊

6Reception information display: Reception

information available at the time such as

frequency, station/channel name, etc..

are displayed.

On the SXM screen, touch this area to

display the category list.

䊊

736 stations/channels can be registered in

the preset list.

See "Presetting" later in this section.

NOTE

HD Radio reception needs to be activated to

receive HD Radio broadcasts. This enables

you to receive radio broadcasts digitally

NAA1716

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-67

(where available), providing a better quality

sound with clear reception. When this fea-

ture is not activated or HD Radio broadcasts

are not available, you will receive analog ra-

dio (AM/FM broadcasts).

Radio source control

There are 2 elements used in the preset list

area that are associated with radio source:

䊊

1Highlight for INFINITI controller opera-

tion.

䊊

2(With triangle) Indicator of current se-

lected preset station.

Radio operation

Radio activation and band selection:

Push <RADIO> or select the preferred radio

band (AM, FM or SXM) from the audio

source list to turn on the radio. Each time

<RADIO> is pushed, the radio band will

change.

For details, see "Selecting audio source" later

in this section.

NOTE

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio will automatically change from

stereo to monaural reception.

Seeking stations/channels:

AM and FM Radio

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to tune from low

to high or high to low frequencies and to stop

at the next broadcasting station.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to tune to the

first channel of the next or previous category.

Scan tuning:

To tune the stations/channels, touch [Con-

trol] on the display and touch [Scan]. The

stations/channels will be tuned form low to

high frequencies and stop at each broadcast-

ing station/channel for 5 seconds. Touching

[Scan] again during this 5 second period will

stop scan tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station/channel.

Presetting:

Up to 36 stations/channels can be registered

for AM, FM and SXM in the preset list.

1. Select a radio band (AM, FM or SXM).

NAA1717

4-68 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

2. Tune to the station/channel you wish to

store in the preset list.

3. (Radio screen operation) Touch and hold

one of the preset numbers in the preset

list.

(Radio memory buttons operation) Push

and hold the desired station/channel pre-

set button <1> to <6>.

4. The information such as frequency (AM/

FM), channel number (SXM), etc. will be

displayed on the preset list.

To change the preset stations/channels,

touch and hold one of the preset numbers.

You can select whether to change the

station/channel or to delete the preset set-

ting.

Alert notification (SXM only):

Favorite artists and songs can be registered

to receive an alert notice wen a song of the

registered conditions is on the radio. To tune

to the respective channel, touch [Listen to be

consistent]. The alert can be ignored by

touching [Cancel].

Satellite Radio:

•The satellite mode requires and active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The

satellite service is available only to those at

least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous

United States.

•It may take some time to receive the acti-

vation signal after the initiation of the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. Af-

ter receiving the activation signal, an avail-

able channel list will automatically be up-

dated in the radio. Switch the ignition

switch from LOCK to ACC to update the

SiriusXM channel list.

Radio Controls

Touch [Control] on the AM, FM or SXM

screen to display the control screen.

The following items are available:

FM/AM:

•[Station List]

Touch to display the available station list.

While listening to FM radio, Auto Update

is not performed.

•[Scan]

Touch to scan tune the stations

See "Radio operation" earlier in this section

•[HD mode]

When this item is turned on, the analog

and digital reception switches automati-

cally. When this item is turned off, the

reception is fixed in the analog mode.

•[HD Info]

Touch to display the HD Radio informa-

tion such as name of song, artist and al-

bum.

This item is available when [RDS Info] is

not active.

•[Tag] (HD Radio broadcasts only)

Touch to register the tag information for

iTunes Tagging. If an iPod is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information

can be stored in an iPod and be used to

purchase the songs via iTunes.

•[RDS Info] (FM only)

Touch to display the RDS information.

This item is available only when [HD Radio

Info] is not active.

SXM:

•[Categories]

Touch to display the category list.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-69

•[Direct Tune]

Touch to display the keypad to enter the

frequency and directly tune to the channel.

See "Radio operation" earlier in this section

•[Scan]

Touch to scan tune the channels.

See "Radio operation" earlier in this section

•[Instant Replay]

Up to 30 minutes of the broadcast of the

channel that has been tuned in to can be

replayed.

Touch to select from , , , ,

and

•[Tag]

Touch to register the tag information for

iTunes Tagging. If an iPod is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information

can be stored in an iPod and be use to

purchase the songs via iTunes.

•[Other]-[Favorite Artists]

Touch to set a favorite artists alert notifi-

cation. Up to 8 artists can be registered.

While a song of your favorite artist is play-

ing, touch the list and touch [Add]/

[Update]. To receive the alert notification,

select [Turn ALL Alerts ON].

•[Other]-[Favorite Songs]

Touch to set a favorite songs alert notifi-

cation. Up to 8 songs can be registered.

While a song of your favorite artist is play-

ing, touch the list and touch [Add]/

[Update]. To receive the alert notification,

select [Turn ALL Alerts ON].

•[Other]-[Customize Channel List]

Touch to customize the channel list. Only

the selected channels will be tuned in to

when you seek or scan the channels. You

can select each item or [Select All]/

[Deselect All].

•[Other]-[Favorite Artists Now Playing]

Touch to display the artist list for an alert

notice.

•[Other]-[Favorite Songs Now Playing]

Touch to display the song list for an alert

notice.

•[Other]-[Favorite Alert Settings]

Touch to turn on/off the alert notice for

the registered favorite artists and songs.

•[Other]-[Channel Locking Settings]

Touch to select or unselect the channel

that you wish to lock out. A passcode is

required to change the settings. The de-

fault passcode is 1234.

4-70 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

How to view CD operation screen

䊊

1[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list screen.

For details, see "Selecting audio source"

later in this section

䊊

2[Scan]:

Touch to play the first 10 seconds of the

tracks. Touch again to stop scanning.

䊊

3Track information:

Track information such as the song title,

artist name, and album name is displayed.

䊊

4Audio source indicator:

Indicates that CD is currently selected.

䊊

5Play time:

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

6Track number:

This indicates the current track number

and the total number of tracks.

䊊

7CD menu:

CD menu items are displayed. Touch an

icon to display the list or to change the

setting.

- [Track]

- [Folder] (for MP3, WMA, AAC)

- [Play Mode]

䊊

8Play Mode Indicator:

This indicates the current play mode.

Touch to change the play mode.

䊊

9Folder number (for MP3, WMA, AAC):

This indicates the folder number when a

CD with compressed audio files is

loaded.

NAA1718

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-71

For CDs without compressed audio files:

Mode Screen display

Disc Repeat Disc

1 Track Repeat 1 Track

Disc Random Disc

For CDs with compressed audio files:

Mode Screen display

Disc Repeat Disc

1 Folder Repeat 1 Folder

1 Track Repeat 1 Track

Disc Random Disc

1 Folder Random 1 Folder

CD player operation

Loading:

Insert the CD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The CD will be guided automati-

cally into the slot and starts playing.

After loading the CD, the CD screen will ap-

pear on the display.

Activation and playing:

The CD mode can be selected from the

source list or by pushing the <MEDIA> button

with a CD loaded to play the CD.

For details, see "Selecting audio source" ear-

lier in this section and "Main audio buttons"

earlier in this section.

If the system has been turned off while the

CD was playing, pushing <VOL/ >will

start the Audio system set to the CD screen.

Selecting track/folder:

Touch [Track] or [Folder] in the CD menu and

select a preferred track or folder from the list.

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to move to the

next or previous track.

For CDs with compressed audio files, push

<TUNE•CH•FOLDER> to move to the next or

previous folder.

For details, see "Main audio buttons" earlier in

this section.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

Push and hold <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to fast-

forward or rewind the track. Release <SEEK-

•CAT•TRACK> to play the track at normal

speed.

Scanning:

Touch [Scan] on the display to scan the

tracks in the CD. While scanning, the CD will

play the first 10 seconds of each track and

move on to the next track. Pushing [Scan]

again within the 10 seconds will stop scan-

ning.

Changing play mode:

Touch [Play Mode] or the play mode icon ([

]or[ ]) to select the play mode.

Ejecting CD:

Push <>to eject the CD. If the CD is

ejected and left unremoved, it will be re-

loaded into the slot to protect the CD.

USB (UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS)

CONNECTION PORT

Connecting USB memory device

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be a

distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

4-72 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

CAUTION

•Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or upside down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly to the

USB port.

•Do not grab the USB port cover (if

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

•Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer's owner

information regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

Two USB connectors are located on the cen-

ter console box.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port/

iPod page 4-57

When compatible storage devices are

plugged into the jack, compatible audio files

on the storage devices can be played through

the vehicle's audio system.

How to view USB operation screen

䊊

1[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list screen.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

䊊

2Play time:

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

3Track information:

Track information such as the song title,

artist name and folder name is displayed.

䊊

4Audio source indicator:

Indicates which of the two USB memory

device is selected.

NAA1719

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-73

䊊

5[USB1]/[USB2]:

Touch to switch to the other connected

USB memory device.

䊊

6Album artwork (if equipped):

An image of the CD cover is displayed

when available.

䊊

7Track number:

This indicates the track number and the

total number of tracks.

䊊

8[]/[ ]:

Touch to play or pause the track.

䊊

9USB menu:

USB menu items are displayed. Touch an

icon to display the list or to change the

setting.

- [Folder/Track]

- [Artists]

- [Albums]

- [Previous List]

- [Scan]

- [Play Mode]

䊊

10 Play mode indicator:

This indicates the current play mode.

Touch to change the play mode.

Mode Screen display

All Track Repeat All

1 Folder Repeat 1 Folder

1 Track Repeat 1 Track

All Random All

1 Folder Random 1 Folder

䊊

11 Folder number:

This indicates the folder, artist or album

number and the total number of folders/

lists.

USB memory device player

operation

Activation and playing:

USB memory device mode can also be acti-

vated from the audio source list and the audio

source bar by the touch panel operation or by

pushing <MEDIA>.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

Main audio buttons page 4-64

To play the USB memory device touch [ ],

and to pause the USB memory touch [ ]

on the USB operation screen.

Selecting play list:

Select a play list by touching an icon in the

USB menu.

•Folder/Track (List)

•Artist (List)

•Album (List)

•Previous List

Skipping tracks/folders:

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to skip to the next

or previous track.

To skip to the next or previous folder, Push

<TUNE•CH•FOLDER>.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

Push and hold <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to fast-

forward or rewind the track. Release <SEEK-

•CAT•TRACK> to play the track at normal

speed.

Scanning:

Touch [Scan] on the display to scan the

tracks in the USB memory device. While

scanning, the USB memory device will play

the first 10 seconds of each track and move

on to the next track. Touching [Scan] again

within the 10 seconds will stop scanning.

4-74 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Changing play mode:

Touch [Play Mode] on the display to select

the play mode.

Only one of the two connected USB memory

devices can be operated by the voice recog-

nition system.

IPOD PLAYER

Connecting iPod

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

iPod while driving. Doing so can be a dis-

traction. If distracted you could lose con-

trol of your vehicle and cause an accident or

serious injury.

CAUTION

•Do not force the iPod device into the

USB port. Inserting the iPod cable tilted

or upside down into the port may dam-

age the port. Make sure that the iPod

cable is connected correctly to the USB

port.

•Do not grab the USB port cover (if

equipped) when pulling the iPod cable

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

•Do not leave the iPod cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer's owner

information regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

Two USB (iPod) connectors are located on

the center console box.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port/

iPod page 4-57

The battery of the iPod will be charged while

the device is connected to the vehicle if the

iPod supports USB connection charging.

Depending on the model and firmware ver-

sion of the iPod, the display on the iPod

shows an INFINITI or Accessory Attached

screen when the connection is completed.

When the iPod is connected to the vehicle,

the iPod music library can only be operated

using the vehicle audio controls.

Compatibility:

Made for

•iPod touch® (5th generation)

•iPod touch® (4th generation)

•iPod touch® (3rd generation)

•iPod touch® (2nd generation)

•iPod touch® (1st generation)

•iPod touch®

•iPod® with video

•iPod classic®

•iPod nano® (7th generation)

•iPod nano® (6th generation)

•iPod nano® (5th generation)

•iPod nano® (4th generation)

•iPod nano® (3rd generation)

•iPod nano® (2nd generation)

•iPod nano® (1st generation)

•iPhone® 6 Plus

•iPhone® 6

•iPhone® 5S

•iPhone® 5

•iPhone® 4S

•iPhone® 4

•iPhone® 3GS

•iPhone® 3G

•iPhone®

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-75

The iPod touch® may not respond quickly

with the system in some cases.

Make sure that the iPod® firmware is up-

dated.

The Lightning

connector works with

iPhone® 5, iPhone® 5S, iPhone® 6, iPhone®

6 Plus, iPod touch® (5th generation), and

iPod nano® (7th generation).

The 30-pin connector works with iPhone®

4S, iPhone® 4, iPhone® 3GS, iPhone® 3G,

iPhone®, iPod touch® (1st through 4th gen-

eration), iPod classic®, and iPod nano® (1st

through 6th generation).

USB works with iPhone® 5, iPhone® 4S,

iPhone® 4, iPhone® 3GS, iPhone® 3G,

iPhone®, iPod touch® (1st through 5th gen-

eration), iPod classi®c, and iPod nano ® (1st

through 7th generation).

4-76 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

How to view iPod operation screen

䊊

1Search condition indicator:

This indicates the current search

condition.

䊊

2[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list screen.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

䊊

3Play time:

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

4Track information:

Track information such as the song title,

artist name and album name is displayed.

䊊

5Audio source indicator:

This indicates that iPod is currently se-

lected among other sources.

䊊

6Album artwork (if equipped):

An image of the album artwork is dis-

played when available.

䊊

7Track number:

This indicates the track number and the

total number of tracks.

䊊

8Shuffle mode indicator:

Touch to change the shuffle mode.

Mode Screen display

Shuffle albums Albums

All Songs Songs

Shuffle Off OFF

䊊

9[ ]/[ ]:

Touch to play/pause the track.

䊊

10 iPod menu:

- [Previous List]

- [Playlists]

- [Artists]

- [Songs]

- [Albums]

- [Genres]

- [Composers]

- [Podcasts]

NAA1633

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-77

- [Audiobooks]

- [Shuffle]

- [Repeat]

䊊

11 Repeat mode indicator:

Touch to change the repeat mode.

Mode Screen display

All Track Repeat All

1 Track Repeat 1 Track

Repeat Off OFF

iPod player operation

Activation and playing:

Inserting the iPod cable into the connector

will activate the iPod mode.

iPod can also be selected from the audio

sources list and the source bar by touch panel

operation or by pushing <MEDIA>.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

Main audio buttons page 4-64

To play and pause the iPod, touch [Play]/

[Pause] in the iPod menu.

Selecting search method:

A list of search methods is displayed in the

iPod menu. Touch and select an item to play

the iPod in your preferred settings.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

Push and hold <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to fast-

forward or rewind the song. Release <SEEK-

•CAT•TRACK> to play the song at normal

speed.

Changing play mode:

Touch [Shuffle] or [Repeat] from the iPod

menu to select the play mode.

Skipping songs:

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to skip to the

next or previous song.

Even when iPods or iPhones are inserted into

both of the two USB connectors, the system

recognizes only one of the connected iPods

or iPhones at a time.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING

AUDIO

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®

Streaming Audio.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® device

with streaming audio (A2DP profile), you can

set up a wireless connection between your

Bluetooth® device and the in-vehicle audio

system. This connection allows you to listen

to the audio from the Bluetooth® device us-

ing your vehicle speakers. It may also allow

basic control of the device for playing and

skipping audio files using the AVRCP

Bluetooth® profile. Not all Bluetooth® de-

vices have the same level of controls for

AVRCP. Please consult the manual for your

Bluetooth® device for more details.

Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the

wireless LAN functions at the same time may

slow down or disconnect the communication

and cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn off the wireless LAN

(Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® functions.

Regulatory Information

FCC Regulatory information:

FCC ID : HYQDNNS075

NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of

the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications

not expressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the user’s au-

thority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION : Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

4-78 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled en-

vironment and meets the FCC radio fre-

quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum permis-

sive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is de-

sirable that it should be installed and oper-

ated with at least 20 cm and more between

the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

IC Regulatory information:

The antenna cannot be removed (and

changed) by user.

NOTE: This device complies Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

CAUTION : Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

This equipment complies with IC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled en-

vironment and meets RSS-102 of the IC ra-

dio frequency (RF) exposure rules. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum permis-

sive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is de-

sirable that it should be installed and oper-

ated with at least 20 cm and more between

the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Connecting Bluetooth® streaming

audio device

Bluetooth® streaming audio device must be

connected to the vehicle before operation.

Connecting Bluetooth® device page 4-90

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-79

How to view Bluetooth® streaming

audio operation screen

䊊

1[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list screen.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

䊊

2Track information:

Track information such as the song title,

artist name and folder name is displayed.

䊊

3Audio source indicator:

This indicates that Bluetooth® streaming

audio is currently selected among other

sources.

䊊

4Play time:

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

5[Control]:

Touch to display the control screen.

Bluetooth® streaming audio operation

page 4-82

䊊

6Track number

This indicates the track number.

䊊

7Repeat mode indicator:

Touch to change the repeat mode.

Mode Screen display

All repeat All

1 Folder Repeat 1 Folder

1 Track Repeat 1 Track

Repeat Off OFF

䊊

8Bluetooth® streaming audio menu:

- [Play]

- [Pause]

- [Folder/Track]

- [Repeat]

- [Random]

NAA1634

4-80 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

䊊

9Random mode indicator:

Touch to change the random mode.

Mode Screen display

All Random All

1 Folder Random 1 Folder

Random Off OFF

Depending on the audio device that is con-

nected to the vehicle, track information may

not be displayed.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

operation

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast-

forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music

may be different between devices. Some or

all of these functions may not be supported

on each device.

•Depending on the Bluetooth® streaming

audio device that is connected, it may not

be possible to perform audio operations.

•Depending on the Bluetooth® streaming

audio device that is connected, a time lag

may occur before music is played back.

•Depending on the application except for

the native audio application that is played

on the Bluetooth® streaming audio device,

incorrect behavior (information lacking,

timer skipping, etc.) may occur.

Activation and playing:

Bluetooth® streaming audio device can be

selected from audio sources list by touching

[Source] or by pushing <MEDIA>.

Selecting audio source page 4-65

Main audio buttons page 4-64

To play the Bluetooth® streaming audio de-

vice, touch [Play], and to pause the

Bluetooth® streaming audio device touch

[Pause] in the Bluetooth® streaming audio

menu.

Selecting folder/track:

Touch [Folder/Track] to select a folder/

track.

Changing play mode:

Touch [Repeat] or [Random] in the

Bluetooth® streaming audio menu to change

the play mode.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

Push and hold <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to fast-

forward or rewind the song. Release <SEEK-

•CAT•TRACK> to play the song at normal

speed.

Skipping songs/folders:

Push <SEEK•CAT•TRACK> to skip to the next

or previous song.

To skip to the next or previous folder, Push

<TUNE•CH•FOLDER>.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

controls

Touch [Control] on the Bluetooth® Audio

operation screen to display the control

screen.

[Select Au-

dio Device]

Touch to select a different

Bluetooth® streaming audio device

from a list of registered Bluetooth®

devices.

See "Bluetooth® settings" later in

this section

[Connect

Device]

Touch to connect a new

Bluetooth® device.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-81

AUDIO SETTINGS

Audio settings can be adjusted or audio related functions can be turned on/off using the following procedure.

Some of the setting items may not be displayed when the audio system is turned off.

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Audio].

The following setting items are available:

*: Availability of the item depends on the model and specifications.

• [Sound Settings]

Setting items Action

[Bass] Adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance by touching [+]/[-], [L]/[R] or [R]/[F].

[Treble]

[Balance]

[Fade]

[Bose®Centerpoint]* When this item is turned on, surround sound playback is generated from a traditional stereo recording. Turn on this item to activate

Bose®Centerpoint and to change its effect level with [Surround Vol].

[Bose®AudioPilot]* This adjusts the volume and sound quality depending on the changes of the vehicle speeds and the noise picked up by the

microphone. It compensates for noise for different road surface conditions and open windows. Turn on this item to activate

Bose®AudioPilot.

[Surround Vol.]* Touch [+]/[-] to adjust the [Surround Vol] level if Bose®Centerpoint is turned on.

[Speed Sensitive Vol]* This automatically adjusts the volume depending on the vehicle speed. Touch [+]/[-] to change the sensitivity level.

[Driver's Audio Stage]* When this item is turned on, a better sound quality will be provided to the driver's position. The driver can enjoy a more crisp and

clear sound that is specialized for the driver's seat position. The prominence of the effect of this feature depends on the type of

music that is played. For some music, it may be difficult to recognize the effect of this feature.

4-82 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

• [Display Album Cover Art]

Turn this item on to display image files from the media device. If the media device does not contain images, no image will be displayed.

• [Radio Settings]

Setting items Action

[HD Mode AM] When this item is turned on, the analog and digital reception switches

automatically. When this item is turned off, the reception is fixed in the

analog mode.

[HD Mode FM]

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-83

DISC/USB MEMORY DEVICE

CARE AND CLEANING

DISCS

•Handle a disc by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

•Always place discs in their storage cases

when they are not being used.

•To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner

or alcohol intended for industrial use.

•The inner and outer edges of a new disc

may be rough. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB MEMORY DEVICE

•Never touch the terminal portion of the

USB memory device.

•Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory device.

•Do not store the USB memory device in

very humid locations.

•Do not expose the USB memory device to

direct sunlight.

•Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory

device.

Refer to the owner's manual for the USB

memory device for details.

GRACENOTE® END USER

LICENSE AGREEMENT

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this ap-

plication to perform disc and/or file identifi-

cation and obtain music-related information,

including name, artist, track, and title infor-

mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online serv-

ers or embedded databases (collectively,

“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other

functions. You may use Gracenote Data only

by means of the intended End-User functions

of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers for your own personal non-

commercial use only. You agree not to assign,

copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote

Software or any Gracenote Data to any third

party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EX-

PLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EX-

PRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to

use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if

you violate these restrictions. If your license

terminates, you agree to cease any and all

use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote

reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote

Servers, including all ownership rights. Under

no circumstances will Gracenote become li-

able for any payment to you for any informa-

tion that you provide. You agree that

Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under

this Agreement against you directly in its own

name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identi-

fier to track queries for statistical purposes.

SAA0451Z

4-84 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to

count queries without knowing anything

about who you are. For more information,

see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy

Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or war-

ranties, express or implied, regarding the ac-

curacy of any Gracenote Data from in the

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the

right to delete data from the Gracenote Serv-

ers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote Soft-

ware or Gracenote Servers are error-free or

that functioning of Gracenote Software or

Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you

with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in

the future and is free to discontinue its ser-

vices at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN-

TIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE

RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY

YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFT-

WARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN

NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCI-

DENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST

PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

WARNING

•Only use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

•If you find yourself unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the road in

a safe location and stop your vehicle be-

fore doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, only

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an

owner of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a telephone call with your

cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, the procedure for

connecting the phone does not need to be

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-85

performed again. Your phone is automatically

selected by the in-vehicle phone module

when the ignition switch is switched to the

ON position with the selected cellular phone

turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule. However, you can talk on only one cellu-

lar phone at a time.

The Voice Recognition system supports

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible.

See "INFINITI Voice Recognition system"

later in this section

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

•Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and wire-

less LAN functions at the same time may

slow down or disrupt communications and

could cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn wireless LAN (Wi-

Fi) off when using the Bluetooth® func-

tions.

•Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

•Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth and

search for a recommended phone list.

•You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside the service area

for your cellular phone network.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves, such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked in order to

prevent dialing.

•When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person's voice

during a call.

•This Bluetooth® system supports Wide-

band speech, which enhances the sound

quality of phone calls placed over

Bluetooth®. To take advantage of this

feature, the cellular device should be used

on a carrier supporting Adaptive Multi-

Rate Wideband (AMR-WB) or HD voice

technology. The performance of

AMR-WB may vary by carrier and calling

area. Consult your cellular carrier if you

experience issues with call quality or con-

nection.

•Immediately after the ignition switch is

turned ON, it may be impossible to receive

a call for a short period of time.

•Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connec-

tion disruption.

•While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, the battery of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual.

•If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem seems to be malfunctioning, please

visit www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth for

troubleshooting help.

•Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to be

emitted from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

•Refer to the owner's manual for the cellu-

lar phone for information regarding the

telephone pairing procedure specific to

your phone, battery charging, and cellular

phone antenna, etc.

4-86 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•The antenna display on the monitor may

not match the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

•The battery display on the monitor may

not match the battery display of some cel-

lular phones.

•Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the caller's voice clearly as

well as to minimize echoes.

•If reception between callers is unclear, ad-

justing the incoming or outgoing call vol-

ume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory Information

FCC ID : HYQDNNS075

NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of

the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications

not expressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the user’s au-

thority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION : Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled en-

vironment and meets the FCC radio fre-

quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum permis-

sive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is de-

sirable that it should be installed and oper-

ated with at least 20 cm and more between

the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

IC Regulatory information

The antenna cannot be removed (and

changed) by user.

NOTE: This device complies Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

CAUTION : Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

This equipment complies with IC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled en-

vironment and meets RSS-102 of the IC ra-

dio frequency (RF) exposure rules. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum permis-

sive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is de-

sirable that it should be installed and oper-

ated with at least 20 cm and more between

the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference

Causing Equipment Regulations.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

DENSO CORPORATION is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-87

PHONE

Connecting Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone

The cellular phone must be connected to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System be-

fore commencing operation. Up to 5 cellular

phones can be connected to the system.

See "Connecting Bluetooth® device" later in

this section

Phone selection

Select one of the connected devices for op-

eration.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Phone], then

touch [Select Phone]. A list of the con-

nected cellular phones is displayed.

2. Select one of the connected cellular

phones from the list.

3. When selection of the device is successful,

a message on the display indicates that

the cellular phone was selected.

Making a call

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Phone].

2. Select one of the following methods to

make a call.

Available methods

•[Favorites]:

Select a telephone number from a list

of personally selected numbers.

•[Call History]:

Select a telephone number from recent

incoming or outgoing calls.

•[Phonebook]:

Select a telephone number from the

phonebook.

The telephone number must be trans-

ferred to the phonebook from the cel-

lular phone prior to using this method.

"Phone and text message settings" ear-

lier in this section

•[Dial Number]:

Input the phone number manually using

the keypad displayed on the screen.

Touch [ ] to call the number.

"How to input letters and numbers"

earlier in this section

3. The number will be dialed and the screen

will change to the call in progress screen.

NAA1720

4-88 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Receiving a call

When you received a phone call, a notifica-

tion message is displayed on the touch screen

display with a ring tone.

Taking a call:

To answer a call, take one of the following

actions.

•Push < > on the steering wheel.

•Push < > on the INFINITI controller

(models without navigation system).

•Touch [Answer].

Reject a call:

To reject a call, touch [Decline].

Receiving a call while on the line to another

person:

When another phone call is received while on

the line to another person, a message box

informing you of the incoming call will appear

on the display.

Available items

Avail-

able

items

Action

[An-

swer]

Take the second call and put the first

call on hold.

[De-

cline]

Reject the second call and keep the first

call on line.

During a call

There are various options available during a

call. Select one of the following options dis-

played on the screen if necessary.

Available items

Avail-

able

items

Action

[Switch

Call]*

Answer another incoming call. The per-

son you are talking to will be placed on

hold. Push once more to speak to the

person on hold again.

[Hang

Up]

This disconnects the person you are

currently connected to and will connect

you to the person who is on hold.

[Mute]/

[Cancel

Mute]

When muted, your voice will not be

heard by the person on the other end of

the line.

NAA1654 NAA1655 NAA1721

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-89

Avail-

able

items

Action

[Hold

Call]**

Place the call on hold.

[Enter

Digits]

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such

as voicemail.

[Use

Hand-

set]

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

[End All

Calls]*

Hang up all calls including the ones that

were on hold.

*: Available when multiple lines are con-

nected.

**: Available when a single line is connected.

•To adjust the volume of the person's voice

to be louder or quieter, push <->/<+> on

the steering wheel or turn <VOL/ >

on the audio main button, while talking on

the phone.

•Touch [Mute] if you do not want your

voice to be heard by the person on the

other end of the line.

CONNECTING BLUETOOTH®

DEVICE

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System and Bluetooth®

streaming audio device. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phone or Bluetooth® audio device, you can

set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule, or Bluetooth® audio and in-vehicle audio

module. With Bluetooth® wireless technol-

ogy, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket and

listen to music on your Bluetooth® streaming

audio device via the in-vehicle system.

Connecting cellular phone/audio

device

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

2. Touch [Bluetooth] and touch [Connect

Device]

3. Touch [Add New (X/5 Free)] to register a

device.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the compatible Bluetooth® cellu-

lar phone to enter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure for cellular phones

varies depending on the model of cellular

phone. Refer to the owner’s manual for

the cellular phone for details.

When pairing is complete, the screen will

change to the Bluetooth® setup display.

If the registered device has both audio

and phone functions, the system displays

a message asking if you would like to

The procedure for connecting a cellular

phone/audio device varies depending on

the Bluetooth® device. Refer to the own-

er’s manual for the Bluetooth® device for

details.

NOTE

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to be

emitted from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

You can also visit www.infinitiusa.com/

Bluetooth or call INFINITI Consumer Affairs

Department for instructions on pairing

INFINITI recommended cellular phones or

audio devices.

4-90 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Bluetooth® settings

The Bluetooth® settings can be set in detail

according to the user's preference.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

2. Touch [Bluetooth].

3. Touch the preferred item.

•[Bluetooth]

Turn the Bluetooth® connection to the

vehicle on/off.

•[Connect Device]

Touch this item to connect to the

Bluetooth® device. You can also delete a

registered device and display information

for the registered device.

•[Select Phone]

Registered Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phones are shown on the list. Select a

device from the list to disconnect or con-

nect a Bluetooth® device.

•[Select Audio Device]

Registered Bluetooth® audio players are

shown on the list. Select a device from the

list to disconnect or connect a Bluetooth®

device.

•[Vehicle Bluetooth Device Info.]

The registered device name and the PIN

code can be changed.

HANDS-FREE TEXT MESSAGING

ASSISTANT

WARNING

•Use the text messaging feature after

parking your vehicle in a safe location. If

you have to use the feature while driv-

ing, exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

CAUTION

•This feature is disabled if the connected

device does not support the Message

Access Profile (MAP). Refer to the own-

er's manual for your phone for further

details and instructions.

Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the

use of "Text-to-Speech". Check local regula-

tions before using this feature.

The text messaging assistant system allows

the sending and receiving of the text mes-

sages through the vehicle interface.

Receiving a message

When the cellular phone connected to the

vehicle receives a text message, a notification

is displayed on the display accompanied by a

tone.

To check the message, touch [Check Now].

Touch [Later] to save the message to be

checked later.

Using the text message function with iPhone

®. If you would like to use the text message

function with your iPhone, please make the

below steps.

1) Connect iPhone® to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

2) Disconnect iPhone® from vehicle setting

menu.

5GF0038XZ

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-91

3) Turn “Show Notification” ON from

Bluetooth® setting menu on your iPhone

®.

4) Connect iPhone® from vehicle setting

menu.

Displaying received message list

1. To display the phone menu screen, take

one of the following actions:

•Push <MENU> and touch [Phone].

•Push < > on the steering wheel or

INFINITI controller (models without

navigation system).

2. Touch [Text Messages].

3. Touch an item on the list to read or to

reply to the message.

Up to 20 messages can be stored on the

message list.

Received message screen

Touching [Check Now] on the new message

notification screen or selecting a message

from the message list will show details of the

received message on the display.

Available actions:

•[Next]:

Touch to read the next message.

•[Previous]:

Touch to read the previous message.

•[Reply]:

A reply template can be selected.

"Sending a text message" later in this

section

5GF0040XZ NAA1656

4-92 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•[Play]/[Stop]:

Touch [Play] to have the hands-free

phone system read out the received mes-

sage. Touch [Stop] to stop reading.

•[Add Template]:

The received text message can be added

to the template (text list).

•[Call]:

If the sender of the message is registered

in the Phonebook, touch this menu to

make a call to the sender.

•After the message is read out, a message

box will appear and an action can be se-

lected.

[Reply] Create a reply message.

"Sending a text message" later in this

section

[Next] Have the system read out the next mes-

sage.

•If the sender's name and address is regis-

tered in the Phonebook, the name of the

sender is displayed as sender information

on the screen.

Sending a text message

To display the phone menu screen, take one

of the following actions:

•Push <MENU> and touch [Phone].

•Push < > on the steering wheel or

INFINITI controller (models without navi-

gation system).

2. Touch [Text Message].

3. Touch [Compose Message].

The following items are available.

5GF0003XZ

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-93

Available item Action

[To] [Keypad] Type in the address of the recipient using the keypad. Touch

[OK] to confirm the address.

[Phonebook] Select a recipient from the phonebook and touch [OK] to

confirm.

[Template] Select from list Select an item from the message list. The selected text will be

added to the message to be sent.

[Edit Text Message

Replies]

Select an item in the message list to be edited. Use the keypad

to edit the text and touch [OK] to complete editing.

[Send] Touch to send the message.

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE

SETTINGS

Phone settings

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

can be set in detail according to the user's

preference.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

2. Touch [Phone/Mail].

3. Touch [Phone Settings].

The following phone setting items are avail-

able.

4-94 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Incoming Call Settings:

Setting item Action

[Ringtone] Select a type of ringtone.

Phonebook/Favorites Settings:

Setting item Action

[Configure

Phonebook

Settings]

[Automatic Transfer Set-

tings]

[Phonebook Auto

Download]

Turn automatic download of the phonebook from the cellular phone on/off.

[Call History Download] Turn automatic download of the cellular phone call history on/off.

[Manual Phonebook

Transfer]

[Transfer and Overwrite]

(Depending on cellular

phone)

Manually transfer information from the phonebook on the cellular phone.

[Transfer and Add] (De-

pending on cellular

phone)

[Delete Phonebook] To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete from the list. Touch [Delete All]

to delete all items. To delete multiple items, touch [Multiple Selection].

[Favorites Set-

tings]

[Delete Favorites] To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete from the list. Touch [Delete All]

to delete all items. To delete multiple items, touch [Multiple Selection].

[Add to Favorites] [From Phonebook] Select items from the phonebook of the in-vehicle system to add to the favorites.

[From Outgoing Calls] Select items from the outgoing calls list of the in-vehicle system to add to the favorites.

[From Incoming Calls] Select items from the incoming calls list of the in-vehicle system to add to the favorites.

[From Missed Calls] Select items from the missed calls list of the in-vehicle system to add to the favorites.

[Delete Call

History]

[Delete Outgoing Call History] To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete from the list. Touch [Delete All]

to delete all items. To delete multiple items, touch [Multiple Selection].

[Delete Incoming Call History]

[Delete Missed Call History]

[Delete All Call History]

The volume of the ringtone, incoming call and outgoing call can also be adjusted.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-95

Mail settings

Various settings can be changed from the Mail Settings screen.

1. Push <MENU> on the steering wheel.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Phone/Mail].

4. Touch [Mail Settings].

The following mail setting items are available.

Setting item Action

[Message Down-

load Settings]

The transfer function can be turned on/off. When the transfer function is on, the phonebook on the cellular phone will be automatically

downloaded to the hands-free text messaging system when connected.

[Attempts for

Sending]

The number of reattempts after failing to send a text message can be selected between 0 and 3.

[New Message

Alert]

The type of tone used for the notification sound can be selected.

[Edit Text Message

Replies]

The template (text to select from when composing an outgoing message) can be edited.

4-96 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Phonebook

Information in the phonebook on cellular

phones can be downloaded.

"Phone and text message settings" earlier in

this section

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Phone].

2. Touch [Phonebook] and select from the

list.

This can be viewed on the display and used to

make calls or send text messages.

Favorites

Up to 40 phone numbers can be transferred

to the favorites list from a cellular phone.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Phone].

2. Touch [Favorite] and touch from list

It can be viewed on the display and used to

make calls or send text messages.

Voice Tag:

A custom voice tag can be recorded for

phone numbers on the favorites list and used

to dial the number by speaking it.

1. Push < > on the steering wheel or

INFINITI controller (if equipped).

2. Touch [Favorites].

3. Select an item from the list.

4. Touch [Voice Tag].

Available Items Action

[Register] Touch to record a voice tag for

the phone number.

[Re-registration] Touch to record the voice tag.

[Play] Play the recorded voice tag.

[Delete] Touch to delete the voice tag.

NAA1784 NAA1785 5GF0023XZ

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-97

BLUETOOTH® INFORMATION

Information about the connected

Bluetooth® device can be viewed.

1. Push <MENU> on the steering wheel.

2. Touch [Settings].

3. Touch [Bluetooth].

4. Touch [Vehicle Bluetooth Device Info.].

The following items are available.

Available item Action

[Device Name] The name of the connected

Bluetooth® device is dis-

played. Touch [Device Name]

to display the keyboard input

screen for editing.

[Enter PIN Code] The passkey of the connected

Bluetooth® device is dis-

played.

Touch [Enter PIN Code] to

display the keyboard input

screen.

Device Address The device address of the

connected Bluetooth® device

is displayed.

Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the

use of some of the applications and features,

such as social networking and texting. Check

local regulations for any requirements.

INFINITI InTouch provides in-vehicle access

to two types of applications: Vehicle Apps

and Mobile Apps. Vehicle Apps can be down-

loaded from App Garage in the menu screen.

Mobile Apps are a limited selection of popu-

lar smartphone-based Apps that have been

customized for in-vehicle use. Mobile Apps

can be accessed by connecting a compatible

smartphone to the vehicle.

The system allows you to download new ap-

plications, update downloaded applications

and delete downloaded applications in a

similar manner to popular smartphone oper-

ating systems.

Some pre-installed Vehicle Apps can be used

without taking any further action. However,

you will need to connect a compatible smart-

phone to the vehicle in order to update Ve-

hicle Apps or use Mobile Apps.

To view a list of compatible smartphones,

visit www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth.

The use of applications is only guaranteed for

smartphones that have been tested and ap-

proved for use with INFINITI InTouch Apps.

Only iPhone® and Android devices are cur-

rently supported. Android smartphones must

support Bluetooth® and SPP (Serial Port

Profile).

Using with iPhone®:

To use InTouch Apps with your iPhone®, the

iPhone® must be connected with a USB

cable. If an additional iPhone® is connected

by wired connection while an iPod® is being

used via a wired connection, the service will

not be available. To use the service, it is first

necessary to unplug the iPod® cable from the

USB port where the iPod® is connected.

"Steering wheel mounted controls" earlier in

this section

Using with Android smartphone:

To use InTouch Apps with your Android

smartphone, the device must be connected

via Bluetooth® and registered as a hands-

free device.

"Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System"

earlier in this section

A compatible smartphone is required to use

Mobile Apps or to access connected features

of certain Vehicle Apps. Please visit

www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth for a list of

compatible devices.

INFINITI INTOUCH APPS OVERVIEW

4-98 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

CAUTION

•To use Mobile Apps, the INFINITI

InTouch App must be installed and run-

ning on the compatible smartphone.

This App can be downloaded from the

iTunes APP Store or the Google Play

store.

•Mobile Apps also require an active sub-

scription and valid INFINITI Owner Por-

tal account. Please see

www.infinitiusa.com/InfinitiInTouch/

support/ (for United States) or

www.infiniti.ca/InfinitiInTouch (for

Canada) for more information

•Communication fees may be charged

depending on the contents of the con-

tract between the user and the cellular

phone carrier.

•Before using this service, some applica-

tions may require individual subscrip-

tions.

•For some applications, the system may

not support all functions of the applica-

tions that are installed on your smart-

phone. Additionally, due to service pro-

vider policies, the contents of

application services may be changed or

terminated.

•If the smartphone is outside the net-

work range, some functions cannot be

used.

•While driving, some operations are lim-

ited in order to prevent distracting the

driver. While driving, avoid looking at

the display.

•Before changing ownership of the ve-

hicle, delete application data (Email

data, etc.) stored on the in-vehicle de-

vice. It is also recommended that you call

your INFINITI customer center to notify

them of change of ownership.

•Some application services may be sub-

ject to change or be terminated without

prior notice.

USING APPLICATIONS

NOTE

To use Apps functions on models without

navigation system, please complete the cal-

endar setting from Clock setting screen.

"Clock settings" in the "5. Starting and driving"

section

Main operation

Push <MENU> and touch [Apps] to display

the Apps screen.

Touch the icon for the preferred application.

The selected application will be launched.

•The applications shown on the menu

screen and the display order can be cus-

tomized.

"App Garage Settings screen" later in this

section

•Some applications can be set to launch

automatically as the ignition switch is

turned on.

VEHICLE APPS

Vehicle Apps are unique applications devel-

oped by INFINITI that can be downloaded

and installed on the in-vehicle hardware.

NOTE

The INFINITI InTouch App must be installed

and running on a compatible smartphone in

order to download updates or use Vehicle

Apps that require a network connection. See

"Getting user ID and password" later in this

section.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-99

App Garage screen

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Apps].

2. Touch [App Garage].

Available settings

•[Vehicle Apps Manager] (if equipped)

Install, uninstall, and update the Vehicle

Apps application.

•[App Garage Settings]

Select icons to be displayed on the menu

screen and change the auto start and net-

work connection settings.

•Available application list

Display downloaded Vehicle Apps appli-

cations and selected Mobile Apps applica-

tions.

NAA1672

4-100 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

App Garage Settings screen

Application settings can be changed on the App Garage Settings screen.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Apps].

2. Touch [App Garage].

3. Touch [App Garage Settings].

Menu Item Action

[All Apps] Show all applications. Select an application from the list to modify additional

application-specific settings.

[Running Apps] Applications list Display all running applications. To display application information or stop an appli-

cation, select the preferred application from the list.

[Stop All] Stop all running applications.

[Menu Icon Location Setting] Applications list Show or hide the application icon on the Apps screen.

[Delete All] Delete all application icons on the Apps screen.

[Auto Start Setting] Enable this setting to automatically launch the application upon vehicle ignition.

[System Information] Display system information.

[Install Apps via USB] Install an application via USB from the INFINITI owner portal.

[Automatic Connection] (if equipped) Set the connecting interval. Vehicle Apps Manager (if equipped) connects to the

server at regular intervals in order to obtain up-to-date information (such as checking

for application updates).

[Network Notification] (if equipped) If Network Notification is on, a pop-up message is displayed when a network

connection is established.

[Installation Notification] (if equipped) If Install Notification is on, a pop-up message is displayed when a new application is

installed.

[Factory Data Reset] Discard downloaded or stored application data.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-101

NOTE

•If the Auto Start Setting is enabled, some

applications may be accessible to other

drivers of your vehicle.

•Depending on the type of application,

some applications may not be displayed in

the [Running Apps] field even if they are

running.

•When [Network Notification] (if equipped)

is turned off, some Apps will be started

automatically, meaning that network

communication will be used and commu-

nication fees will be charged.

•The Auto Start function may not be avail-

able for some applications.

VEHICLE APPS MANAGER (IF

EQUIPPED)

On this screen, you can update, uninstall, and

install Vehicle Apps.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Apps].

2. Touch [App Garage].

3. Touch [Vehicle Apps Manager].

Available setting items

•[All Apps]

Display all Vehicle Apps. You can select to

display application information, update,

install and uninstall applications.

•[My Apps]

Display installed Vehicle Apps. You can

select to display application information,

update and uninstall applications.

•[New Releases] (if equipped)

Display newly released Vehicle Apps. You

can select an item to display application

information.

In order to display the application list screen

or the installation and update screens using

the [Vehicle Apps Manager], connection via a

smartphone is required to establish commu-

nication.

NAA1723

4-102 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

MAJOR APPS AVAILABLE FOR

USE IN THIS SYSTEM

The major applications currently available for INFINITI InTouch are introduced here.

Note that the applications are subject to updates and changes.

Apps Descriptions

[Maintenance Note] You can check maintenance items inside the vehicle at your convenience.

[Calendar]* (if equipped) The day's schedule can be checked. The schedule in the [Calendar] works with web-based services.

[Email]* (if equipped) The Email account you use can also be accessed through the vehicle system. You will be informed when

a new incoming message is received. This application works with web-based services.

[Compass]

(models with navigation system)

The current traveling direction of the vehicle is shown in various kinds of skins.

Accurate information cannot be provided if GPS position information cannot be obtained.

[Clock] [Clock] shows the current time in various kinds of skins.

Mobile Apps Many popular applications you usually use on your smartphone can also be used in your vehicle.

After registering a subscription in “INFINITI InTouch Apps” you can use these applications by operating

the in-vehicle display.

Applications such as Facebook, etc.

*: Requires an account to be set up. To use [Calendar], [Email] and Mobile Apps, INFINITI InTouch Apps must be downloaded to your

smartphone.

WARNING

•Look at the display screen only briefly

while driving. Keep your eyes on the

road. Inattentive driving may lead to a

crash resulting in serious injuries or

death.

NOTE

When Email service and calendar schedule

information are displayed on the in-vehicle

display, the system controls the display

based on the in-vehicle profiles (user ID and

password). Therefore, users are required to

create a profile to make use of Email and

calendar services.

IMPORTANT:

A PIN code can be used so that other people

cannot see your Email and calendar apps.

When the engine is turned OFF and then ON

again, the PIN code has to be entered.

After the PIN code is entered, regardless of

whether your smartphone is connected to

the vehicle or not, Email and calender apps

will be viewable until the engine is turned

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-103

OFF. When the system is set to valet park-

ing, or the relevant account is erased, Email

and schedule will be erased from the system.

EXAMPLES OF HOW VEHICLE

APPS IS USED

Example Email application (if

equipped)

This App allows you to access web-based

Email through the in-vehicle interface. When

you use this application for the first time, you

will need to create a new user.

To use the Email application service, connect

a smartphone to the vehicle.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Apps].

2. Touch [Email].

3. Touch [Create new user]. The new user

input screen will be displayed.

4. Input your name and PIN code and select

Instant Access ON or OFF, and then

touch [Save].

NOTE

If the Instant Access mode is set to ON, it

is not necessary to enter a PIN code each

time.

5. Display the Select User screen, and touch

a user name.

6. Input the PIN code and touch [OK]. The

mail box screen will be displayed.

If an account is not yet set up, touch [Cre-

ate New User] to set an account (Google

account, etc.) in the Manage Account

screen displayed.

NOTE

•On the Receive Message screen, touch

sender name or address to display sender

detail screen.

•System folders (Inbox, Draft, Send, etc.)

cannot be modified.

MOBILE APPS

Mobile Apps are a limited selection of popu-

lar smartphone-based Apps that have been

customized for in-vehicle use. Mobile Apps

can be accessed by connecting your compat-

ible smartphone to the vehicle.

GETTING USER ID AND

PASSWORD

When you activate the INFINITI InTouch

Apps service for the first time, you should

acquire a user ID and a password in advance.

The acquisition of a user ID and a setup of a

password which logs into exclusive applica-

tions are required.

•It is also possible to acquire an ID and a

password directly form an INFINITI portal

site.

•The vehicle information is required for en-

tering the user information.

5GD0021XZ

4-104 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

NOTE

Other applications may not operate as a re-

sult of installing InTouch App. (It is impos-

sible to perform verification tests that com-

bine the system with all possible applications

available for a smartphone.

For details of Mobile Apps, please refer to

www.infinitiusa.com/InfinitiInTouch/

support/ (for United States) or

www.infiniti.ca/InfinitiInTouch or

www.infiniti.ca/InfinitiInTouch/fr (for

Canada).

NOTES ON LINKING

SMARTPHONE APP TO VEHICLE

NOTE

•The configuration setting for each appli-

cation within the Infiniti InTouch Apps

must be set to ON in order for the applica-

tion to be accessible through the in-vehicle

interface.

•Some applications may not run unless they

are installed on a smartphone.

•The set of applications shown on the in-

vehicle display is determined by the user ID

information registered in the INFINITI

InTouch Apps of the connected smart-

phone.

•The application services are provided on

the assumption that you have agreed to

the user policy of each application in ad-

vance. Note that the accuracy of the infor-

mation obtained from the applications is

not guaranteed.

•Updates of regular applications on smart-

phones may not always synchronize with

the Mobile Apps updates.

USING SMARTPHONE

APPLICATIONS

1. Connect a smartphone to the vehicle.

2. Push <MENU> and touch [Apps].

3. Touch [App Garage].

4. Touch an application to display the appli-

cation information.

NOTE

•The screen shown on the display and the

smartphone may not be identical.

•Mobile Apps services cannot be used un-

less the smartphone is connected to the

vehicle.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM

Initialization

The voice recognition system will activate a

few seconds after the ignition switch is

turned on. Once activation is complete, you

can start using the system by pushing <>

on the steering wheel and speaking voice

commands. If <>on the steering wheel is

pushed before the activation completes, the

display will show a message to wait until the

system is ready.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance

from the voice recognition system, observe

the following items.

•The interior of the vehicle should be as

quiet as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noise

and vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-

vent the system from correctly recognizing

the voice commands.

•Wait until the tone sounds before speak-

ing a command.

•Speak in a natural conversational voice

without pausing between words.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-105

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Push < > located on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system provides a voice menu

prompt.

When this screen is displayed, almost all of

the commands can be recognized. Available

commands for each categories can be

shown on the right side of the screen. High-

light a category listed in the left side of the

screen with the INFINITI controller to find

your preferred command.

Selecting a category by touching the

screen or pushing </OK> will execute

the command. After executing the cat-

egory command, only the commands re-

lated to the selected category can be rec-

ognized.

"Command list" in the "5. Starting and

driving" section

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a

command. You can also select a command

by directly touching the screen.

The Voice Recognition system will pause

operation when the INFINITI controller is

moved. To resume operation, push <>

on the steering wheel.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu

prompts and speak after the tone sounds

until the preferred operation is completed.

To cancel the voice command, push and hold

<>.

You can interrupt the voice prompt at any

time by pushing <>.

Operating tips

•Speak a command after the tone.

•If the command is not accepted, the sys-

tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

•Push < > on the steering-wheel

switch once to return to the previous

screen.

•Voice commands spoken from the passen-

ger seat cannot be recognized.

•When the < > on the steering wheel is

pressed while the air conditioner is set to

the Auto mode, the system controls the air

conditioner fan speed in order to improve

voice recognition performance. When the

fan speed is set higher than the 4th speed

position, the fan speed is decreased to 4th

speed. When the air conditioner is set to

the manual mode, the fan speed does not

change. The accuracy of voice recognition

may be affected depending on the fan

speed and the air direction.

•To skip the voice guidance function and

give the command immediately, push <

>on the steering-wheel to interrupt

the system. Remember to speak after the

tone.

•To cancel the command, push and hold <

>or < > on the steering-wheel.

•Push < > on the steering-wheel to stop

the voice prompt and give the command at

once. Remember to wait for the tone be-

fore speaking.

•To adjust the volume of the system feed-

back, push the volume switch on the steer-

ing wheel or use the audio system <VOL/

>while the system is making an an-

nouncement.

NAA1732

4-106 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

•For searching with Street Address, Point

of Interest and City Center, the searching

area is automatically set to the state

where your vehicle is located. Use Change

State/Province to change the search area

to another state if necessary.

How to see voice command screen

1. Push < > to display the first screen of

the voice command list.

2. Speak a command or select an item from

the voice command list. The second

screen is displayed.

3. Speak a command. The list screen is dis-

played.

4. Speak the preferred number from the list

to perform operation.

The voice commands can be spoken one at a

time following prompts step by step or the

command can be spoken successively in one

step.

䊊

1Shows available command list. It is also

available to select a command from this

list by touching or using the INFINITI

controller.

䊊

2Shows available command list. Displayed

commands are only available to execute

through voice recognition. You can say

commands from the left screen and the

right screen continuously.

䊊

3Previously selected command.

䊊

4Command list:

You can say a command from the list,

touch the screen directly or select, using

steering switch or the INFINITI control-

ler. You can say preferred word for < >

enclosed part of the command.

䊊

5[Previous]/[Next]:

Say as a command or touch to go to the

previous/next screen. It cannot be se-

lected using the steering switch or

INFINITI controller.

5GD0015XZ

First screen

5GD0016XZ

Second screen

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-107

䊊

6Command numbers:

Speak 1 to 6 numbers to select. Also, you

can touch the screen directly, using the

steering switch or INFINITI controller.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires the user speak

numbers in a certain way when giving voice

commands.

General rule:

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

(For example, if speaking 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Examples:

1-800-662-6200

“One eight zero zero six six two six two zero

zero”

For the best recognition, speak “zero” for the

number “0” and “oh” for the letter “o”.

Voice command examples

As examples, some additional basic opera-

tions that can be performed by voice com-

mands are described here.

Example 1- Placing call from hands-free

phonebook:

1. Push <>located on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator to change to

and speak “Phone”.

You can also speak “Phone” and then “Call

<Name>” successively.

3. Speak “Call <Name>”.

When options (Home, Work, etc.) are reg-

istered to a name in the contact list of a

cellular phone, the option can be com-

manded directly.

5GE0015XZ

List screen

5GE0022XZ

4-108 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Example, “Call Steve Brown Work” or “Call

Steve Brown Other”

4. The system prompts you to speak or se-

lect an item number from the displayed

list. To select a displayed matching item

speak a number from between 1 and 6.

If the selected number has more than one

phone number registered to it, the phone

number list screen is displayed.

Example 2 - Playing radio:

1. Push <>located on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator to change to

and speak “Audio”.

3. Speak “Play FM” to turn on the FM radio.

Command list

To use the Voice Recognition function, you can speak commands in the order of 1st command, 2nd command and 3rd command. You can also

operate the system with directly speaking the 2nd or 3rd command.

Variable numbers or words such as names can be applied in < > when speaking a command.

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if equipped) for the navigation command.

General command

Command Action

Show More Com-

mands

Display other commands of the same category.

Go Back Correct the last recognition result to return to the previous screen.

Exit Cancel Voice Recognition.

Next Skip to next page.

Previous Skip to previous page.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-109

General phone command

The following commands can be used during the phone Voice Recognition session.

Command Action

Dial The system makes a call to spoken phone number.

Change Number Correct the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).

4-110 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Phone command

1st command 2nd command 3rd command 4th command Action

Phone Call <Name> <1 - 6> Make a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone.

Select from the list of displayed on the right side screen.

Call <phonebook name> Make a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone.

<phonebook name> <type> Make a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone. You can select type

from <Work>, <Cellular>, <Home> or <Other>.

Dial <#> Dial Make a call to a spoken phone number.

Change Number Change the number to call.

Dial <area code> Make a call to a spoken phone number.

Speak “3 columns or 4 columns (1–****)”

<phone number static> Make a call to a spoken phone number.

Speak “7 columns or 10 columns or 11 columns or 3 columns” (“911” or “411” or

“611”).

Recent Calls <1 - 6> Make a call to the recent incoming, outgoing or missed call number.

Read Text <1 - 6> Play Listen to recent text messages received.

Reply Reply to received message.

Call Call the sender of the message.

Send Text <phonebook name> Select a text message from the list and send it a contact name. You can select type

from <Work>, <Cellular>, <Home> or <Other>.

Phonebook <phonebook name> Make a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone. You can select type

from “Work”, “Mobile”, “Home” or “Other”.

Select “Reply” to reply by message. Select “Call” to call the sender.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-111

Phone command

1st command 2nd command 3rd command 4th command Action

Phone Favorites <favorite name>

<1-6>

Access frequently called contacts by storing into them in the favorite list.

<Type>

Redial Make a call to the last outgoing phone number.

International Call <phone number> Makes an international call by allowing more than 11 digits to be spoken.

You may need to include the international call prefixes and country codes.

Add Phone Use this command to connect a compatible Bluetooth® device to the system.

Follow the on screen instructions to complete the pairing process from your

handset.

Call <Name> Work <1 - 6> To call someone's work place, say the person's name stored in the phonebook on

your cellular phone between “Call” and “Work”.

Call <Name> Cellu-

lar

<1 - 6> To call someone's cellular phone, say the person's name stored in the phonebook

on your cellular phone between “Call” and “Mobile”.

Call <Name> Home <1 - 6> To call someone's home, say the person's name stored in the phonebook on your

cellular phone between “Call” and “Home”.

Call <Name> Other <1 - 6> To call someone at a place categorized as “Other”, say the person's name stored

in the phonebook on your cellular phone between “Call” and “Other”.

NOTE

The system can read out SMS text messages

in voice. However, it cannot always read the

text correctly.

4-112 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Audio command

1st command 2nd command 3rd command Action

Audio AM Switches to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Switches to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

FM ,87.9–107.9. Switches to the FM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.

SXM ,channel #> Switches to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the preferred channel.

SXM Switches to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.

USB Play Artist

<Name>

<1 - 6> Turns on the USB mode, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Artist

<Name>

<1 - 6> Turns on the iPod mode, selecting the artist.

USB Play Artist <artist> Turns on the USB mode, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Artist <artist> Turns on the iPod mode, selecting the artist.

USB Turns on the USB mode, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod mode, selecting the last played mode.

USB Play Album

<Name>

<1 - 6> Turns on the USB mode selecting the album.

iPod Play Album

<Name>

<1 - 6> Turns on the iPod mode selecting the album.

USB Play Album <album name> Turns on the USB mode, selecting the album.

iPod Play Album <album name> Turns on the iPod mode, selecting the album.

AM <530–1710> Switches to the AM band, selecting the preferred station

FM <87.7–107.9> HD <#> Switches to the FM HD band, selecting the preferred station

CD Track <#> Turns on the CD, selecting the track number.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-113

1st command 2nd command 3rd command Action

Audio USB Play Song

<Name>

iPod Play Song

<Name>

Switches to the USB or iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands successively.

USB Play Song

iPod Play Song

Switches to the USB or iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands successively.

Play <Source Name> Plays the spoken audio source.

Play AM Switches to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Switches to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

SXM SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played

USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth Audio, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Playlist <name> <1 — 6> Turns on the iPod, playing the spoken playlist.

iPod Play Playlist <playlist> Turns on the iPod, playing the spoken playlist.

USB All Artists Displays the USB all artists list.

USB All Albums Displays the USB all albums list.

USB All Folders Displays the USB all folders list.

iPod All Artists Displays the iPod all artists list.

iPod All Albums Displays the iPod all albums list.

iPod All Songs Displays the iPod all songs list.

4-114 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Notes on operating audio by voice recogni-

tion:

•An audio device connected via Bluetooth®

cannot be operated with the Voice Recog-

nition system. Source change is only avail-

able for Bluetooth® streaming Audio.

•Song title and Artist name information will

be overwritten when another iPod®/

iPhone® is connected after song titles and

artist names in the previously connected

iPod®/iPhon®e have been installed.

•If two USB devices are connected at the

same time, voice operation will only be

available for use with one registered and

selected device. When selecting “YES” in

the pop-up screen that displays after a

new USB audio device is connected, the

USB audio device is registered in the voice

recognition system and is selected auto-

matically. One iPod and one USB device

can be registered in the system. If a USB

audio device is newly registered, old data

is overwritten. It may take a few moments

to register an audio device. If you want to

enable voice operation for music stored on

a previously registered audio device, select

the device you want to use in advance.

"Voice recognition settings" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section

Even when a device has been previously

registered, simply connecting the device

will not result in it being selected auto-

matically.

•The Voice Recognition system may not

function when the song information is too

long (artist names, album titles, song titles

and playlists, etc.).

•The SXM function will not operate without

a subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-115

Information command

1st command 2nd command Action

Information Voice Menu Connects to the INFINITI InTouch

Services Response Specialists. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual

for details.

Operator Connects to the INFINITI InTouch

Services Response Specialists. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual

for details.

Where am I?* Displays the information of the current position.

Fuel Prices Displays the fuel prices.

Weather Forecast Displays the weather forecast.

Current Weather Displays the nearby weather (current weather).

Sports Scores Displays the sports scores.

Traffic Information* Turns the traffic information system on or off.

Route Information* Displays the route information.

*: Models with navigation system only.

NOTE

The Fuel Prices, Weather Forecast, Current

Weather, Sports Scores and Traffic Infor-

mation will not operate without a subscrip-

tion to SiriusXM Radio.

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

Voice recognition functions can be set.

1. Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

2. Touch [Voice Recognition].

3. Touch the item you want to set.

Available settings

•[Minimize Voice Feedback]:

Set the Minimize Voice Feedback function

[ON] (short feedback) or [OFF] (long

feedback).

•[Audio Device Setting]

Select an audio device to be operated via

voice recognition system from the list of

devices registered to the in-vehicle audio

system. The device with an indicator light

illuminated can be operated with voice

recognition system.

4-116 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

The information screen sets or displays various information that is helpful for using the vehicle. Available items include vehicle information, traffic

information, current location information and navigation software version (if equipped).

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [Information].

Menu item Result

[Eco Drive Report] Display the Eco Drive Report for “Start”/”Cruise”/”Deceleration”.

[History] The Eco Drive Report History screen can be scrolled.

Touching [ <]/[ >] while the Eco Drive Report History screen is displayed will display a previous or newest

history.

[Reset] Reset the Eco Drive Report screen.

The average for the Reset-to-Reset period is stored as an Eco Drive Report history.

[Traffic Information.]* Allows traffic information setup. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[Map Information]* Display the navigation system unit identification number, the current map version, and the software

version. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[InTouch Services]* Display the INFINITI InTouchTM Services information. Refer to the Navigation System Owner's Manual for

details.

[SXM Info] Display the SiriusXM Travel Link information.

*: Models with navigation system only.

NOTE

•A SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to view Traffic Info.

•The actual fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the vehicle information display. This is due to the timing

difference in updating the information and does not indicate a malfunction.

INFORMATION MENU

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-117

SIRIUSXM TRAVEL LINK®

SiriusXM Travel Link Information is a sub-

scription service offered by SiriusXM Satellite

Radio. It is necessary to subscribe to use the

SiriusXM Travel Link information.

This service provides real-time information

regarding current weather, fuel prices, sports

scores, stock tickers and movie times where

available. The SiriusXM Travel Link is broad-

cast to the vehicle by SiriusXM Satellite Ra-

dio.

The service enables you to view detailed in-

formation and forecasts of an area of inter-

est.

WARNING

SiriusXM Travel Link information is not a

substitute for attentive driving. Weather

conditions change constantly and emer-

gency situations can arise without warn-

ing. Relying only on SiriusXM Travel Link

information could result in serious personal

injury.

Viewing SiriusXM Travel Link®

SiriusXM Travel Link information is available

in limited markets. To subscribe to or check if

this service is available in the area, call

1–866–635–2349 or access

www.siriusxm.com/travellink.

NOTE

•If a contract is not completed for the

SiriusXM Travel Link information service, a

message appears.

•The weather information is available only

for areas that provide weather informa-

tion to SiriusXM Travel Link.

To access the SiriusXM Information menu:

1. Push <MENU>.

2. Touch [SXM Info]

5GB0496X

Example

4-118 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Automotive Weather information

Menu item Action

[Automotive Weather] [Current Weather] Display default setting city current weather condition information. Touch [Selected City] to change the city.

[5–DAY Forecast] Display the five-day weather forecast information for the default setting city. Touch [Selected City] to

change the city.

[Graphical Map]* Display a graphical map of the weather information on the display. Refer to the Navigation Owner's

Manual for details.

[Alert Map]* Show Alert Map information on the display. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[Alert List]* Display the list of weather alerts. Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

*: Models with navigation system only.

Fuel Prices information

Menu item Action

[Fuel Prices] Display fuel prices. Select Gas station from the fuel prices list to display detail information or call a selected

gas station from the list.

Touch [Select Fuel Type] to select fuel type information, touch [Prices] to display the fuel price list.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-119

Sports Score information

Menu item Action

[Sports Scores] Select from list Display current event state

(scheduled game, during the

game, match results)

Select from list XM channels to display information Select to listen to the radio.

[Select League] [Add League] Add favorite sports genre for

the list. When the number of

registration is 10, it will be

grayed out.

[Delete League] [Multi Select] Delete multiple selected sports

scores.

[Delete All] Delete all sports scores.

Select from list Delete a selected sports score.

Select from list Display the detail of a score.

Stock Tickers information

Menu item Action

[StockTicker] Display stock names, stock prices, fluc-

tuation contents, variable stock prices,

and the receiving date/time.

[Add Stock] Add displaying stock

[Delete Stock] [Delete All] Delete all stocks.

[Multi Select] Delete multiple selected stock.

Select from list Delete a selected stock.

4-120 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Movie Times information

Menu item Action

[Movie Listings] [Select City] Select from list Select the city.

[Theater] [Movies] Select from list Display detailed movie infor-

mation.

[Theater Info] Display theater information.

[GO]* Set a destination selected

from the list of theaters.

[Near Destination]* Display the theater near the

vehicle's destination.

[Near Current Loc.]* Display the theater near the

vehicle's current location.

[Selected City] Change the city.

[Movie] Select from list Display information for the

movie theater selected from

the list.

[Details] Display movie title, rating and

run time.

*: Models with navigation system only.

SXM Info Settings information

Menu item Action

[SXM Info Settings] [Weather Alert] Set weather alert on/off.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-121

Default City Settings information

Menu item Action

[Default City] State list City list Set the current location. This setting is

necessary to display weather informa-

tion and movie information.

[Change Country] Select country.

SETTINGS MENU

The Infiniti InTouch system can be customized to make it easier for you to use by adjusting various settings.

Push <MENU> and touch [Settings].

Setting item Result

[Bluetooth] Set the Bluetooth® Audio and Phone.

"Connecting Bluetooth® device" earlier in this section

[Phone/Mail] Display the Phone & Mail setting screen.

"Phone and text message settings" earlier in this section

4-122 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Setting item Result

[Navigation]* Display the Navigation setting screen.

Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[Audio] Display the Audio settings screen.

See "Audio settings" earlier in this section

[Screen] Set the screen display to the preferred settings.

See "Screen settings" earlier in this section

[Volume Adjustment] Set the volume for each item.

See "Volume settings" earlier in this section

[Clock] Set the Clock to your preferred settings.

See "Clock settings" earlier in this section

[InTouch Services] Set INFINITI InTouch

Services.

Refer to the Navigation Owner's Manual for details.

[Voice recognition] Set Minimize Voice Feedback to on/off and the audio setting for voice

recognition use.

[Camera/Sonar] Set the camera and parking sensor (sonar) to the preferred settings.

See "Around View Monitor setting" earlier in this section

[Other] [Language] Set the language to the preferred settings.

See "Language settings" earlier in this section

[Keyboard Type] Set the Keyboard Type to [QWERTY] or [ABC].

[Low on Fuel Alert] Set the fuel low notification to on/off.

[Software information] Display the software information.

* : Models with navigation system.

NOTE

•The displayed items vary depending on the vehicle model and equipped options.

•The order of displayed items can be sorted.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-123

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

For assistance or inquiries about Infiniti InTouch, or to order updated map data for the navigation system (if equipped), it is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer.

SYSTEM UNIT

Liquid crystal display

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen is too dark. The cabin temperature is too low. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes

moderate.

Screen brightness is set to the maximum darkness. Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

"Screen settings" earlier in this section

The screen is too bright. Screen brightness is set to the maximum

brightness.

Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

"Screen settings" earlier in this section

A small black spot or a small bright spot appears on

the screen.

This is a phenomenon typical to liquid crystal

displays.

This is not a malfunction.

A dot or stripe pattern appears on the screen. Electromagnetic waves that are generated from

neon billboards, high voltage electric power

cables, ham radios or other radio devices equipped

to other vehicles may adversely affect the screen.

This is not a malfunction.

Image lag appears on the screen. Phenomenon typical of liquid crystal displays. This is not a malfunction.

Image motion displayed on the screen is slow. The cabin temperature is below 32 °F (0 °C). Wait until the in-cabin temperature rises to above

32 °F (0 °C).

When looking at the screen from an angle, the screen

lightens or darkens.

This is a phenomenon typical to liquid crystal

displays.

Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

"Screen settings" earlier in this section

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4-124 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen turns blue or an error message is displayed

on the display.

The SD card is not inserted into the slot correctly. If the SD card containing map data is accidentally

removed, after re-inserting the SD card

containing map data into the slot, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and then back

in the ON position again.

A system malfunction has occurred. It is recommended you contact an INFINITI

retailer for inspection.

AUDIO SYSTEM

HD Radio Technology

Sound:

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Delay in digital audio on HD Radio broadcasts. The radio acquires an analog station first and

blends to a digital signal.

This is not a malfunction.

Audio skip, stutter or echo. The radio station has not properly aligned the digi-

tal and analog audio.

Verify correct operation on another station. Report

any station with poor performance.

Volume changing up/down. The radio station has not properly aligned digital

and analog audio level.

Verify correct operation on another station and

check www.hdradio.com for stations in the area.

Report any station with poor performance.

Sound fading in and out. The transition between analog and digital is taking

place (blending).

Verify transition performance on several stations in

the area. Report any station with poor perfor-

mance.

Excessive blending (Transition between analog and

digital).

The receiver is located near the edge of the digital

coverage area.

Refer to www.hdradio.com to verify stations in

your coverage area.

Digital audio not better than analog audio. Audio processing on the digital audio at a station

can potentially decrease the digital audio sound

quality.

Verify correct operation on another station. Report

any station with poor performance.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-125

Functional:

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Keep losing my local stations. The digital coverage is slightly less than the analog

signal coverage.

Verify correct operation on another station. This is

expected behavior.

Shadowing (urban/terrain) can cause reduced digi-

tal coverage.

Verify correct operation on another station.

Some data fields are blank. Text information is sent at the broadcaster's discre-

tion.

Verify correct operation on another station. Report

station issues.

Text information is truncated / appears to be more

available.

The display is limited to a fixed number of charac-

ters and more data is being sent than can be

shown.

This is intended behavior. Refer to the Owner's

Manual for ability to access addition.

AM reception changes at night. AM stations are required by the government (FCC)

to lower their power at night.

This is not a malfunction.

4-126 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Compact Disc (CD) player

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Music cannot be played back. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert a CD with the label side facing up.

Moisture has accumulated inside the unit. Wait until the moisture evaporates. (approximately

1 hour)

The cabin temperature is too high. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes

moderate.

The disc is scratched or dirty. Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

Scratched discs cannot be recovered. Replace the

disc.

Depending on the condition in which they are

stored, discs may become unreadable due to

deterioration (for example, keeping the discs in the

passenger compartment, etc.).

Replace the disc with a deterioration-free disc. Do

not use a deteriorated disc. The label surface of the

disc may crack or chip, and the layer of the label

surface may eventually peel off.

Compressed audio files cannot be played back. If both music CD files (CD-DA data) and

compressed audio files (MP3 data, etc.) are mixed

on one disc, the compressed audio files cannot be

played back.

Prepare a disc that contains compressed audio files

only.

The files are not named using characters that are

compliant with the specifications.

Use the character codes and the number of

characters that are compliant with the

specifications for folder names and file names. In

addition, always use “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or

“.wma” file extensions.

It takes a long time before the music starts playing. The disc contains a large amount of data. Some time may be required to check the files. It is

recommended that unnecessary folders or any files

other than compressed audio files should not be

recorded on a disc.

The sound quality is poor. The disc is dirty. Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-127

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

No sounds are played although the CD play time is

displayed.

The system is playing the first track of a mix mode

disc. (Mix mode is a format in which data except

music is recorded on the first track and music data

is recorded on one other than the first track in a

session.)

Play music data in other tracks.

Music cuts off or skips. The combination of writing software and hardware

might not match; or the writing speed, writing

depth, writing width, etc. might not match the

specifications.

Create a disc using different writing speed settings,

etc.

The system skips the selected track and moves to

the next track.

A non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension

of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”.

Prepare MP3/WMA files.

Some of the file cannot be played due to copyright

protection.

Prepare playable files.

The tracks do not play back in the desired order. The folder locations on the disc are changed by the

writing software while the files are written on the

disc.

Check the settings of the writing software and

create a new disc.

4-128 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

iPod player

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize an iPod. The connector cable is not correctly connected or

the iPod does not correctly operate.

Connect the connector cable again. If the system

does not recognize the iPod after performing the

procedure above, reset the iPod.

The iPod that is to be connected is not compatible

with the system.

Check the iPod model and firmware versions

available for the system.

The USB extension cable is not correctly connected. Do not use a USB extension cable.

The cable is rapidly connected to or disconnected

from the USB connector.

Slowly connect or disconnect the USB cable.

An iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is connected to the in-vehicle audio

system while headsets, etc. are connected to the

iPod.

Remove all equipment from the iPod after

disconnecting the iPod from the system, and then

connect it to the system again.

The iPod is not operating normally. Disconnect and reconnect the iPod to the

in-vehicle audio system.

The system plays back an album/track that includes

particular album art.

Disconnect the iPod from the in-vehicle audio

system and then reset the iPod. Disable the album

art and then reconnect the iPod to the system.

An iPod does not respond. There are too many tracks in a category. Decrease the number of tracks in a category (less

than 3,000 tracks).

The shuffle function is turned on. Turn off the shuffle function if many tracks are

stored on the iPod.

Music cannot be played back. The connector is not connected to the iPod. Firmly connect the connector until it clicks.

Music stops playing. The sound cuts off due to vibration resulting from

the iPod being in an unstable location.

Place the iPod in a stable location where it does

not roll over.

The sound is distorted. The EQ (equalizer) function of the iPod is turned on. Turn off the EQ (equalizer) function.

The iPod battery requires more time than usual to

charge.

Charging the iPod battery may take longer while

the iPod is playing.

If the iPod requires charging, it is recommended to

stop playback

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-129

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

An iPod cannot be charged while connected to the

system.

The cable connected to the iPod may be

deteriorated (cable disconnection, etc.).

Check the cable.

The connected iPod cannot be operated with the

in-vehicle system.

- The operation of an iPod must be performed using

the in-vehicle audio system after the iPod is

connected to the system.

The sound skips. Surrounding circumstances (noise, etc.) may cause

the audio to skip.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

The USB extension cable is not correctly connected. Do not use a USB extension cable.

USB memory

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize a USB device. A USB extension cable is used. Do not use a USB extension cable.

A USB hub is used. Do not use a USB hub.

Connection or disconnection operation of the USB

device was too abrupt.

Connect or disconnect the USB device slowly.

4-130 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Bluetooth® streaming audio

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Registration cannot be performed. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible

with the in-vehicle audio system.

Check the Owner’s Manual for the Bluetooth®

audio device.

The PIN code is incorrect. Check the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio

device that is to be registered.

Check that the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio

device is consistent with that for the in-vehicle

audio system.

Another Bluetooth® device is used in the vehicle. Turn off the other Bluetooth® device and wait until

registration is completed.

Music cannot be played. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible

with the in-vehicle audio system.

Check the Owner’s Manual for the Bluetooth®

audio device.

The system is not in the Bluetooth® audio mode. Push <AUDIO> to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode.

The Bluetooth® adapter is turned off. Turn on the Bluetooth® adapter when it is used for

a Bluetooth® audio device.

Music stops playing. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible

with the in-vehicle audio system.

Visit www.infinitiusa.com/bluetooth/ to search for

a recommended Bluetooth® audio device.

A cellular phone is connected. This is not a malfunction.

The sound may cut off when a Bluetooth® audio

device is operated.

Push <AUDIO> to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode, and then operate the device on the vehicle’s

display screen.

Audio operation cannot be performed. A Bluetooth® audio device that does not support

audio operations is in use.

This is not a malfunction.

Refer to the owner’s manual for the Bluetooth®

audio device.

An error occurs when connecting to a Bluetooth®

audio profile.

Turn the power source of the Bluetooth® audio

player off and on, and then resume connection with

the system.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-131

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

A cellular phone cannot be registered. The cellular phone is not compatible with the

in-vehicle hands-free phone system.

Use a cellular phone compatible with the system. Visit

the website (www.infinitiusa/bluetooth) for model

compatibility.

Registration of the cellular phone has been

performed incorrectly.

Check the registration procedure, and then register the

cellular phone again.

A cellular phone cannot be connected or

becomes disconnected after registration is

complete.

The Bluetooth® setting of the in-vehicle hands-free

phone system is turned off.

Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the system.

The Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone is

turned off.

Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone.

The remaining battery level of the cellular phone is

low.

Charge the battery of the cellular phone.

The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be

disrupted depending on the location of the cellular

phone.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by

metal or far away from the in-vehicle hand-free phone

system. Do not place the cellular phone close to the

seats or your body.

Registration of the cellular phone is not complete. Perform registration of the cellular phone.

A call to a particular phone number fails. If the system tries to make a call several times to

the same phone number (for example: the party

does not respond to the call, the party is out of the

network service area, or the call is abandoned

before the party responds), the system may reject a

request to make a call to the phone number.

Turn the cellular phone off and then on again to reset

the connection.

4-132 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize the

connection of a cellular phone and cannot

receive or make a call.

The cellular phone is not compatible with the

in-vehicle hands-free phone system.

Use a cellular phone compatible with the system. Visit

the website (www.infinitiusa/bluetooth) for model

compatibility.

The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the

cellular phone again.

The phone operation is limited by the functions

(such as dial lock, etc.) of the registered cellular

phone.

Remove any settings that are limiting use of the cellular

phone, and then perform registration again.

Registered voice tag is cut short. Speaking of the voice tag did not fit within the 5

second recording period after the beep.

Speak the voice tag within 5 seconds after the beep.

The other party cannot hear your voice. The

other party can hear your voice, but it cracks

or cuts out.

The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the

cellular phone again.

The fan speed of the air conditioner is too fast. Decrease the fan speed of the air conditioner.

The ambient noise level is excessive. (For example:

heavy rain, construction sites, inside a tunnel,

oncoming vehicles, etc.)

Close the windows to shut out ambient noise.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is too

loud.

Reduce the vehicle speed, and then speak a command.

The incoming or outgoing voice level is too loud. Adjust the incoming or outgoing voice level properly.

The voice is cut out or noise is heard during a

call.

The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be

disrupted depending on the location of the cellular

phone.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by

metal or far away from the in-vehicle hands-free phone

system. Do not place a cellular phone close to the seats

or your body.

When a cellular phone is operated to make a

call, the hands-free function is no longer

available.

Some models of a cellular phone do not switch to

the hands-free mode when they are operated to

make a call.

This is not a malfunction. Make a call again using the

hands-free function.

The other party's voice cannot be heard.

There is no ring tone.

The volume level is set to the minimum. Adjust the volume level.

A cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the

cellular phone again.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-133

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Each volume level (ring tone, incoming voice

or outgoing voice) is different.

Each volume level is not adjusted properly. Adjust each volume level properly.

The antenna display is different between the

navigation screen (if equipped) and the screen

on a cellular phone. Making or receiving a call

is unavailable even though the antenna

display indicates that it is possible to do so.

The antenna display varies depending on the model

of cellular phone.

This does not indicate a malfunction. The antenna

display and remaining battery level shown on the

navigation screen may be different from those shown on

the cellular phone screen. Use them as a reference.

A voice cannot be heard clearly when using a

cellular phone behind tall buildings.

Some structures such as tall buildings, etc. may

cause irregular reflection of radio waves or

completely shut out radio waves that are used for

cellular phones.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard when using a cellular phone

under/near areas of elevated railroads, high

voltage electric power cables, traffic signals,

or neon billboards, etc.

Electromagnetic waves that are generated from

radio devices may adversely affect the cellular

phone.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard in the sound from the audio

system while using a cellular phone.

Radio waves that are generated from a cellular

phone may adversely affect the sound from the

audio system.

This is not a malfunction.

The sound skips. The cellular phone may have turned on the wireless

LAN (Wi-Fi).

Turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi).

Phonebook cannot be downloaded. An error occurred during the phone pairing process. Re-register the Bluetooth® pairing information after

deleting the pairing information from both the cellular

phone and the vehicle system.

4-134 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

MONITOR SYSTEM

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The image on the display is not clear. The front of the camera lens is dirty. Gently wipe off the dirt with a damp soft cloth.

Moisture drops such as rain or snow form on the

camera lens.

Gently wipe off the drops with a soft cloth.

Light such as sunlight or a headlight beam from

another vehicle directly enters the camera.

This is not a malfunction. It will return to normal

when the light disappears.

Moisture condensation occurs in the camera lens

due to rapid temperature change.

This is not a malfunction. It will return to normal

after driving for short period of time.

Objects on the display may not be clear in a dark

place or at night.

Adjust the brightness or the contrast settings of

the screen.

The image on the display flickers. The vehicle is under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.

The colors of the object on the display look

different from those of the actual object.

This is a typical phenomenon for cameras. This is not a malfunction.

Image does not appear on the display. The shift lever is not shifted to the R (Reverse)

position.

Shift the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

[Automatic Display with Sonar] is OFF. Set [Automatic Display with Sonar] to ON.

The image appears on the display from the wrong

angle.

The lift gate is open. Close the lift gate.

The image on the display is not clearly visible. Strong light or reflected light enters the camera. This is not a malfunction.

The sensor is not detective. There is ice or snow on the sensor. Flush out ice and snow with warm water.

There is dirt, mud or wax on the sensor. Gently wipe off the dirt with a damp soft cloth.

Vertical lines appear on the image. Strong reflected light from the bumper enters the

camera.

This is not a malfunction.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-135

VOICE RECOGNITION

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not operate or fails to interpret

the command correctly.

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or make sure the other

occupants are quiet.

The fan speed of the air conditioner is too fast. Decrease the fan speed of the air conditioner.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is too

loud.

Reduce the vehicle speed, and then speak the

command.

The voice command is spoken in a low voice. Speak the command in a louder voice.

The command is spoken too fast. Speak the command after confirming the following:

voice guidance is announced, a tone sounds, and

an icon on the screen changes from white to

orange.

The command is spoken too slowly. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between

words.

The system prompts to repeat a command. Pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.

The command is spoken too late after the tone. Speak the command within 5 seconds after

confirming the following: a voice guidance is

announced, a tone sounds, and an icon on the

screen changes from white to orange.

An improper command is spoken. Speak the command or a number that is displayed

in white on the screen.

Speak a command that is shown in the command

list.

The system does not correctly recognize a number

spoken.

Many numbers are spoken at once. Place a pause between the appropriate digits for

correct recognition by the system. When speaking

a telephone number, place a pause between area

codes and dial codes, etc.

Voice recognition does not operate, and a tone

sounds twice after pushing the <>.

The <>is pushed before the system is ready to

accept voice commands.

After turning on Infiniti InTouch, wait for the voice

recognition system to be ready before giving voice

commands.

4-136 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The USB memory device cannot operate with voice

recognition.

Depending on the device, an iPhone® or iPod® may

be recognized as a USB memory device.

This is not a malfunction

More than one audio device is connected to USB

port.

Only one audio device can be operated with the

voice recognition system even when multiple

numbers of devices are connected. Select an audio

source to operate with the voice recognition

system.

The USB/iPod operation screen is grayed out. The audio device is not connected. Connect an audio device to the system.

An audio source to be operated with the voice

recognition system has not been selected.

Select an audio source to be operated with the

voice recognition system.

An error message is displayed when trying to select

a track and operate the USB/iPod.

The track information is being processed for

registration by the system.

Song information will be loaded into the system

when a new audio device is registered for the first

time or when the song information in the

pre-registered device has been changed. Wait for

the loading to complete (this may take from a few

minutes to up to an hour).

The number of songs stored on the connected

audio device exceeds its capacity.

Decrease the number of songs stored on the audio

device.

No song is stored on the audio device. Store songs on the connected audio device. Storing

songs with information such as artist name, album

name, song name, and playlist, etc., will make voice

recognition song search available.

The Navigation item is not displayed in the voice

operation menu screen.

Voice Recognition command preparation for the

navigation system is not completed immediately

after the system is started.

Display any screen other than the Voice

Recognition screen, and then push <>.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-137

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not correctly recognize a Point of

Interest (POI) name spoken.

There are some rare cases where a POI is

unavailable by Voice Recognition but the location

can be found on the map.

This is not a malfunction. Consider using an

alternative search method, like street address.

Partial or Alias name is spoken. For best results, speak the full name.

Some POI category names can only be searched

when nearby.

This is not a malfunction.

4-138 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving.........5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...........5-4

Three-way catalyst (if equipped) ..........5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....5-5

On pavement and off-road driving

precautions .......................5-10

Avoiding collision and rollover ...........5-10

Off-road recovery ...................5-11

Rapid air pressure loss ................5-11

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ........5-12

Driving safety precautions .............5-12

All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety

precautions (if so equipped).............5-14

Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer system...........5-14

Ignition switch .......................5-15

Steering lock ......................5-15

Key positions ......................5-15

Push-button ignition switch (if equipped) ......5-16

Key positions with the push-button ignition

switch ..........................5-17

Removing the start/stop button ..........5-17

Emergency engine shut off .............5-18

Before starting engine ..................5-18

Starting engine.......................5-18

Starting procedure with the key ..........5-18

Starting procedure using the push-button

ignition switch (if equipped) .............5-19

Driving the vehicle ....................5-20

Driving with Automatic Transmission ......5-20

Parking brake........................5-27

Applying/releasing manually ............5-27

Applying automatically (vehicles with

automatic transmission) ...............5-28

Releasing automatically ...............5-28

Emergency braking ..................5-28

Idle Stop/Start System (if equipped) .........5-29

Automatic engine switch-off ............5-29

Automatic engine start ...............5-30

Deactivating/activating the Idle Stop/Start

function .........................5-30

Lane departure warning (LDW) system

(if equipped) ........................5-31

LDW system operation ...............5-32

How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . .5-33

LDW system limitations ...............5-33

LDW system temporarily unavailable.......5-35

System malfunction .................5-35

System maintenance .................5-36

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if equipped) . .5-36

BSW system operation ...............5-38

How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . .5-40

BSW system limitations ...............5-40

System temporarily unavailable ..........5-45

Radar maintenance ..................5-46

FCC Notice .......................5-46

Cruise control .......................5-46

Cruise control operations ..............5-47

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (Full speed

range) (if equipped) ....................5-49

ICC system operation ................5-50

ICC switch (cruise control lever) ..........5-51

ICC system display and indicators.........5-52

Operating ICC .....................5-53

ICC Limitations ....................5-57

Tips for driving with the ICC system .......5-58

System temporarily unavailable ..........5-61

System maintenance .................5-62

Forward emergency braking (FEB) system (if

equipped) ..........................5-63

FEB system operation ................5-64

Turning the FEB system on/off ..........5-66

FEB system limitations................5-67

System temporarily unavailable ..........5-68

System maintenance .................5-69

FCC Notice .......................5-69

Active sound enhancement ...............5-70

Active sound enhancement .............5-70

Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (if equipped).....5-71

Important safety notes................5-71

Detecting parking spaces ..............5-72

Parking .........................5-73

Exiting a parking space ...............5-74

Canceling IPA .....................5-76

Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor) function

(if equipped) ........................5-76

Sonar function overview...............5-78

Range of the sensors.................5-82

Sonar function OFF switch.............5-82

Sonar function settings ...............5-83

Sonar function limitations..............5-83

Problems with sonar function ...........5-84

System maintenance .................5-85

Break-in schedule .....................5-85

Fuel efficient driving tips ................5-86

Increasing fuel economy.................5-87

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (if equipped)........5-87

Parking ...........................5-88

Switching off the engine ..............5-89

Extended parking ...................5-90

Electric power steering system ............5-90

Brake system ........................5-91

Brake precautions ...................5-91

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..........5-92

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .......5-93

Traction Control System (TCS)...........5-95

Characteristics of VDC ...............5-95

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) . . . .5-96

Steer Control......................5-96

Hill Start Assist (HSA) ..................5-96

Cold weather driving ...................5-97

Freeing a frozen door lock .............5-97

Antifreeze ........................5-97

Battery..........................5-97

Draining of engine coolant .............5-97

Tire equipment .....................5-97

Special winter equipment ..............5-98

Driving on snow or ice ................5-98

WARNING

•Never leave children or adults who

would normally require the support of

others alone in your vehicle. Pets should

not be left alone either. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or controls

and inadvertently become involved in a

serious accident and injure themselves.

On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly fatal

illness to people or animals.

•Properly secure all cargo to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a

sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

•To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated ca-

pacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)

and evenly distribute the load.

EXHAUST GAS (CARBON

MONOXIDE)

WARNING

•Do not breathe exhaust gas; it contains

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can

cause unconsciousness or death.

•If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

•Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

•Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for an extended period of time.

•Keep the lift gate closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gas could be drawn

into the passenger compartment. If you

must drive with the lift gate open, fol-

low these precautions:

–Open all the windows.

–Turn the air recirculation switch off

and set the fan control to the highest

level to circulate the air.

•If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal ion the lift gate or body, follow

the manufacturer's recommendations

to prevent carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle.

•The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic when-

ever:

–You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger compart-

ment.

–You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

–You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST (IF

EQUIPPED)

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Ex-

haust gas in the three-way catalyst is burned

at high temperatures to help reduce pollut-

ants.

WARNING

•The exhaust gas and the exhaust system

are very hot. Keep people, animals and

flammable materials away from the ex-

haust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

•Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

wastepaper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

•Do not use leaded gasoline. (See "Rec-

ommended fluids/lubricants and ca-

pacities" in the "9. Maintenance and

Schedules" section.) Deposits from

leaded gasoline seriously reduce the

ability of the three-way catalyst to help

reduce exhaust pollutants and/or dam-

age the three-way catalyst.

•Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems may cause overrich

fuel to flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if noticeable

loss of performance or other unusual op-

erating conditions are detected. Have

the vehicle inspected promptly. It is rec-

ommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

•Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the

engine to misfire, damaging the three-

way catalyst.

•Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

•Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if present),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure

for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-

ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-

minates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This se-

quence will continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illumi-

nated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-

sons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-

hicle that prevent the TPMS from working

properly. Always check the TPMS telltale af-

ter replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement

or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

The vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that

monitor the tire pressures in all four tires The

tire pressure monitor warns you if the pres-

sure drops in one or more of the tires The tire

pressure monitor only functions if the corre-

sponding sensors are fitted to all wheels.

Information on tire pressures is shown in the

vehicle information display. After a few min-

utes of driving, the current tire pressure of

each tire is shown in the [Serv.] menu of the

vehicle information display.

WARNING

•Radio waves could adversely affect

electrical medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact their

electrical medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

•If the low tire pressure warning light il-

luminates or a tire pressure-related

warning is displayed by the vehicle in-

formation display while driving, avoid

sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with

under-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the likeli-

hood of tire failure. Serious vehicle dam-

age could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious personal

injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire and loading informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a replacement tire as

soon as possible.

•If a replacement wheel is fitted without

an INFINITI TPMS Sensor, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. It is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

•For models with run-flat tires, although

you can continue driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, remember that ve-

hicle handling stability is reduced, which

could lead to an accident and personal

injury. Also, driving a long distance at

high speeds may damage the tires.

–Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive

more than approximately 93 miles

(150 km) with a punctured run-flat

tire. The actual distance the vehicle

NSD660

5-6 Starting and driving

can be driven on a flat tire depends on

outside temperature, vehicle load,

road conditions and other factors.

–If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. The tire may be se-

riously damaged and need to be re-

placed.

•Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

•If you used Emergency Tire Sealant to

repair a minor tire puncture, the TPMS

sensor should be checked when repair-

ing or replacing the tire (for models

equipped with the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit). It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

•INFINITI recommends using only

INFINITI Genuine Emergency Tire Seal-

ant provided with your vehicle. Other

tire sealants may damage the valve stem

seal which can cause the tire to lose air

pressure (for models equipped with the

emergency tire puncture repair kit).

CAUTION

•The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

snow chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

•Do not place metallized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.

This may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sensors,

and the TPMS will not function

properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire

pressure to the recommended cold tire pres-

sure suitable for the operating situation (see

"Wheels and tires" in the "8. Do-it-yourself"

section). Note that the correct tire pressure

for the current operating situation must first

be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor (see

"Restarting TPMS" later in this section).

If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the

warning threshold for the warning message

is aligned to the reference values taught-in.

Restart the tire pressure monitor after ad-

justing to the cold tire pressure. The current

pressures are saved as new reference values.

This will ensure that a warning message will

only appear if the tire pressure drops signifi-

cantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you

of an incorrectly set tire pressure.

TPMS is not able to warn you of a sudden

loss of pressure, e. g. if the tire is penetrated

by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden

loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by

braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering ma-

neuvers.

TPMS has a yellow warning light in the com-

bination meter for indicating a pressure loss

or malfunction. Depending on how the warn-

ing light flashes or lights up, a tire pressure

that is too low or a malfunction in TPMS is

indicated:

•If the warning light is lit continuously, the

tire pressure on one or more tires is signifi-

cantly too low. TPMS is not malfunction-

ing.

•If the warning light flashes for around a

minute and then remains lit constantly, the

TPMS is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning light, a message

appears in the vehicle information display.

Observe the information on display mes-

sages (see "Safety systems" in the "2. Instru-

ments and controls" section

It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-

tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indi-

cated. A malfunction will be indicated by the

Starting and driving 5-7

tire pressure warning light flashing for ap-

proximately one minute and then remaining

lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tire

pressure warning light goes out after you

have driven for a few minutes.

The tire pressure values indicated by the ve-

hicle information display may differ from

those measured at a filling station using a

pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by

the vehicle information display are those

measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the

tire pressure values indicated by a pressure

gauge are higher than those shown by the

vehicle information display. In this case, do

not reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor

can be affected by interference from radio

transmitting equipment (e.g. radio head

phones, two-way radios) that may be being

operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure

electronically

1. Make sure that the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Serv.] menu.

3. Press the or button to select

[Tire Pressure].

4. Press <OK> to confirm.

The current tire pressure for each wheel

will be displayed in the vehicle information

display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20

minutes, the [Tire pressures will be displayed

after driving a few minutes] message is

shown.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure

monitor automatically detects new wheels or

new sensors. If a clear allocation of tire pres-

sure to individual wheels is not possible, the

Tire pressure monitor active message is

shown instead of the tire pressure display.

The tire pressures are already being moni-

tored.

If a replacement wheel is fitted, for a few

minutes the system may continue to show

the tire pressure of the wheel that has been

removed. If this occurs, note that the value

displayed for the position where the replace-

ment wheel is fitted is not the same as the

current tire pressure of the replacement

wheel.

NSD660

5-8 Starting and driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

warning messages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure

loss in one or more tires, a warning message

is shown in the vehicle information display

and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning

light comes on.

•If the [Please Correct Tire Pressure] (yel-

low) message appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display, the tire pressure in at least

one tire is too low and must be corrected

at the next opportunity. If the system de-

tects that new sensors have been fitted

(IDs do not match those stored, and the

pressure is not feasible, or is less than 14%

under the norm then the [Please Correct

Tire Pressure] message will be displayed in

white.

•If the [Check Tires] (red) message appears

in the vehicle information display, the tire

pressure in one or more tires has dropped

significantly and the tires must be checked.

•If the [Warning Tire Malfunction] (red)

message appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display, the tire pressure in one or

more tires has dropped suddenly and the

tires must be checked.

•If the [Tire Press. Sensor(s) Missing] mes-

sage appears in the vehicle information

display, one or more sensors are missing or

cannot be detected. This could be the re-

sult of fitting a replacement wheel/tire.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in

the display messages in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

If the wheel positions on the vehicle are inter-

changed, the tire pressures may be displayed

for the wrong positions for a short time. After

a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and

the tire pressures are displayed for the cor-

rect positions.

Restarting TPMS

To keep the TPMS functioning properly, the

restart operation must be performed in the

following cases:

•When the tire pressure is adjusted

•When a tire or a wheel is replaced

•When the tires are rotated

When you restart the tire pressure monitor,

all existing warning messages are deleted

and the warning lights go out. The monitor

uses the currently set tire pressures as the

reference values for monitoring. In most

cases, the tire pressure monitor will auto-

matically detect the new reference values af-

ter you have changed the tire pressure. How-

ever, you can also define reference values

manually as described here. The tire pressure

monitor then monitors the new tire pressure

values.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the TPMS.

NOTE

Before restarting, make sure that the tire

pressures are set properly on all four tires for

the respective operating conditions. The

recommended tire pressures can be found in

the tire pressure placard on the driver' door

pillar.

1. Make sure that the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Serv.] menu.

3. Press the or button to select

[Tire Pressure].

4. Press <OK> to confirm.

The vehicle information display shows the

current tire pressure for each tire or the

[Tire pressures will be displayed after

driving a few minutes] message.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

5. Press <OK> to confirm.

Starting and driving 5-9

The [Tire Press. Monitor Restarted] mes-

sage appears in the vehicle information

display.

After you have driven for a few minutes,

the system checks whether the current

tire pressures are within the specified

range The new tire pressures are then

accepted as reference values and moni-

tored

If you wish to cancel the restart:

6. Press the button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last

restart will continue to be monitored

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

ON PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than pas-

senger cars to make them capable of per-

forming in a variety of on-pavement and off-

road applications. This gives them a higher

center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An

advantage of higher ground clearance is a

better view of the road, allowing you to an-

ticipate problems. However, they are not de-

signed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to

perform satisfactorily under off-road condi-

tions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at

high speeds. As with other vehicles of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly

may result in loss of control or vehicle roll-

over. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to "Driving

safety precautions" later in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner may result in loss of con-

trol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer-

ing maneuvers, because these driving prac-

tices could cause you to lose control of your

vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could re-

sult in a collision with other vehicles or ob-

jects or cause the vehicle to roll over, par-

ticularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never

drive when under the influence of alcohol or

drugs (including prescription or over the-

counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).

Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the

“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental

5-10 Starting and driving

restraint system” section of this manual, and

also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is sig-

nificantly more likely to be injured or killed

than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If

this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note

that this procedure is only a general guide.

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate

based on the conditions of the vehicle, road

and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle back onto the road surface

until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to

the road surface. When all tires are on the

road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in

the appropriate driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface based on

vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradu-

ally slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe

place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving on

under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially at

highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-

taining the correct air pressure and visually

inspect the tires for wear and damage. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air

pressure or “blows-out” while driving, main-

tain control of the vehicle by following the

procedure below. Please note that this pro-

cedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the

conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

•The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

•Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

•Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

•Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-

celerator pedal to gradually slow the ve-

hicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe loca-

tion off the road and away from traffic if

possible.

Starting and driving 5-11

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional informa-

tion, refer to "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of

emergency" section.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS

AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of

being involved in an accident injuring your-

self and others. Additionally, if you are in-

jured in an accident, alcohol can increase

the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

accidents. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-

ferently and most people underestimate the

effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-

counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your INFINITI is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving in

deep water or mud as your INFINITI is mainly

designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional

off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2–wheel drive vehicles are

less capable than all-wheel drive (AWD)

models for rough road driving and extrication

when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

•Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surfaces may cause the AWD warning

message to display and the AWD system

to automatically switch from the AWD

to 2WD mode. This could reduce the

traction. Be especially careful when

towing a trailer. (AWD models)

•Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle should

be seated with their seat belt fastened.

This will keep you and your passengers

in position when driving over rough ter-

rain.

•Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead

drive either straight up or straight down

the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip

over sideways much more easily than

they can forward or backward.

•Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If you

drive down them, you may not be able to

control your speed. If you drive across

them, you may roll over.

•Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

•Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an ac-

cident.

•If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could

tip or roll over. Always back straight

down in R (Reverse) gear and apply

brakes to control your speed.

5-12 Starting and driving

•Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed.

•Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

•Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as

far forward and as low as possible. Do

not equip the vehicle with tires larger

than specified in this manual. This could

cause your vehicle to roll over.

•Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move suddenly

and injure your hands. Instead drive with

your fingers and thumbs on the outside

of the rim.

•Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

•Always drive with the floor mats in place

as the floor may become hot.

•Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your INFINITI is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

•Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with AWD

engaged.

•For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to any

drive or reverse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

•Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions test-

ing), or similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test facil-

ity personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

•When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

•Accelerating quickly, sharp steering ma-

neuvers or sudden braking may cause

loss of control.

•If at all possible, avoid sharp turning ma-

neuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your INFINITI vehicle has a higher cen-

ter of gravity than a passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cornering at

the same speeds as passenger cars. Fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

•Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the front

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

•Be sure to check the brakes immediately

after driving in mud or water. .

•Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills.

If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls

forward, backward or sideways, you

could be injured.

Starting and driving 5-13

•Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel

hub, more frequent maintenance may be

required. For additional information, re-

fer to "Maintenance schedules" in the

"9. Maintenance and Schedules"

section.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

WARNING

•Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

•Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the front

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

•This vehicle is not designed for off-road

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy

or muddy roads that tires may get stuck

in.

•For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to any

D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position with

the engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in se-

rious vehicle damage or personal injury

•Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer, (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions test-

ing), or similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test facil-

ity personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

•When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will

not allow the engine to start without the use

of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered

key, it may be due to interference caused by

another registered key, an automated toll

road device or automated payment device on

the key ring. Restart the engine using the

following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately 5

seconds.

3. Repeat Step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de-

vice (which may have caused the interfer-

ence) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI

recommends placing the registered key on a

separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

5-14 Starting and driving

䊊

0OFF position

䊊

1ACC position

䊊

2ON position

䊊

3START position

WARNING

Never remove the key or turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position while driving.

The steering wheel will lock and could

cause the driver to lose control of the ve-

hicle. This could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

Use electrical accessories with the engine

running to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery. If you must use accessories while

the engine is not running, do not use them

for extended periods of time and do not use

multiple electrical accessories at the same

time.

The switch includes an anti-theft steering

lock device.

STEERING LOCK

To lock the steering wheel

1. Turn the key to the OFF position.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn

clockwise from the straight up position.

To unlock the steering wheel

1. Insert the key into the ignition switch.

2. Gently turn the key while rotating the

steering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS

OFF (Normal parking position) 䊊

The ignition key can only be removed when in

this position.

The steering lock can only be locked in this

position.

ACC (Accessories)/ 䊊

The engine is turned off without locking the

steering wheel. This position activates elec-

trical accessories, such as the radio, when the

engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) 䊊

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

START 䊊

The engine starter activates and the engine

will start. As soon as the engine has started,

release the key immediately. It will return to

the ON position.

NOTE

For vehicles fitted with Idle Stop/Start Sys-

tem:

When the engine is automatically stopped

by the Idle Stop/Start System the ignition

switch can still be operated as usual.

NPA1483

IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-15

At the end of a journey turn the ignition OFF

to avoid a discharged battery. The Idle

Stop/Start System does not automatically

turn ignition off.

Vehicles with Intelligent Key are equipped

with keys featuring an integrated Intelligent

Key function and in some cases a detachable

push-button ignition switch (Start/Stop but-

ton).

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the key

determines whether a valid key is in the ve-

hicle. This occurs, for example, when starting

the engine.

When you insert the push-button ignition

switch into the ignition lock, the system

needs approximately two seconds recogni-

tion time. You can then use the push-button

ignition switch.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pressed 3 consecutive

times in quick succession or the ignition

switch is pushed and held for more than 2

seconds.) If the engine stops while the ve-

hicle is being driven, this could lead to a

crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch:

•Select P (Park).

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times

in succession corresponds to the different

key positions in the ignition lock. Prerequisite

for this is that:

•You do not depress the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-

ately.

To start the vehicle without actively using the

key:

•The push-button ignition switch must be

inserted in the ignition lock.

•The key must be in the vehicle.

•The vehicle must not be locked with the

key or Intelligent Key (see "Keys" in the "3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments" sec-

tion).

Do not keep the Intelligent Key:

•With electronic devices, for example a mo-

bile phone or another key.

•With metallic objects, for example coins or

metal film.

•Inside metallic objects, for example a metal

case.

This can affect the functionality of the Intel-

ligent Key.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

(IF EQUIPPED)

5-16 Starting and driving

If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote

control or with the Intelligent Key, after a

short time:

•You will not be able to switch on the igni-

tion with the push-button ignition switch.

•You will not be able to start the engine

with the push-button ignition switch until

the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-

ton on the front door (see "Locking with in-

side door knob" in the "3. Pre-driving checks

and adjustments" section). you can continue

to start the engine with the push-button ig-

nition switch.

KEY POSITIONS WITH THE

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH

䊊

1Start/Stop button

䊊

2Ignition lock

When you switch on the ignition, all of the

indicator lights in the combination meter light

up. For further information on situations

where an indicator light either fails to go out

after starting the engine or lights up while

driving see "Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders" in the "2. Instruments

and controls" section.

If the push-button ignition switch 䊊

1has not

yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key

being removed from the ignition.

To switch on the power supply (accessory

mode): press the push-button ignition switch

䊊

1once without depressing the brake pedal.

The power supply is switched on. You can

now activate the windshield wipers, for ex-

ample.

The power supply is switched off again if the

driver's door is opened and you press the

push-button ignition switch 䊊

1twice when in

this position.

To switch on the ignition: press the push-

button ignition switch 䊊

1twice without de-

pressing the brake pedal. The ignition is

switched on.

The ignition is switched off if the driver's door

is opened and you press the push-button

ignition switch 䊊

1when in this position.

REMOVING THE START/STOP

BUTTON

You can remove the start/stop button from

the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-

mal using the key.

You can only switch between push-button

ignition switch mode and key operation when

the vehicle is stationary.

You must also engage park position P (Park).

Remove the start/stop button 䊊

1from igni-

tion lock 䊊

NPA1484

Starting and driving 5-17

You do not have to remove the start/stop

button from the ignition lock when you leave

the vehicle. You should, however, always

take the key with you when leaving the ve-

hicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle:

•The vehicle can be started using the push-

button ignition switch.

•The electrically powered equipment can be

operated.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situ-

ation while driving, perform the following

procedure:

•Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5

seconds, or

•Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

•Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

•Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer

fluid as frequently as possible, or at least

whenever you refuel.

•Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

•Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Measure and check the tire

pressure for proper inflation.

•Check that all doors are closed.

•Position seat and adjust head restraints/

headrests.

•Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

•Fasten your seat belt and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

•Check the operation of the warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position.

STARTING PROCEDURE WITH

THE KEY

䊊

0OFF position

䊊

1ACC position

䊊

2ON position

䊊

3START position

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to position P (Park)

by pressing the <P> button.

The transmission position indicator in the

vehicle information display shows <P>

When the transmission is in position N

(Neutral), you can also start the engine

with the brake pedal depressed.

The starter is designed not to operate if the

shift lever is in any of the driving positions.

NPA1483

BEFORE STARTING ENGINE STARTING ENGINE

5-18 Starting and driving

3. Turn the key to the START position 䊊

3in

the ignition lock and release it as soon as

the engine is running.

If the engine is very hard to start because it is

flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the

way to the floor and hold it. Turn the ignition

switch to the START position to start crank-

ing the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by turning the ignition switch to

OFF. After cranking the engine, release the

accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing

the brake pedal and turning the ignition

switch to start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not

start, turn the ignition key to the OFF po-

sition and wait 10 seconds before cranking

again, otherwise the starter could be

damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at mod-

erate speed for a short distance first, es-

pecially in cold weather. In cold weather,

keep the engine running for a minimum of

2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Start-

ing and stopping the engine over a short

period of time may make the vehicle more

difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, Shift the transmission

to position P (Park) by pressing the <P>

button. and turn the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

NOTE

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

•Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone

chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

•Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to main-

tain battery health.

STARTING PROCEDURE USING

THE PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)

The push-button ignition switch can be used

to start the vehicle manually without insert-

ing the key into the ignition lock. The key must

be in the vehicle and the start/stop button

must be inserted in the ignition lock (see "Re-

moving the start/stop button" earlier in this

section). This mode for starting the engine

operates independently of the ECO start/

stop automatic engine start function.

You can start the engine if a valid key is in the

vehicle. Switch off the engine and always

take the key with you when leaving the ve-

hicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.

•Depress the brake pedal and keep it de-

pressed.

•Press the push button ignition switch once

(see " Push-button ignition switch (if

equipped)" earlier in this section). The en-

gine starts.

Starting and driving 5-19

DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

Driving precautions

•Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral)

to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M (Manual

shift mode). Always depress the brake

pedal until shifting is completed. Failure

to do so could cause you to lose control

and have an accident.

•Cold engine idle speed is high, so use cau-

tion when shifting into a forward or re-

verse gear before the engine has warmed

up.

•Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)

position while the vehicle is reversing.

This could cause an accident or damage

the transmission.

•Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

WARNING

•Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. this may cause a loss of control.

CAUTION

•To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle; when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this pur-

pose.

•Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal before shifting the shift lever

to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual shift

mode.

2. Keep the brake pedal depressed and push

the shift lever to shift into a driving gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake, then

gradually put the vehicle in motion by

pressing the accelerator pedal.

The automatic transmission is designed so

that the brake pedal MUST be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is ON.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-20 Starting and driving

Shifting

P Park position with parking lock

R Reverse

N Neutral

D Drive

Transmission position display:

NOTE

If the transmission position display in the ve-

hicle information display is not working, you

should pull away carefully to check whether

the desired transmission position IS en-

gaged. Ideally, you should select transmis-

sion position D and automatic drive program

EorS.

The shift lever indicator 䊊

1located in the

lower part of the vehicle information display

shows the current position of the transmis-

sion.

It shows the P,R,N,D modes when the trans-

mission is in auto mode or the shift position

when the transmission is in manual mode.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not run-

ning. Failure to do so could cause the ve-

hicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

NSD585 NSD649

Starting and driving 5-21

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the P

(Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use this position when the vehicle is parked

or when starting the engine. Always make

sure that the vehicle is completely stopped

before pressing button 䊊

1to engage the P

(Park) position. For maximum safety, the

brake pedal must be depressed before en-

gaging the P (Park) position. Use this position

together with the parking brake. When park-

ing on a hill, first depress the brake pedal,

apply the parking brake and then engage the

P (Park) position. The parking lock should not

be used as a brake when parking. In order to

secure the vehicle, always apply the electric

parking brake in addition to the parking lock.

In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's

electronics, the transmission may lock in po-

sition P (Park). Have the vehicle electronics

checked immediately. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Park position P is automatically engaged if:

•You switch off the engine using the key

and remove the key.

•You open the driver's door when the ve-

hicle is stationary or driving at very low

speed and the transmission is in position D

(Drive) or R (Reverse).

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the R

(Reverse) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use this position to back up the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped

before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the shift

lever button pushed in to move the shift le-

ver from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive

position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while driving the vehicle.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driv-

ing.

The automatic transmission changes gear

automatically. All forward gears are avail-

able.

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the in-

dividual gears automatically when it is in

transmission position D (Drive). Shifting is de-

termined by:

•The selected drive program.

•The position of the accelerator pedal.

•The road speed.

Accelerator pedal position:

Your style of driving influences how the au-

tomatic transmission shifts gear:

•little throttle: early upshifts

•more throttle: late upshifts

NSD586

5-22 Starting and driving

Holding the vehicle stationary on

uphill gradients

WARNING

If the transmission overheats, the elec-

tronic management system is automati-

cally deactivated. This interrupts the

power transmission from the engine to the

wheels. The vehicle may, for example, roll

backwards on gradients. There is a risk of

an accident. Never hold the vehicle station-

ary on uphill gradients by depressing the

accelerator.

The transmission may overheat if you hold

the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by

depressing the accelerator pedal. If the trans-

mission overheats, a warning tone sounds

and the [Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine

Running] display message appears in the ve-

hicle information display. You will only be able

to continue your journey once the transmis-

sion has cooled down and the display mes-

sage in the vehicle information display has

disappeared.

Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill

gradients by depressing the accelerator. In-

stead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on

uphill gradients by:

•Depressing the brake pedal.

•Engaging the electric parking brake.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:

•Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

The transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on the engine speed.

•Ease off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Drive mode switch

The drive mode switch allows you to choose

between drive programs with different driv-

ing characteristics.

Press drive mode switch 䊊

1. The selected

drive program appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The automatic transmission switches to drive

program E each time the engine is started.

E (Economy): comfortable, economical driv-

ing

S (Sport): sporty driving style

M (Manual): manual gear shifting

For more details of the manual drive program

see "Manual drive program" later in this sec-

tion.

NSD587

Starting and driving 5-23

Steering wheel gearshift paddles

䊊

1Left steering wheel gearshift paddle

(shifts down)

䊊

2Right steering wheel gearshift paddle

(shifts up)

In drive program M, you can change gear

yourself using the steering wheel gearshift

paddles.

If you pull the left or right steering wheel

gearshift paddle when in automatic drive

program E or S, the automatic transmission

shifts into drive program M for a limited time.

Depending on which gearshift paddle is

pulled, the automatic transmission immedi-

ately shifts into the next gear down or up.

Automatic drive programs

Drive program E is characterized by the fol-

lowing:

•Comfort-oriented engine settings.

•Optimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting up

sooner.

•The vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears unless the ac-

celerator pedal is depressed fully.

•Increased sensitivity. This improves han-

dling on slippery road surfaces, for ex-

ample.

•The automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle being

driven at lower engine speeds and the

wheels being less likely to spin.

Drive program S is characterized by the fol-

lowing:

•Sporty engine settings.

•The automatic transmission shifting up

later.

•As a result of the later automatic transmis-

sion shift points, the fuel consumption

possibly being higher.

Manual drive program

In manual drive program M, you can change

gear yourself by using the steering wheel

gearshift paddles. For this, the transmission

must be in position D (Drive). The gear cur-

rently selected and engaged is shown in the

vehicle information display

Manual drive program M differs from drive

programs E and S with regard to spontaneity,

responsiveness and smoothness of gear

changes.

Using manual gears:

3 To use the engine's braking effect

2 To use the braking effect of the engine on

downhill gradients and for driving on steep

mountain roads, in mountainous terrain or

in arduous conditions.

1 To use the braking effect of the engine on

extremely steep downhill gradients and on

long downhill stretches.

NSD584

5-24 Starting and driving

Activating the manual drive program:

•Permanently: Press the drive mode switch

䊊

1repeatedly until M appears in the ve-

hicle information display. Manual drive

program M remains active until drive pro-

gram E or S is engaged.

•Temporarily: Pull the right or left steering

wheel gearshift paddle (see "Steering

wheel gearshift paddles" later in this sec-

tion). Manual drive program M is tempo-

rarily active. Depending on which gearshift

paddle is pulled, the automatic transmis-

sion immediately shifts into the next gear

down or up.

When manual drive program M is activated

via the steering wheel gearshift paddles, the

temporarily active manual drive program M

will be deactivated automatically after a lim-

ited time, if the driving situation permits. The

automatic transmission switches to the pre-

viously activated drive program E or S. When

driving on downhill gradients, the temporarily

active manual drive program M will only be

deactivated if the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed while the vehicle is rolling downhill.

Upshifting:

Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift

paddle (see "Steering wheel gearshift

paddles" earlier in this section). The auto-

matic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

In order to prevent engine damage the auto-

matic transmission automatically shifts up if

the maximum engine speed on the currently

engaged gear is reached and you depress the

accelerator pedal.

Gearshift recommendation:

The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The

recommended gear is shown in the vehicle

information display.

Shift to recommended gear 䊊

1according to

gearshift recommendation 䊊

2when shown in

the vehicle information display.

Downshifiting:

Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift

paddle (see "Steering wheel gearshift

paddles" earlier in this section). The auto-

matic transmission shifts down to the next

gear.

If you slow down or stop without shifting

down, the automatic transmission automati-

cally shifts down.

NSD587 NSD589

Starting and driving 5-25

For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand

steering wheel gearshift paddle until the

transmission selects the optimum gear for

the current speed.

If the engine exceeds the maximum engine

speed when shifting down, the automatic

transmission protects against engine dam-

age by not shifting down.

Kickdown:

You can also use kickdown for maximum ac-

celeration in manual drive program M

•Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point The transmission shifts to a

lower gear depending on the engine

speed.

•Shift back up once the desired speed is

reached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears us-

ing the steering wheel gearshift paddles.

If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-

mission shifts up to the next gear when the

maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-

vents the engine from overrevving.

Deactivating the temporary manual drive

program:

Pull and hold the right steering wheel gear-

shift paddle until the automatic transmission

shifts into the last active automatic drive pro-

gram E or S.

When manual drive program M is deacti-

vated, the automatic transmission in auto-

matic drive program E or S may shift from the

current gear into a higher or lower gear. This

is dependent on the position of the accelera-

tor pedal, speed and load.

Problems with the transmission:

Problem Possible causes/consequences and solutions

The transmission has

problems shifting

gear

The transmission is losing oil.

Have the transmission checked immediately. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The acceleration abil-

ity is deteriorating

The transmission no

longer shifts into all

of the gears Reverse

gear can no longer be

engaged

The transmission is in emergency mode.

•Stop.

•Shift the transmission to position P (Park).

•Switch off the engine.

•Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.

•Shift the transmission to position D (Drive).

•Have the transmission checked immediately. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

5-26 Starting and driving

WARNING

•Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

•Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

•Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or death

to people and pets.

The function of the electric parking brake is

dependent on the on-board voltage. If the

on-board voltage is low or if there is a mal-

function in the system, it may not be possible

to apply the released parking brake. If this is

the case:

•Only park the vehicle on level ground and

secure it to prevent it from rolling away.

•Shift the automatic transmission to posi-

tion P (Park).

•It is recommended you contact an

INFINITI retailer.

It may not be possible to release an applied

parking brake if the on-board voltage is low

or if there is a malfunction in the system. It is

recommended you contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

The electric parking brake carries out a func-

tion check at regular intervals when the en-

gine is switched off. Noises that occur are

normal.

APPLYING/RELEASING

MANUALLY

The electric parking brake can be applied or

released by operating the parking brake

handle 䊊

To apply: Push handle 䊊

When the electric parking brake is applied,

the red indicator light lights up in the

combination meter.

The electric parking brake can also be applied

when the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion or the key is removed.

To release: With the ignition switch in the ON

position, pull handle 䊊

NPA1485

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-27

Before driving, check that the brake warning

light goes out. For additional informa-

tion, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders" in the "2. Instruments and

controls" section.

The electric parking brake can only be re-

leased when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

APPLYING AUTOMATICALLY

(VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION)

The electric parking brake is automatically

applied when:

•Intelligent cruise control (if equipped)

brings the vehicle to a standstill.

•Intelligent Parking Assist (if equipped) is

keeping the vehicle stationary.

The red indicator light lights up in the

combination meter.

The electric parking brake is not automati-

cally applied if the engine is switched off by

the Idle Stop/Start function.

RELEASING AUTOMATICALLY

The electric parking brake can only be re-

leased automatically in vehicles with auto-

matic transmission.

The electric parking brake of your vehicle is

released automatically when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are fulfilled:

•The engine is running.

•The transmission is in position D (Drive) or

R (Reverse).

•The seat belt is fastened.

•You depress the accelerator pedal.

If the transmission is in position R, the lift

gate must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically

release the electric parking brake:

•The driver's door is closed

•You have shifted out of transmission posi-

tion P (Park) or you have previously driven

faster than 2 MPH (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the accelera-

tor pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the

parking brake will be released and the vehicle

will start to move.

EMERGENCY BRAKING

The vehicle can also be braked during an

emergency by using the electric parking

brake.

While driving, push handle 䊊

1of the electric

parking brake. The vehicle is braked as long as

you keep handle 䊊

1of the electric parking

brake pressed. The longer the electric parking

brake handle 䊊

1is depressed, the greater the

braking force.

During braking:

•A warning tone sounds.

•The [Please Release Parking Brake] mes-

sage appears.

•The red indicator light in the combi-

nation meter flashes.

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-

still, the electric parking brake is applied.

5-28 Starting and driving

The Idle Stop/Start function switches the

engine off automatically if the vehicle is

stopped under certain conditions.

When pulling away again, the engine starts

automatically. The Idle Stop/Start function

thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-

sumption and emissions of your vehicle.

WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically

and you exit the vehicle, the engine is re-

started automatically. The vehicle may be-

gin moving There is a risk of accident and

injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn

off the ignition and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

If the Idle Stop/Start symbol is shown

in green in the vehicle information display, the

Idle Stop/Start function switches the engine

off automatically once the vehicle stops mov-

ing.

The Idle Stop/Start function is automatically

activated each time you start the engine with

the ignition key.

If the Idle Stop/Start function has been

manually deactivated (see "Deactivating/

activating the Idle Stop/Start function" later

in this section) or a malfunction has caused

the system to be deactivated, the Idle

Stop/Start symbol is not displayed.

AUTOMATIC ENGINE

SWITCH-OFF

The Idle Stop/Start function is operational

and the Idle Stop/Start symbol is dis-

played in green in the vehicle information dis-

play, if:

•The indicator light in the ECO button is lit

green.

•The outside temperature is within the

range that is suitable for the system.

•The engine is at normal operating tem-

perature.

•The set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.

•The battery is sufficiently charged.

•The system detects that the windshield is

not misted up when the air-conditioning

system is switched on.

•The hood is closed.

•The driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.

If the conditions for automatic engine

switch-off are not all fulfilled, the Idle

Stop/Start symbol is shown in yellow.

NSD620

Idle Stop/Start symbol

IDLE STOP/START SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-29

All of the vehicle's systems remain active

when the engine is switched off automati-

cally.

The engine can be switched off automatically

a maximum of four times (initial stop, then

three subsequent stops) in succession. The

Idle Stop/Start symbol is shown in yel-

low in the vehicle information display after

the engine has been started automatically for

the fourth time. When the Idle Stop/

Start symbol is shown in green in the vehicle

information display, automatic engine

switch-off is again possible.

NOTE

If the hood is opened while the engine is run-

ning and the Idle Stop/Start function is op-

erational, the engine will switch off auto-

matically.

If the vehicle is brought to a standstill in D or

N, the Idle Stop/Start function switches off

the engine automatically.

AUTOMATIC ENGINE START

The engine is started automatically if:

•You switch off the Idle Stop/Start func-

tion by pressing the ECO button.

•You engage Reverse R or Drive D.

•You unfasten your seat belt or open the

driver's door.

•The vehicle starts to roll.

•The brake system requires this.

•The temperature in the vehicle interior de-

viates from the set range.

•The system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system is

switched on.

•The battery's charge status is too low.

The engine is started automatically if you:

•Release the brake pedal in transmission

position D (Drive) or N (Neutral).

•Depress the accelerator pedal.

•Move the transmission out of position P

(Park).

Shifting the transmission to position P (Park)

does not start the engine.

If you shift the transmission from R (Reverse)

to D (Drive), the Idle Stop/Start function is

available again once the Idle Stop/

Start symbol reappears in green in the vehicle

information display.

DEACTIVATING/ACTIVATING

THE IDLE STOP/START

FUNCTION

•To deactivate: press ECO button 䊊

1. Indi-

cator light 䊊

2and the Idle Stop/

Start symbol in the vehicle information dis-

play turn off.

•To activate: press ECO button 䊊

1. Indica-

tor light 䊊

2lights up. If all conditions for

automatic engine switch-off (see "Auto-

matic engine switch-off" earlier in this sec-

tion) are fulfilled, the Idle Stop/Start

symbol is shown in green in the vehicle

information display.

NIC2633

5-30 Starting and driving

If not all conditions for automatic engine

switch-off are met, the Idle Stop/

Start symbol is lit yellow in the vehicle

information display. If this is the case, the

Idle Stop/Start function is not active.

If indicator light 䊊

2on ECO button 䊊

1is off,

the Idle Stop/Start function has been deacti-

vated manually or as the result of a malfunc-

tion. The engine will then not be switched off

automatically when the vehicle stops.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the LDW system

could result in serious personal injury or

death. The LDW system will not steer the

vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

The LDW system warns the driver with a

warning light and intermittent steering vibra-

tion that the vehicle is beginning to leave the

traveling lane.

The LDW system uses a camera 䊊

1installed

behind the windshield to monitor the lane

markers of your traveling lane.

NSD644

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-31

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

䊊

1Steering wheel mounted controls

䊊

2Vehicle information display

䊊

ADisplay area

䊊

BMenu bar

The LDW system operates at speeds of ap-

proximately 40 MPH (60 km/h) and above,

when the lane markings are clear.

If the system detects that the vehicle's front

wheel has passed over the lane marking, a

warning will be provided. It will warn you by

means of intermittent vibration through the

steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds and a

visual alert.

NOTE

The LDW system is designed not to warn

when you operate the lane change signal and

change traveling lanes in the direction of the

signal.

No warning vibration occurs if you activate

the turn signals. In this event, the warnings

are suppressed for a certain period of time.

NSD626

5-32 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

LDW SYSTEM

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel 䊊

1to select the [DriveAs-

sist] menu on the Menu bar 䊊

2. Press the or button to select

[Lane Departure Warning].

3. Press the <OK> button on the steering

wheel 䊊

1. The current selection is dis-

played.

4. Press the <OK> to confirm.

5. Press the or button to set

[Off], [Standard] or [Adaptive].

6. Press the <OK> button to save the setting.

When the LDW is activated, the vehicle

information display shows the lane mark-

ings as bright lines in the assistance

graphic in the display area 䊊

When [Standard] is selected, no warning vi-

bration occurs if:

•You have switched on the turn signals. In

this event, the warnings are suppressed

for a certain period of time.

•A driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, brake assist system (BAS) or VDC.

When [Adaptive] is selected, no warning vi-

bration occurs if:

•You have switched on the turn signals. In

this case the warnings are suppressed for

a certain period of time.

•A driving system intervenes, such as ABS,

BAS or VDC.

•You accelerate forcefully.

•You brake forcefully.

•You steer actively, for example, swerve to

avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly.

•You cut the corner on a sharp bend.

The system may detect certain conditions

and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

•You approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.

•The road has very wide lanes, for example,

a freeway.

•The system detects solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

•The road has narrow lanes.

•You cut across a corner on a bend.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the LDW system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

•This system is only a warning device to

inform the driver of a potential unin-

tended lane departure. It will not steer

the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It

is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the

traveling lane, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

NSD599

Assistance graphic

Starting and driving 5-33

•The system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 40 MPH (60

km/h) or if it cannot detect lane mark-

ers.

•The LDW system is primarily intended

for use on well-developed freeways or

highways. It may not detect the lane

markers in certain roads, weather or

driving conditions.

•Do not use the LDW system under the

following conditions as it may not func-

tion properly:

–During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.).

–When driving on slippery roads, such

as on ice or snow, etc.

–When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

–When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

–When driving in a makeshift or tem-

porary lane.

–When driving on roads where the lane

width is too narrow.

–When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, non-standard

wheels).

–When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

•The camera may not detect lane markers

in the following situations and the LDW

system may not operate properly.

–On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane markers

that are faded or not painted clearly;

yellow painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; or lane mark-

ers covered with water, dirt, snow,

etc.

–On roads where the discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

–On roads where there are sharp

curves.

–On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams

or lines remaining after road repairs.

(The LDW system could detect these

items as lane markers.)

–On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

–When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

marker.

–When traveling close to the vehicle in

front of you, which obstructs the lane

camera unit detection range.

–When rain, snow or dirt adheres to

the windshield in front of the lane

camera unit.

–When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming

is not adjusted properly.

–When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the light

directly shines on the front of the ve-

hicle at sunrise or sunset.)

–When a sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example, when the ve-

hicle enters or exits a tunnel or under

a bridge.)

–When there is poor visibility. (For ex-

ample, due to insufficient illumina-

tion of the road, or due to snow, rain,

fog or spray.

–When there is glare. (For example,

from oncoming traffic, the sun or re-

flection when the road is wet).

5-34 Starting and driving

䊊

1Steering wheel mounted controls

䊊

2Vehicle information display

䊊

ADisplay area

䊊

BMenu bar

LDW SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Under the following conditions, the LDW

system will be canceled automatically, and

the message [Lane Departure Warning Cur-

rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual] is

displayed in the vehicle information display

䊊

2. The LDW system is temporarily unavail-

able.

•The windshield is dirty in the camera's field

of vision.

•Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain,

snow or fog.

•There have been no lane markings for an

extended period.

•The lane markings are worn, dark, or cov-

ered by dirt or snow, etc.

Action to take: When the above conditions

no longer exist, the message goes out and the

LDW system is operational again. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, stop the vehicle in

a safe location, press the P (Park) button , and

clean the windshield.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel

automatically, and the message [Lane De-

parture Warning Inoperative] will appear.

Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe

location, engage P (Park), turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message contin-

ues to appear, have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

NSD626

Starting and driving 5-35

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit 䊊

1for the LDW system

is located above the inside mirror.

To ensure the proper operation of the LDW

system and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

•Always keep the windshield clean.

•Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near

the camera unit.

•Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability

of detecting the lane markers.

•Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove parts from the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended you contact

an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the BSW system

could result in serious injury or death.

•The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system

is not a replacement for proper driving

procedure and is not designed to pre-

vent contact with vehicles or objects.

When changing lanes, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and look in

the direction you will move to ensure it is

safe to change lanes. Never rely solely

on the BSW system.

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system can

help alert the driver of other vehicles in adja-

cent lanes when changing lanes.

NSD644

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

5-36 Starting and driving

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

Ain-

stalled near the rear bumper to detect other

vehicles beside your vehicle in an adjacent

lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on ei-

ther side of your vehicle within the detection

zone shown as illustrated. This detection

zone starts from the outside mirror of your

vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)

behind the rear bumper, and approximately

10 ft (3 m) sideways.

NAA1727 SSD1030Z

Detection zone

Starting and driving 5-37

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

䊊

1Side indicator light

䊊

2Steering wheel mounted controls

䊊

3Vehicle information display

䊊

AMENU bar

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 MPH (30 km/h). When the BSW is

activated, the side indicator light illuminates

in yellow up to a speed of 20 MPH (30

km/h). At speeds above 20 MPH (30 km/h),

the indicator light goes out and the BSW

system is operational.

Illustration 1: If the radar sensors detect a

vehicle in the detection zone, the BSW indi-

cator light 䊊

1located by the outside mirrors

illuminates.

NSD623

SSD1026Z

Illustration 1

5-38 Starting and driving

Illustration 2: If the turn signal is then acti-

vated, the system chimes (twice) and the

BSW indicator light flashes. The BSW indica-

tor light continues to flash until the detected

vehicles leave the detection zone.

NOTE

•The BSW indicator lights illuminate for a

few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

•The brightness of the BSW indicator lights

is adjusted automatically depending on the

brightness of the ambient light.

•If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the BSW indicator light flashes

and no chime sounds. (See "Another ve-

hicle approaching from behind" later in this

section.)

A chime sounds if the radar sensors have

already detected vehicles when the driver ac-

tivates the turn signal.

WARNING

•Do not use the BSW system when tow-

ing a trailer because the system may not

function properly.

•Excessive noise (for example audio sys-

tem volume, open vehicle window) will

interfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

•The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

–Pedestrians, bicycles, animals

–Several types of vehicles such as mo-

torcycles

–Oncoming vehicles

–Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop.

–A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

–A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

–A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

•Severe weather or road spray conditions

may reduce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles.

•The radar sensors detection zone is de-

signed based on a standard lane width.

When driving in a wider lane, the radar

sensors may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow

lane, the radar sensors may detect ve-

hicles driving two lanes away.

•The radar sensors are designed to ignore

most stationary objects, however ob-

jects such as guardrails, walls, foliage

and parked vehicles may occasionally be

detected. This is a normal operating

condition.

SSD1031Z

Illustration 2

Starting and driving 5-39

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

䊊

1Steering wheel mounted controls (left

side)

䊊

2Vehicle information display

䊊

ADisplay area

䊊

BMENU bar

To enable/disable the BSW system, use the

following procedure:

1. Press the <or> button on the

steering wheel 䊊

1to select the [DriveAs-

sist ] menu on the Menu bar 䊊

2. Press the or button 䊊

1to

select Blind Spot Warning.

3. Press the <OK> button on the steering

wheel 䊊

1. The current selection is dis-

played.

4. To activate/deactivate BSW: press the

<OK> button 䊊

1again

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the BSW system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

•The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

•The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

–Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.

NSD626

5-40 Starting and driving

–Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clear-

ance vehicles.

–Oncoming vehicles.

–Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop.

–A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

–A vehicle that is too close to your

vehicle.

–A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

–A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

•The radar sensors detection zone is de-

signed based on a standard lane width.

When driving in a wider lane, the radar

sensors may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow

lane, the radar sensors may detect ve-

hicles driving two lanes away.

•The radar sensors are designed to ignore

most stationary objects, however ob-

jects such as guardrails, walls, foliage

and parked vehicles may occasionally be

detected. This is a normal operating

condition.

•The following conditions may reduce the

ability of the radar to detect other ve-

hicles:

–Severe weather

–Road spray

–Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle

•Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

•Do not use the BSW system when tow-

ing a trailer because the system may not

function properly.

•Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will interfere

with the chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

•The BSW system may not provide a

warning for vehicles that pass through

the detection zone quickly.

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The BSW indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from behind in an adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is travel-

ling much faster than your vehicle, the indica-

tor light may not illuminate before the de-

tected vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always

use the side and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction your vehicle will move to

ensure it is safe to change lanes.

SSD1026Z

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Starting and driving 5-41

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal, then the system chimes (twice) and the

BSW indicator light flashes.

NOTE

•The radar sensors may not detect vehicles

which are approaching rapidly from be-

hind.

•If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the BSW indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when the other vehicle is

detected.

Accelerate from a stop

NOTE

Illustration 3: If you accelerate from a stop

with a vehicle in the detection zone, the

other vehicle may not be detected.

Overtaking another vehicle

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning

only occurs if the difference in speed is less

than 7 MPH (12 km/h).

Illustration 4: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that ve-

hicle stays in the detection zone for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

SSD1031Z

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

SSD1032Z

Illustration3–Acceleratefromastop

SSD1033Z

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

5-42 Starting and driving

Illustration 5: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

BSW indicator light flashes.

NOTE

•When overtaking several vehicles in a row,

the vehicles after the first vehicle may not

be detected if they are travelling close to-

gether.

•The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

•If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the side indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when the other vehicle is

detected.

Overtaking several vehicles

Illustration 6: When overtaking several ve-

hicles in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they are trav-

elling close together.

SSD1034Z

Illustration 5 – Overtaking another vehicle

SSD1036Z

Illustration 6 – Overtaking several vehicles

Starting and driving 5-43

Entering from the side

Illustration 7: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from either side.

Illustration 8: If the driver activates the turn

signal, then the BSW indicator light flashes

and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE

•The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is travelling at about the same

speed as your vehicle when it enters the

detection zone.

•If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the BSW indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when another vehicle is

detected.

SSD1037Z

Illustration 7 – Entering from the side

SSD1038Z

Illustration 8 – Entering from the side

5-44 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

䊊

1Vehicle information display

If radar blockage is detected, the system will

be turned off automatically, and the [Blind

Spot Warning Currently Unavailable See Op-

erator's Manual] message appears in the ve-

hicle information display 䊊

1. The system is

not available until the conditions no longer

exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tempo-

rary ambient conditions such as splashing

water, mist or fog. The blocked condition

may also be caused by objects such as ice,

frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Action to take: When the above conditions

no longer exist, the system will resume auto-

matically. If the message still appears, have

the system checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

System malfunction

If the system malfunctions, it will be turned

off automatically, and the [Blind Spot Warn-

ing Inoperative] message appears in the ve-

hicle information display 䊊

Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe

location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) po-

sition, turn the engine off and restart the

engine.

If the message still appears, have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

NSD631

Starting and driving 5-45

RADAR MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensor units 䊊

Afor the BSW

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tempo-

rary ambient conditions such as splashing

water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent

material), install accessories or apply addi-

tional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended you consult

an INFINITI retailer if the area around the

radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FCC NOTICE

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Cruise control maintains a constant road

speed for you. It brakes automatically in order

to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must

select a lower gear in good time on long and

steep downhill gradients, especially if the ve-

hicle is laden or towing a trailer.

WARNING

For vehicles with automatic transmission,

you need to have selected manual drive

program M (see "Manual drive program"

earlier in this section). By doing so, you will

make use of the braking effect of the en-

gine. This relieves the load on the brake

system and prevents the brakes from over-

heating and wearing too quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic

conditions are appropriate for maintaining a

steady speed for a prolonged period. You can

set the cruise control at any road speed

above 20 MPH (30 km/h).

The speed indicated in the speedometer may

differ slightly from the set speed.

NAA1640

CRUISE CONTROL

5-46 Starting and driving

WARNING

•If you fail to adapt your driving style,

cruise control can neither reduce the risk

of an accident nor override the laws of

physics. Cruise control cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic condi-

tions. Cruise control is only an aid. You

are responsible for the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for

braking in good time, and for staying in

lane.

•Always observe the posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

•Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions. Do-

ing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and result in an accident.

–When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a constant speed

–When driving in heavy traffic

–When driving in traffic that varies

speed

–When driving in windy areas

–When driving on winding or hilly

roads

–When driving on slippery (rain, snow,

ice, etc.) roads

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

䊊

1Store the current speed or a higher speed

䊊

2Store the current speed, or if a speed has

previously been stored, call up the last

stored speed.

䊊

3Store the current speed or a lower speed

䊊

4Deactivate the cruise control system

When you activate cruise control, the stored

speed is shown in the vehicle information

display for five seconds.

Activation conditions

To activate cruise control, all of the following

activation conditions must be fulfilled:

•The electric parking brake must be re-

leased.

•You are driving faster than 20 MPH (30

km/h).

•VDC must be switched on, but not inter-

vening.

Storing, maintaining and calling up

a speed

Storing and maintaining the current speed:

You can store the current speed if you are

driving faster than 20 MPH (30 km/h):

1. Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Briefly press the cruise controller lever up

䊊

1or down 䊊

3. Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-

matically maintains the speed.

NSD618A

Starting and driving 5-47

NOTE

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the

stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored

speed is resumed when the gradient evens

out. Cruise control maintains the stored

speed on downhill gradients by automati-

cally braking the vehicle.

Storing the current speed or calling up the

last stored speed:

WARNING

If you call up a stored speed and this is

different from the current speed, the ve-

hicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not

know what the stored speed is, the vehicle

may accelerate or brake unexpectedly.

There is a risk of an accident.

Take the traffic conditions into account

before calling up the stored speed. If you do

not know what the stored speed is, store

the desired speed again.

1. Briefly pull the cruise control lever to-

wards you 䊊

2. Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal. The first time cruise control is acti-

vated, it stores the current speed or if a

speed has previously been stored, it regu-

lates the speed of the vehicle to the pre-

viously stored speed.

Setting a speed

Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

the set speed.

1. Press the cruise control lever up 䊊

1for a

higher speed or down 䊊

3for a lower

speed.

2. Keep the cruise control lever pressed until

the desired speed is reached.

3. Release the cruise control lever, The new

speed is stored.

4. To adjust the set speed in 1 MPH (1 km/h)

increments: briefly press the cruise control

lever up 䊊

1or down 䊊

3to the pressure

point. The last stored speed increases or

decreases in 1 MPH (1 km/h) increments.

5. To adjust the set speed in 10 MPH (10

km/h) increments: briefly press the cruise

control lever up 䊊

1or down 䊊

3beyond the

pressure point. The last stored speed in-

creases or decreases in 10 MPH

(10 km/h) increments.

NOTE

Cruise control is not deactivated if you de-

press the accelerator pedal. For example, if

you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise

control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last

speed stored after you have finished over-

taking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise

control:

•Briefly press the cruise control lever for-

ward 䊊

•Brake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

•The vehicle is secured with the electric

parking brake.

•You are driving at less than 20 MPH (30

km/h).

•VDC intervenes or you deactivate VDC.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a

warning tone. You will see the [Cruise Control

Off] message in the vehicle information dis-

play for approximately five seconds.

NOTE

The last speed stored is cleared when you

switch off the engine.

5-48 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the ICC system

could result in serious injury or death.

•ICC is not a collision avoidance or warn-

ing device. For highway and freeway

way use only and not intended for con-

gested areas or city driving. Failure to

apply the brakes could result in an acci-

dent. It is the driver’s responsibility to

stay alert, drive safely, and be in control

of the vehicle at all times.

•Always observe posted speed limits and

do not set the speed over them.

•Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC. Read and under-

stand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly

before using the ICC system. To avoid

serious injury or death, do not rely on the

system to prevent accidents or to con-

trol the vehicle’s speed in emergency

situations. Do not use the ICC system

except in appropriate road and traffic

conditions.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) SYSTEM (FULL SPEED RANGE)

(IF EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-49

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION

䊊

1Speedometer

䊊

2Distance warning light

䊊

3Vehicle information display

䊊

4Cruise control lever

The ICC system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and direc-

tion.

If the distance sensor 䊊

Adetects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce

NSD645

NSD625

5-50 Starting and driving

the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The ICC system maintains a selected distance

from the vehicle in front of you within the

speed range of 0 to 125 MPH (0 to 200

km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can

be selected by the driver between 20 to 125

MPH (30 to 200 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the

road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front of

you and reduce the speed to match a slower

vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the

vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead

comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill. However, the ICC system can only

apply up to 50% of the vehicle’s total braking

power. This system should only be used when

traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle speeds

change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the

traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling

ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be-

tween vehicles may become closer because

the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system

will sound a warning chime and illuminate the

distance warning light to notify the driver to

take necessary action.

The following items are controlled in the ICC

system:

•When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20 and

125 MPH (30 and 200 km/h).

•When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the ICC system adjusts the speed to main-

tain the distance, selected by driver, from

the vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed

range is up to the set speed. If the vehicle

ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decel-

erates to a standstill within the limitations

of the system. Once the vehicle is station-

ary, it remains stationary and you do not

need to depress the brake pedal.

•When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, pull the

cruise control lever or push the accelerator

pedal briefly. The ICC system accelerates

and maintains vehicle speed up to the set

speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach sta-

tionary and slow moving vehicles. You must

pay attention to vehicle operation to main-

tain proper distance from vehicles ahead

when approaching toll gates or traffic con-

gestion.

ICC SWITCH (CRUISE CONTROL

LEVER)

䊊

1Store the current speed or a higher speed

䊊

2Set the specified minimum distance

䊊

3Store the current speed or call up the last

stored speed

䊊

4Store the current speed or a lower speed

䊊

5Deactivate the ICC system

The ICC system is operated by the cruise

control lever, located on the steering column.

NSD582A

Starting and driving 5-51

ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY AND

INDICATORS

Displays in the speedometer

When the ICC system is activated and there

are no vehicles detected ahead, one or two

segments 䊊

2in the set speed range light up.

If the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead,

segments 䊊

2between speed of the vehicle

ahead 䊊

3and stored speed 䊊

1light up.

NOTE

For design reasons, the speed displayed in

the speedometer may differ slightly from the

speed set for the ICC system.

Display when the ICC system is

deactivated

䊊

1Vehicle ahead, if detected

䊊

2Distance indicator: current distance to

the vehicle ahead

䊊

3Specified minimum distance to the ve-

hicle ahead; adjustable

䊊

4Own vehicle

Display when the ICC system is

activated

You will initially see the stored speed for

about five seconds when you activate the

ICC system.

䊊

1Vehicle ahead, if detected

䊊

2Specified minimum distance to the ve-

hicle ahead; adjustable

䊊

3Own vehicle

䊊

4ICC stored speed (text only appears

when the cruise control lever is actuated)

NIC2824A NSD614 NSD601

5-52 Starting and driving

OPERATING ICC

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed and quickly push the

cruise control lever, up 䊊

1or down 䊊

4. Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your ve-

hicle will maintain the set speed.

NOTE

If you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the [ICC Suspended] message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display. The

set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in

front will then not be maintained. You will be

driving at the speed you determine by the

position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate the ICC when station-

ary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20

MPH (30 km/h ).

System operation

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-

tem maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to

standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle

is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system

displays the set speed for 5 seconds after the

cruise control lever is activated.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,

the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by

controlling the throttle and applying the

brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle

ahead. The system then controls the vehicle

speed based on the speed of the vehicle

ahead to maintain the driver selected dis-

tance.

The brake lights of the vehicle come on when

braking is performed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle

ahead symbol 䊊

1appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead,

the ICC system gradually accelerates your

vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle

speed. The ICC system then maintains the set

speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead display turns off 䊊

NSD582A NSD615

System set display with vehicle ahead

NSD616

System set display without vehicle ahead

Starting and driving 5-53

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system con-

trols the distance to that vehicle.

Changing lanes to pass another

vehicle:

When you changes lane to pass another ve-

hicle, ICC supports the action if:

•The vehicle speed is more than 45 MPH

(70 km/h)

•The ICC is maintaining the distance to a

vehicle in front

•The respective turn signal is activated

If these conditions are met, the vehicle will be

accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted

if changing lanes takes too long or if the

distance between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle in front becomes too small.

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of these

methods:

•Tap the brake pedal when the vehicle is

moving.

•Quickly push the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow 䊊

The message [ICC OFF] appears in the ve-

hicle information display for 5 seconds.

To reset at a higher cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

•Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, quickly

pull the cruise control lever towards you

䊊

•Pull the cruise control lever up 䊊

1beyond

the pressure point. The set vehicle speed

will increase by approximately 10 MPH

(10 km/h).

•

Pull the cruise control lever up (1) at the

pressure point. The set vehicle speed will

increase by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h).

To reset at a lower cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

•Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, quickly pull

the cruise control lever towards you 䊊

•Pull the cruise control lever down 䊊

4be-

yond the pressure point. The set vehicle

speed will decrease by approximately 10

MPH (10 km/h).

•

Pull the cruise control lever down

䊊

to the

pressure point. The set vehicle speed will de-

crease by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, quickly pull the

cruise control lever towards you 䊊

4. The ve-

hicle will resume the last set cruising speed

when the vehicle speed is over 20 MPH

(30 km/h).

NOTE

If you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the [ICC Deactivated Automatically]

message appears in the vehicle information

NSD582A

5-54 Starting and driving

display. The set distance to a slower-moving

vehicle in front will then not be maintained.

You will be driving at the speed you deter-

mine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate ICC when stationary.

The lowest speed that can be set is 20 MPH

(30 km/h).

Stopping

WARNING

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle.

•The ICC system should only be used to

keep the vehicle stationary when the

driver is actively using the system.

When parking the vehicle, make sure to

turn OFF the ICC system, use the brake,

press the PARK (P) button, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK position

prior to exiting the vehicle. Failure to do

so could lead to serious injury or death.

The ICC system will not hold the vehicle

in place after coming to a stop when any

of the following conditions occur:

–There is a malfunction in the system

or in the voltage supply.

–The ICC system has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e. g. by a

vehicle occupant.

–The accelerator pedal has been de-

pressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

For further information on deactivating the

ICC system, see "ICC switch (cruise control

lever)" earlier in this section

If the ICC system detects that the vehicle in

front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it

is stationary (within the braking limitations of

the system).

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains

stationary and you do not need to depress

the brake.

NOTE

•After a short period, the vehicle is secured

by the electric parking brake, thus relieving

the service brake.

•Depending on the specified minimum dis-

tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill

at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle

in front. The specified minimum distance is

set using the control on the cruise control

lever.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if the ICC system is activated

when the vehicle is stationary and:

•A system fault occurs.

•The power supply is insufficient.

If a malfunction in the electric parking brake

occurs, then the transmission may also be

shifted into position P (Park) automatically.

Starting and driving 5-55

How to change the set distance to

the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traffic

conditions.

To increase the distance to the vehicle ahead,

turn the knob 䊊

3toward the rear 䊊

2.To

decrease the distance to the vehicle ahead,

turn the knob 䊊

3toward the front 䊊

You can see this distance in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

The distance to the vehicle ahead will change

according to the vehicle speed. The higher the

vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system

warns the driver with the chime and distance

warning light. Decelerate by depressing the

brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle dis-

tance if:

•The chime sounds.

•The distance warning light is illuminated.

The warning chime may not sound and the

distance warning light may not illuminate in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

•When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between ve-

hicles is not changing. In this case, the

distance warning light will be on.

•When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is in-

creasing.

•When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

•The warning chime will not sound and the

distance warning light will not illuminate

when:

– The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

– The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driv-

ing position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle

condition (for example, if a vehicle is being

driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds and the message [ICC off] is

displayed in the vehicle information display

for 5 seconds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled.

•The electric parking brake is applied.

•The VDC intervenes or the VDC is deacti-

vated.

•The P (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral)

position is engaged.

•The cruise control lever is pulled in order to

pull away but the front passenger door or

one of the rear doors is open.

•The vehicle is skidding or a wheel slips.

•Active Park Assist is activated.

NSD583A

5-56 Starting and driving

ICC LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the ICC system. Failure to operate the ve-

hicle in accordance with these system limi-

tations could result in serious injury or

death.

•This system is only an aid to assist the

driver and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

•The system is primarily intended for use

on straight, dry, open roads with light

traffic. It is not advisable to use the sys-

tem in city traffic or congested areas.

•This system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. This system

should be used in evenly flowing traffic.

Do not use the system on roads with

sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy

rain or in fog.

•As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, depend-

ing on the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circumstances in

order to maintain a safe distance be-

tween vehicles.

•If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within

the limitations of the system. Once the

vehicle is stationary, it remains station-

ary and you do not need to depress the

brake pedal.

•Always pay attention to the operation

of the vehicle and be ready to manually

control the proper following distance.

The ICC system may not be able to main-

tain the selected distance between ve-

hicles (following distance) or selected

vehicle speed under some circum-

stances.

•Normally when controlling the distance

to a vehicle ahead, this system auto-

matically accelerates or decelerates

your vehicle according to the speed of

the vehicle ahead. If required, depress

the accelerator to properly accelerate

your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the

brake pedal when deceleration is re-

quired to maintain a safe distance to the

vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking

or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert

when using the ICC system.

•The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never

use the ICC system under the following

conditions:

–On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves.

–On slippery road surfaces such as on

ice or snow, etc.

–During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.).

–When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

system sensor.

–On steep downhill roads (the vehicle

may go beyond the set vehicle speed

and frequent braking may result in

overheating the brakes).

–On repeated uphill and downhill

roads.

–When traffic conditions make it diffi-

cult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of frequent

acceleration or deceleration.

–If there is interference by other radar

sources.

Starting and driving 5-57

•Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not de-

tect a vehicle ahead.

•In some road or traffic conditions, a ve-

hicle or object can unexpectedly come

into the sensor detection zone and cause

automatic braking. You may need to

control the distance from other vehicles

using the accelerator pedal. Always stay

alert and avoid using the ICC system

when it is not recommended in this sec-

tion.

•The distance sensor will not detect the

following objects:

–Stationary and slow moving vehicles.

–Pedestrians or objects in the road-

way.

–Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

–Motorcycles traveling offset in the

travel lane.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle

ahead and the system may not operate prop-

erly:

•When the snow or road spray from travel-

ing vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility.

•When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room

of your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the limi-

tation of the system. When the sensor is cov-

ered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will

automatically be canceled. If the sensor is

covered with ice, a transparent or translucent

vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect

them. In these instances, the ICC system may

not cancel and may not be able to maintain

the selected following distance from the ve-

hicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the

sensor regularly.

TIPS FOR DRIVING WITH THE ICC

SYSTEM

General notes

The following contains descriptions of cer-

tain road and traffic conditions in which you

must be particularly attentive. In such situa-

tions, brake if necessary. The ICC system is

then deactivated

Cornering, entering and exiting a

bend

The ability of the ICC system to detect ve-

hicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle

may brake unexpectedly or late.

NSD603

5-58 Starting and driving

Vehicles that are not driving in the

middle of their lane

The ICC system may not detect vehicles

which are not driving in the middle of their

lane. The system will not brake for or keep a

following distance to the car which is offset.

Other vehicles changing lanes

The ICC system has not detected the vehicle

cutting in yet. The system will not brake for or

keep a following distance to this vehicle.

Narrow vehicles (including

motorcycles)

The ICC system has not yet detected the

vehicle ahead on the edge of the lane be-

cause of its narrow width. The system will not

brake for or keep a following distance to this

vehicle.

NSD606 NSD604 NSD605

Starting and driving 5-59

Obstructions and stationary

vehicles

The ICC system does not brake for obstacles

or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the

detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an

obstacle or stationary vehicle The ICC system

will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

The ICC system may detect vehicles that are

crossing your lane by mistake. Activating the

ICC system at traffic lights with crossing traf-

fic, for example, could cause your vehicle to

pull away unintentionally.

NSD607 NSD608

5-60 Starting and driving

䊊

1Steering wheel mounted controls (left

side)

䊊

2Vehicle information display

䊊

ADisplay area

䊊

BMENU bar

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When the radar sensor area is covered with

dirt or is obstructed, the system will auto-

matically be canceled. If the radar sensor area

is covered with ice, a transparent or translu-

cent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not

detect them. In these instances, the ICC sys-

tem may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

If the ICC system stops working due to a

malfunction or some other reason, one of the

following messages will be displayed in the

vehicle information display 䊊

•[ICC off]

•[ICC Now Available]

•[ICC Currently Unavailable See Operator's

Manual]

•[ICC Inoperative]

•[ICC Suspended]

•[ICC – – – MPH]

[ICC off]: The ICC system has been deacti-

vated. If it was not deactivated by the driver,

a warning tone also sounds.

[ICC Now Available]: The ICC system is op-

erational again after having been temporarily

unavailable. You can now reactivate the ICC

system.

NSD626

Starting and driving 5-61

[ICC Currently Unavailable See Operator's

Manual]: The ICC system is temporarily inop-

erative. Possible causes:

•The function is impaired due to heavy rain

or snow.

•The radar sensor system is temporarily in-

operative, e. g. due to electromagnetic ra-

diation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-

tions or other sources of electromagnetic

radiation.

•The system is outside the operating tem-

perature range.

•The on-board voltage is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply,

the display message goes out.

If the display message does not disappear:

•Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as

soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.

•Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

•Restart the engine.

[ICC Inoperative]: The ICC system is mal-

functioning. The adaptive brake assist func-

tion may also have failed. A warning tone also

sounds. Have the system checked. It is rec-

ommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

[ICC Suspended]: You have depressed the

accelerator pedal. The ICC system is no lon-

ger controlling the speed of the vehicle.

The display message should disappear when

you remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal

[ICC–––MPH]: An activation condition for

the ICC system is not fulfilled.

Check the activation conditions for the ICC

system.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

Ais located

behind the INFINITI logo at the front of the

vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

•Always keep area around the sensor clean.

•Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor. Do not touch or remove the

screw located on the sensor. Doing so

could cause failure or malfunction. If the

sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is

recommended you contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

•Do not cover or attach stickers (including

transparent material) or install an acces-

sory near the sensor. This could cause fail-

ure or malfunction.

NSD645

5-62 Starting and driving

Radio frequency statement

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the FEB system

could result in serious personal injury or

death.

•The FEB system is a supplemental aid to

the driver. It is not a replacement for the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions

or responsibility to drive safely. It can-

not prevent accidents due to careless-

ness or dangerous driving techniques.

•The FEB system does not function in all

driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The FEB system can assist the driver when

there is a risk of a forward collision with the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The FEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊

Alo-

cated behind the INFINITI logo to measure

the distance to the vehicle ahead in the trav-

eling lane.

NSD645

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-63

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION

䊊

1Steering wheel mounted controls (left

side)

䊊

2Distance warning light

䊊

3Forward emergency braking OFF display

The FEB system consists of a distance warn-

ing function with an autonomous emergency

braking function and adaptive brake assist

function.

The FEB system can help you to minimize the

risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or

reduce the effects of such a collision

If the FEB system detects that there is a risk

of a collision, you will be warned visually and

audibly. If you do not react to the visual and

audible collision warning, autonomous brak-

ing can be initiated in critical situations. If you

apply the brake yourself in a critical situation,

the adaptive brake assist function assists

you.

NSD624

5-64 Starting and driving

Distance warning function

The distance warning function can help you

to minimize the risk of a collision with the

vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a

collision. If the distance warning function de-

tects that there is a risk of a collision, you will

be warned visually and audibly.

The distance warning function issues a warn-

ing at speeds:

•Of approximately 20 MPH (30 km/h) or

more, if, over several seconds the distance

maintained to the vehicle traveling in front

is insufficient. The distance warning light

then lights up in the combination meter.

•Of approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h) or

more, if you rapidly approach a vehicle in

front. An intermittent warning tone will

then sound and the distance warning light

will light up in the combination meter.

If a warning is issued:

•Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.

•Take evasive action provided it is safe to

do so.

WARNING

Due to the nature of the system, particu-

larly complicated but non-critical driving

conditions may also cause the system to

display a warning.

Up to a speed of approximately 45 MPH (70

km/h), the distance warning function can

also react to stationary (stopped or parked)

vehicles.

If you approach a stationary vehicle and the

distance warning function detects a risk of a

collision, the system will alert you both visu-

ally and acoustically.

Autonomous braking function

If the driver does not react to the distance

warning signal in a critical situation, the FEB

system can assist with the autonomous brak-

ing function

The autonomous braking function can help

the driver to avoid an accident or reduces the

effects of an accident.

The autonomous braking function is available

in the following speed ranges:

•4–125 MPH (7-200 km/h) for moving ve-

hicles

•4–30 MPH (7 -50 km/h) for stationary

vehicles

Adaptive brake assist function

Adaptive brake assist function provides brak-

ing assistance in hazardous situations at

speeds above 4 MPH (7 km/h). It uses radar

sensor technology to assess the traffic situa-

tion.

If the system detects a risk of collision with

the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking

force necessary to avoid a collision. If you

apply the brakes forcefully, the adaptive

brake assist function will automatically in-

crease the braking force to a level suitable for

the traffic conditions.

NSD598

Distance warning light

Starting and driving 5-65

If the adaptive brake assist function acti-

vates, keep the brake pedal depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over. ABS

prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:

•You release the brake pedal.

•There is no longer any danger of a collision.

•No obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.

The brake assist function is then deactivated.

At high speeds, the adaptive brake assist

function is capable of reacting to moving ob-

jects that have already been detected as such

at least once over the period of observation.

Up to a speed of approximately 45 MPH (70

km/h), the adaptive brake assist function re-

acts to stationary vehicles.

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

䊊

1Steering-wheel mounted controls (left

side)

䊊

2Vehicle information display

䊊

ADisplay area

䊊

BMenu bar

NSD626

5-66 Starting and driving

Use the following procedure to turn the FEB

system on or off:

1. Press the <or> button on the

steering wheel 䊊

1to select the [DriveAs-

sist] menu on the Menu bar 䊊

2. Press the or button to select

[Emergency Brake].

3. Press the <OK> button on the steering

wheel 䊊

1. The current selection is dis-

played.

4. To activate/deactivate the FEB system:

press the <OK> button again

When the FEB system is deactivated, the

symbol 䊊

Cappears in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

NOTE

The FEB system will be automatically turned

on when the engine is restarted.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the FEB system. Failure to operate the ve-

hicle in accordance with these system limi-

tations could result in serious injury or

death.

•The FEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

•The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

–Pedestrians or animals

–Oncoming vehicles

–Crossing vehicles

•The radar sensor has some performance

limitations. For stationary vehicles, the

FEB system will not function when the

vehicle is driven at speeds over:

–

Approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h) for

the Autonomous braking function.

•The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following conditions:

–Dirt, ice, snow or other material cov-

ering the radar sensor.

–Interference by other radar sources.

–Snow or heavy rain.

–If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

–If the vehicle ahead is in a different

lane.

–Under strong radar reflections, for

example, in a multi-level parking ga-

rage.

–New vehicle or after a maintenance

of the FEB system. For additional in-

formation, see "Break-in schedule"

later in this section

–When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

–When towing a trailer.

•In some road or traffic conditions, the

FEB system may intervene unnecessar-

ily or give an unnecessary warning. Al-

ways pay careful attention to the traffic

situation. Do not rely solely on the dis-

tance warning function and terminate

the intervention if necessary.

•Braking distances increase on slippery

surfaces.

NSD630

Starting and driving 5-67

•The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality, within

certain limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstruction of the

sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers,

for example. In these cases, the system

may not be able to warn the driver prop-

erly. Be sure that you check, clean and

clear the sensor area regularly.

•Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

If the FEB stops working due to a malfunc-

tion or some other reason, one of the follow-

ing three messages will be displayed in the

vehicle information display.

•[Emergency Brake Currently Unavailable

See Operator's Manual]

•[Emergency Brake Inoperative]

•[Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's

Manual]

For each of these messages, possible causes

and solutions are listed below.

[Emergency Brake Currently Unavailable

See Operator's Manual]: The FEB system is

temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:

•The radar sensor system is temporarily in-

operative, for example, due to electro-

magnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV

or radio stations or other sources of elec-

tromagnetic radiation.

•The system is outside the operating tem-

perature range.

•The on-board voltage is too low.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply,

the display message goes out. The FEB sys-

tem is operative again.

If the display message does not disappear:

•Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as

soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.

•Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

•Switch off the engine.

[Emergency Brake Inoperative]: The FEB

system is temporarily inoperative due to a

malfunction. The adaptive brake assist func-

tion may also have failed.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer.

[Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's

Manual]: The FEB system is temporarily re-

stricted or inoperative. Possible causes:

•The sensor behind the INFINITI logo is

dirty.

•The function of the FEB system is im-

paired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply,

the display message goes out. The FEB sys-

tem is operative again.

If the display message does not disappear:

•Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as

soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions.

•Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

•Switch off the engine.

•Clean the area around the sensors.

•Restart the engine. The display message

disappears.

5-68 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

Ais located behind the INFINITI

logo at the front of the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

•Always keep the sensor area of the

INFINITI logo clean.

•Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

•Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sen-

sor area. This could cause failure or mal-

function.

•Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

•Do not alter, remove or paint the front

grille or INFINITI logo.

FCC NOTICE

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

NSD645

Starting and driving 5-69

NOTE

To operate the active sound enhancement

properly:

•Do not cover the speakers or woofer.

•Do not change or modify speakers includ-

ing the woofer and any audio related parts

such as the amplifier.

•Do not make any modification including

sound deadening or modifications around

the speakers or woofer.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

The active sound enhancement generates

sounds according to engine speed through

the speakers 䊊

2and woofer 䊊

1(if equipped)

to enhance the quality of the engine sound.

NSD648

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

5-70 Starting and driving

IPA is an electronic parking aid with ultra-

sound. It detects vehicles and open spaces on

both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol

indicates a suitable parking space. Active

steering intervention can assist you during

parking and when exiting a parking space.

The driver controls the accelerator, brake and

gear shift. You may also use the Camera Aid-

ing Sonar (parking sensor) function (see "

Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor) func-

tion (if equipped)" later in this section).

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES

WARNING

•IPA is only an aid. It is not a substitute

for your attention to the immediate sur-

roundings. The responsibility for safe

maneuvering and parking remains with

you.

•Make sure that no persons, animals or

objects are in the maneuvering range

•When the sonar (parking sensor) func-

tion is deactivated, IPA is also unavail-

able.

•While parking or pulling out of a parking

space, the vehicle swings out and can

drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with

other road users. There is a risk of an

accident.

•Pay attention to other road users. Stop

the vehicle if necessary or cancel the IPA

parking procedure

•This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

•If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

•This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

•If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Do not drive over obstacles such as curbs,

as you may damage the wheels or tires.

IPA may also display spaces not suitable for

parking, for example:

•Parking or stopping prohibition.

•In front of driveways or entrances and

exits.

•Unsuitable surfaces.

Parking tips:

•On narrow roads, drive as closely as pos-

sible past the parking space.

•Parking spaces that are littered or over-

grown might be identified or measured

incorrectly.

•Parking spaces that are partly occupied by

trailer towing bars might not be identified

as such or be measured incorrectly.

•Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a park-

ing space being measured inaccurately.

•Pay attention to the sonar function warn-

ing messages during the parking proce-

dure.

•You can intervene in the steering proce-

dure to correct it at any time. IPA will then

be canceled.

•When transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you should not use IPA.

•Never use IPA when snow chains are fit-

ted.

•Make sure that the tire pressures are al-

ways correct. This has a direct influence on

the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

INTELLIGENT PARKING ASSIST (IPA)

(IF EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-71

Use IPA for parking spaces that are:

•Parallel or at right angles to the direction

of travel.

•On straight roads, not bends.

•On the same level as the road, e. g. not on

the sidewalk.

For vehicles with the towbar folded out, the

minimum length for parking spaces is slightly

longer.

If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,

you may not use IPA. Once the electrical

connection is established between your ve-

hicle and the trailer, IPA is no longer available.

The sonar function is deactivated for the rear

area

DETECTING PARKING SPACES

The IPA system can only be used to park in

spaces that have vehicles directly on either

side of the parking space.

Objects located above the height range of

IPA will not be detected when the parking

space is measured. These are not taken into

account when the parking procedure is calcu-

lated, e. g. overhanging loads, tail sections or

loading ramps of goods vehicles.

WARNING

If there are objects above the detection

range, IPA may steer too early. This could

cause a collision. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

If objects are located above the detection

range, stop and switch off the IPA.

For further information on the detection

range see "Range of the sensors" later in this

section.

IPA does not assist you parking in spaces at

right angles to the direction of travel if:

•Two parking spaces are located directly

next to one another.

•The parking space is directly next to a low

obstacle such as a low curb.

•You forward park.

IPA does not assist you parking in spaces that

are parallel or at right angles to the direction

of travel if:

•The parking space is on a curb.

•The system reads the parking space as

being blocked, for example, by foliage or

grass paving blocks.

•The area is too small for the vehicle to

maneuver into.

•The parking space is bordered by an ob-

stacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.

5-72 Starting and driving

䊊

1Detected parking space on the left.

䊊

2Parking symbol.

䊊

3Detected parking space on the right.

IPA is activated automatically when driving

forwards. The system is operational at

speeds of up to approximately 19 MPH (30

km/h). While in operation, the system inde-

pendently locates and measures parking

spaces on both sides of the vehicle

IPA will only detect parking spaces:

•Adjacent to the vehicle.

•Parallel or at right angles to the direction

of travel.

•That are parallel to the direction of travel

and are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide.

•That are parallel to the direction of travel

and at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) longer than your

vehicle.

•That are at right angles to the direction of

travel and at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) wider than

your vehicle.

NOTE

IPA cannot measure the length of a parking

space if it is at right angles to the direction of

travel. You will need to judge whether your

vehicle will fit in the parking space

When driving at speeds below 19 MPH (30

km/h) you will see parking symbol 䊊

2as a

status indicator in the vehicle information

display. When a parking space has been de-

tected, an arrow towards the right 䊊

3or the

left 䊊

1also appears. IPA only displays park-

ing spaces on the front-passenger side as

standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side

are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the

driver's side is activated. When parking on the

driver's side, this must remain activated until

you confirm the use of IPA by pressing the

<OK> button on the steering wheel. The sys-

tem automatically determines whether the

parking space is parallel or at right angles to

the direction of travel.

A parking space is displayed while you are

driving past it, and until you are approxi-

mately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

PARKING

NOTE

When the sonar function detects obstacles,

you are responsible for braking in good time.

1. Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol

shows the desired parking space in the

combination meter

2. Shift into position R.

The [Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:]

message appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

3. To cancel the procedure: press the

button on the steering wheel or pull away

4. To park using IPA press the <OK> button

on the steering wheel. The Park Assist

[Observe surroundings] message appears

in the vehicle information display.

5. Release the steering wheel.

6. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake

at all times. When backing up, drive at a

speed below 5 MPH (10 km/h). Other-

wise, IPA will be canceled.

NSD696

Upper display

Starting and driving 5-73

7. Stop as soon as the sonar function sounds

the continuous warning tone, if not be-

fore. Maneuvering may be required in

tight parking spaces.

The [Park Assist active Select D Observe

surroundings] message appears in the ve-

hicle information display.

8. Select transmission position D (Drive)

while the vehicle is stationary.

IPA immediately steers in the other direc-

tion.

The [Park Assist Observe surroundings]

message appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

NOTE

You will achieve the best results by wait-

ing for the steering procedure to com-

plete before pulling away.

9. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at

all times.

Maneuvering may be required in tight

parking spaces. Drive forward and back

up as prompted by the IPA and sonar

function warning displays, several times if

necessary.

10. Stop as soon as the sonar function

sounds the continuous warning tone, if

not before.

The [Park Assist active Select R] [Ob-

serve surroundings] message appears in

the vehicle information display.

As soon as the parking procedure is

complete the [Park Assist switched off]

message appears and a warning tone

sounds. The vehicle is now parked.

11. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the ve-

hicle against rolling away unintentionally:

•The electric parking brake must be ap-

plied.

•The transmission must be in position P

(Park) and the transmission position

display must show P in the vehicle

information display.

•The key must be removed from the

ignition switch.

•On uphill or downhill gradients, the

front wheels must be turned towards

the curb.

IPA no longer supports you with steering in-

terventions. When IPA is finished, you must

steer again yourself. The sonar function is still

available.

Parking tips:

•The way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependent

on various factors. These include the posi-

tion and shape of the vehicles parked in

front and behind it and the conditions of

the location. It may be the case that IPA

guides you too far into a parking space, or

not far enough into it. In some cases, it

may also lead you across or onto the curb.

If necessary you should cancel the parking

procedure with IPA.

•During the parking maneuver, the system

will indicate when you should shift to R

(Reverse) or D (Drive). However, you can

freely choose to shift gear whenever you

feel you need to. Should the transmission

change take place too early, the parking

procedure will be canceled. A sensible

parking position can no longer be achieved

from this position.

EXITING A PARKING SPACE

In order that IPA can support when exiting

the parking space:

•You need to have parked using IPA.

•The border of the parking space must be

high enough at the front and the rear. A

curb stone is too small, for example.

5-74 Starting and driving

•The border of the parking space must not

be too wide, as the position of the vehicle

must not exceed an angle of 45 degrees to

the starting position as it is manoeuvred

into the parking space.

•A total front and back maneuvering dis-

tance of at least 1.0 m must be available.

IPA can only assist you with exiting a parking

space if you have parked the vehicle parallel

to the direction of travel using IPA.

WARNING

•IPA is only an aid. It is not a substitute

for your attention to the immediate sur-

roundings. The responsibility for safe

maneuvering and parking remains with

you.

•Make sure that no persons, animals or

objects are in the maneuvering range.

•When the sonar function is deactivated,

IPA is also unavailable.

•While parking or pulling out of a parking

space, the vehicle swings out and can

drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with

other road users. There is a risk of an

accident.

•Pay attention to other road users. Stop

the vehicle if necessary or cancel the IPA

parking procedure.

1. Start the engine.

2. Release the electric parking brake.

3. Switch on the turn signal in the direction

you are pulling away.

4. Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position D or R

The [Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:]

message appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

5. To cancel the procedure: press the

button on the steering wheel or pull away

6. To exit a parking space using IPA: press

the <OK> button on the steering wheel

The Park Assist [Observe surroundings]

message appears in the display.

7. Release the steering wheel.

8. Pull away, being ready to brake at all

times Do not exceed a maximum speed of

approximately 5 MPH (10 km/h) when

exiting a parking space. Otherwise, IPA

will be canceled.

WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking

space, the vehicle swings out and can drive

onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

cause you to collide with other road users.

There is a risk of an accident.

9. Depending on the message or as required,

shift the transmission to position D or R.

IPA immediately steers in the other direc-

tion. The [Observe surroundings] mes-

sage appears in the display.

NOTE

You will achieve the best results by wait-

ing for the steering procedure to com-

plete before pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steer-

ing wheel is moved to the straight-ahead

position.

10. Drive forward and back up as prompted

by the IPA and sonar function warning

displays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-

pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the

straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and

the [Park Assist switched off] message ap-

pears in the display. You will then have to

steer and merge into traffic on your own. The

Starting and driving 5-75

sonar function is still available. You can take

over the steering before the vehicle has ex-

ited the parking space completely. This is use-

ful, for example when you recognize that it is

already possible to pull out of the parking

space.

CANCELING IPA

Stop the movement of the steering wheel or

steer yourself. IPA will be immediately can-

celed. The [Park Assist canceled] message

appears in the vehicle information display.

Press the sonar function OFF switch. The

sonar function is switched off and IPA is

immediately canceled The [Park Assist can-

celed] message appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

IPA is canceled automatically if:

•The electric parking brake is applied

•Parking using IPA is no longer possible

•You are driving faster than 5 MPH (10

km/h)

•A wheel spins and VDC intervenes or fails.

The warning light lights up in the

combination meter.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol

disappears and the vehicle information dis-

play shows the [Park Assist canceled] mes-

sage.

When IPA is canceled, you must steer again

yourself.

WARNING

•The sonar function is a convenience but

it is not a substitute for proper parking.

Always look around and check that it is

safe to do so before parking. Always

move slowly.

•Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar function as contained in this

section. Inclement weather may affect

the function of the sonar function; this

may include reduced performance or a

false activation.

•The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other maneu-

vers.

•The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

The system will not detect small objects

below the bumper, and may not detect

objects that are too close to the bumper

or on the ground.

•Always look around and check that it is

safe to move before parking.

CAMERA AIDING SONAR (PARKING

SENSOR) FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

5-76 Starting and driving

CAUTION

•Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible to hear the tone clearly.

•Keep the sensors (located on the bumper

fascia) free from snow, ice and large ac-

cumulations of dirt. Do not clean the

sensors with sharp objects. If the sen-

sors are covered, the accuracy of the

sensor function will be diminished.

WARNING

INFINITI recommends only to use frame-

less type license plate holders.

The sonar sensors may not function cor-

rectly if the license plate is placed in a frame

as illustrated.

Please contact an INFINITI retailer for

advice.

NSD642

No frame/frameless

NSD643

Frame type

Starting and driving 5-77

SONAR FUNCTION OVERVIEW

䊊

1Possible sonar sensor locations

The sonar function is an electronic parking

aid with ultrasonic sensors. The sonar func-

tion indicates audibly the distance between

your vehicle and an object. It monitors the

area around your vehicle using sensors in the

front and rear bumper. Possible sensor con-

figurations include a 4 sensor, 10 sensor or

12 sensor configuration.

NSD040

NSD041

NSD636

Type A: 4 sensor system

5-78 Starting and driving

For the vehicle equipped with rear sensors

(Type A):

The system informs you about rear obstacles

with visual and audible signals when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-

onds when an obstacle is detected by only

the corner sensor and the distance does not

change. The tone will stop when the obstacle

moves away from the vehicle.

For the vehicle equipped with front and rear

sensors (Type B and C):

The system informs you about front ob-

stacles with visual and audible signals when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and

both front and rear obstacles when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-

onds when an obstacle is detected by only

the corner sensor and the distance does not

change. The tone will stop when the obstacle

moves away from the vehicle.

NSD635

Type B: 10 sensor system

NSD634

Type C: 12 sensor system

Starting and driving 5-79

NSD706

With Around View monitor

5-80 Starting and driving

䊊

ARearView/Around View monitor display

䊊

BINFINITI controller

䊊

C<MENU> button

䊊

D<CAMERA> button

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer

to an object, the corner sensor indicators 䊊

appear (if equipped).

When the center of the vehicle moves close

to an object, the center indicator 䊊

2appears.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of the

blinking increases. When the vehicle is very

close to the object, the indicator stops blink-

ing and turns red, and the tone sounds con-

tinuously.

The sonar function is activated automatically

when you:

•Switch on the ignition

•Shift to position D (Drive), or R (Reverse)

on vehicles with automatic transmission

•Release the electric parking brake

The sonar function is deactivated at speeds

above 10 MPH (16 km/h). It is reactivated at

lower speeds.

NSD707

With RearView monitor

NAA1547

Starting and driving 5-81

The sonar function is deactivated for the rear

area when you establish an electrical connec-

tion between your vehicle and a trailer.

RANGE OF THE SENSORS

The sonar function does not take into ac-

count obstacles located:

•Below the detection range, e.g. persons,

animals or objects.

•Above the detection range, e.g. overhang-

ing loads, tail sections or loading ramps of

goods vehicles. SONAR FUNCTION OFF SWITCH

The sonar function OFF switch 䊊

2on the

lower side of the instrument panel allows the

driver to turn the sonar function on and off.

To turn the sonar function system on and off,

the ignition switch must be in the ON posi-

tion. The indicator light 䊊

1on the switch will

illuminate when the system is turned off.

The sonar function will turn on automatically

when the ignition switch is turned from the

OFF position to the ON position.

NIC2635

5-82 Starting and driving

䊊

ASettings key

䊊

B<MENU> button SONAR FUNCTION SETTINGS

The sonar function settings can be changed

using the following procedure.

1. Push <MENU>䊊

Band touch [Settings] 䊊

2. Touch [Camera/Sonar]

3. Touch [Sonar]

[Sonar sensitivity]:

Adjust the sonar sensitivity by touching [+]/

[-].

[Sonar volume]:

Adjust the warning tone volume by touching

[+]/[-].

SONAR FUNCTION LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the sonar function. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

•Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources

such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s

compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic

drill may affect the function of the sys-

tem, including reduced performance or a

false activation.

•The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

•The system will not detect small objects

below the bumper, and may not detect

objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

NSD628

Starting and driving 5-83

•The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects:

–Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,

cotton, grass or wool.

–Thin objects such as rope, wire or

chain.

–Wedge-shaped objects.

•If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

jects or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system vol-

ume or an open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the tone and it may not be heard.

PROBLEMS WITH SONAR FUNCTION

Problem Possible causes/consequences and solutions

Only the red segments in the sonar function displays

are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately

two seconds.

The sonar function is then deactivated and the

indicator light on the sonar function OFF switch lights

up.

The sonar function has malfunctioned and has been deactivated.

If problems persist, have the sonar function checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

Only the red segments in the sonar function displays

are lit. The sonar function is then deactivated.

The sonar sensors are dirty or there is interference.

•Clean the sensors.

•Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.

See if the sonar system functions in a different location.

5-84 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (if

equipped) (located on the front and rear

bumper fascia) free from accumulations of

snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the sur-

face of the sonar sensors when cleaning. If

the sensors are covered, the accuracy of

the sonar function will be diminished.

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fol-

low these recommendations to obtain maxi-

mum engine performance and ensure the fu-

ture reliability and economy of your new

vehicle. Failure to follow these recommenda-

tions may result in shortened engine life and

reduced engine performance.

•Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run

the engine over 4,000 RPM.

•Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

•Avoid quick starts.

•Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

•Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

You should also observe these notes on

break-in if the engine or parts of the drive

train on your vehicle have been replaced.

CAUTION

In certain driving and driving safety sys-

tems, the sensors adjust automatically

while a certain distance is being driven af-

ter the vehicle has been delivered or after

repairs. Full system effectiveness is not

reached until the end of this teach-in pro-

cess.

Brake pads/linings and rotors that are ei-

ther new or have been replaced only

achieve optimum braking effect after sev-

eral hundred miles of driving. Compensate

for the reduced braking effect by applying

greater force to the brake pedal

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

Starting and driving 5-85

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driv-

ing Tips to help you achieve the most fuel

economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal

Application

•Avoid rapid starts and stops.

•Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

•Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

•Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

•Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

•Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Ve-

hicle Speeds

•Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

•Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

•Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

•Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where le-

gally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

•Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces unneces-

sary braking.

•Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

•Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

•Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed.

•Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on

flat terrains.

Utilize a map or navigation system to deter-

mine the best route to save time.

6. Avoid Idling

•Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30 seconds saves fuel

and reduces emissions.

7. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

•Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruising

speed through the toll and avoid stop-

ping and starting.

8. Winter Warm Up

•Limit idling time to minimize impact to

fuel economy.

•Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef-

fectively circulate the engine oil before

driving.

•Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat-

ing temperature more quickly while

driving versus idling.

9. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

•Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

•When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C system.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-86 Starting and driving

•Keep your engine tuned up.

•Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

•Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

•Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, see "Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities"

in the "10. Technical information" section

WARNING

•Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged. Accelerating quickly, sharp

steering maneuvers or sudden braking

may cause loss of control.

•Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels.

•This vehicle is not designed for off-road

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy

or muddy roads that tires may get stuck

in.

•For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to any

drive or reverse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

•Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing) or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure that you inform the test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped

with 4WD before it is placed on a dyna-

mometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

•When a wheel is off the ground due to an

uneven surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF

EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-87

CAUTION

Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.

This may damage the differential. Damage

of this sort is not covered by the warranty.

All wheels must be fully raised (see "Four-

Wheel Drive (4WD) models" in the "6. In

case of emergency" section)

4WD, together with VDC, improves the trac-

tion of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel

spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4WD

can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor

override the laws of physics. 4WD cannot

take account of road, weather, and traffic

conditions. 4WD is only an aid. You are re-

sponsible for the distance to the vehicle in

front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

time, and for staying in lane.

If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip

•When pulling away, only depress the ac-

celerator pedal as far as is necessary.

•Accelerate less when driving.

NOTE

In wintry driving conditions, the maximum

effectiveness of 4WD can only be achieved if

you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow

chains if necessary.

WARNING

•Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

•Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be applied and

the P (Park) position engaged. Failure to

do so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result in

an accident.

•When parking the vehicle, make sure the

P (Park) position is engaged. The shift

lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position without depressing the

brake pedal.

•Never leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

•Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls or move the

vehicle. Unattended children could be-

come involved in serious accidents.

•To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or death

to people and pets.

CAUTION

Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its

drive train could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:

•The electric parking brake must be applied.

•The transmission must be in position P

(Park) and the transmission position dis-

play must show P in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

•The key must be removed from the ignition

switch.

•On uphill or downhill gradients, the front

wheels must be turned towards the curb.

PARKING

5-88 Starting and driving

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Press the P (Park) button.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from moving

into traffic when parked on an incline, it is

a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb. Then apply

the parking brake.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

allow the vehicle to move back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

Then apply the parking brake.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,

WITHOUT CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away from

the center of the road if the vehicle moves.

Then apply the parking brake.

Put the ignition switch in the OFF position.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to

position N (Neutral) when you switch off

the engine. The vehicle may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always

switch to position P (Park). Prevent the

parked vehicle from rolling away by apply-

ing the parking brake.

Procedure

1. Apply the electric parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to position P (Park).

3. With the key: turn the key to the position

OFF in the ignition switch and remove it

The immobilizer is activated.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-

mission in position R (Reverse) or D (Drive),

the automatic transmission shifts to N (Neu-

tral) automatically.

With the key: if you then open the driver's

door or the front-passenger door or remove

the key from the ignition, the automatic

transmission shifts to P (Park) automatically.

If you want the automatic transmission to

remain in neutral N (Neutral), e.g. when hav-

ing the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car

wash with a towing system:

With the key:

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it de-

pressed.

3. Shift to N (Neutral).

SSD0488Z

Starting and driving 5-89

4. Release the brake pedal.

5. Release the electric parking brake.

6. Switch off the ignition and leave the key in

the ignition switch.

EXTENDED PARKING

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer

than four weeks, the battery may be dam-

aged by exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer

than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use.

Visit an INFINITI retailer and seek advice

NOTE

You can obtain information about trickle

chargers from an INFINITI retailer.

The electric power steering system is de-

signed to reduce the driver effort required to

steer the vehicle.

WARNING

If during operation a fault is detected the

following message will be displayed in the

vehicle information display along with an

audible warning tone.

[Power Steering Malfunction See Opera-

tors Manual]

In conjunction with this warning, steering

assistance will no longer be provided by the

system.

The effort required to steer the vehicle will

increase. This will be most noticeable at

low speed and when performing a tight

turning maneuver.

Check whether you are able to provide the

extra effort required.

If you are able to steer safely: Carefully

drive on to an INFINITI retailer.

If you are unable to steer safely: Do NOT

drive on. It is recommended you contact

the nearest INFINITI retailer for

assistance.

CAUTION

•If wheels or tires other than INFINITI

recommended ones are used, the power

steering system may not operate prop-

erly and the [Power Steering Malfunc-

tion See Operators Manual] warning

may appear in the vehicle information

display.

•Do not modify the vehicle's suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not INFINITI

recommended for your vehicle or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the power steer-

ing system may not operate properly

and the [Power Steering Malfunction

See Operators Manual] warning may

appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

•Do not modify the vehicle's steering. If

steering parts are not INFINITI recom-

mended for your vehicle or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the power steer-

ing system may not operate properly

and the [Power Steering Malfunction

See Operators Manual] warning may

appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

SYSTEM

5-90 Starting and driving

•Do not place the ignition switch in the on

position while the steering wheel or a

tire is removed.

•Do not turn the steering wheel as much

as possible while the ignition switch is in

any position other than the ON position.

•Installing an accessory on the steering

wheel, or changing the steering wheel,

may reduce the steering performance.

NOTE

When the steering wheel is operated repeat-

edly or continuously while parking or driving

at a very low speed, the power assistance for

the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to

prevent overheating of the electric power

steering system and protect it from becom-

ing damaged. While the power assistance is

reduced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. When the temperature of the

electric power steering system decreases,

the power assistance level will return to nor-

mal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel

operations that could cause the electric

power steering system to overheat.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will

still have braking ability at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or acceler-

ating could cause the wheels to skid and

result in an accident.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using en-

gine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can

stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the

brake pedal will be required to stop the ve-

hicle. The stopping distance will be longer.

WARNING

•If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

•Do not coast with the engine stopped.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly

and firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and

feel a slight pulsation. This is normal and

indicates that the Brake Assist System is op-

erating (if equipped).

Using brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake linings/pads faster, and

increase fuel consumption.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down

a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes

may reduce braking performance and could

result in loss of vehicle control.

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful

when braking, accelerating or downshifting.

Abrupt braking or acceleration could cause

the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result,

your braking distance will be longer and the

vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly depressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the

brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-91

vehicle at high speeds until the brakes func-

tion correctly.

Driving uphill

When starting on a steep gradient, it is some-

times difficult to operate the brake. Use the

parking brake to hold the vehicle. When ready

to start, make sure that the shift lever is in an

appropriate forward or reverse driving posi-

tion, release the parking brake while depress-

ing the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle has

an electric parking brake, this will automati-

cally release when you depress the accelera-

tor pedal (DCT models).

Driving downhill

The engine braking action is effective for

controlling the vehicle while descending hills.

A low gear position in the manual shift mode,

low enough to obtain sufficient engine brak-

ing, should be selected.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in

order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-

vice manual and can be performed by an

INFINITI retailer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent

accidents resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can help

maintain vehicle control during braking on

slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping

distances on slippery surfaces will be lon-

ger than on normal surfaces even with

ABS. Stopping distances may also be lon-

ger on rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains. Al-

ways maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver

is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

–When replacing tires, install the specified

size of tires on all four wheels.

–When installing a replacement tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type as

specified on the tire and loading informa-

tion label. (See "Wheels and Tires" in the

"9. Maintenance and Schedules" section.)

–For detailed information, see "Wheels and

tires" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during

hard braking or when braking on slippery sur-

faces. The system detects the rotation speed

at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pres-

sure to prevent each wheel from locking and

sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-

ing, the system helps the driver maintain

steering control and helps to minimize swerv-

ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from

locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid ob-

stacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may

result in increased stopping distances.

5-92 Starting and driving

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates

the ABS warning light on the instrument

panel. The brake system then operates nor-

mally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the

ABS warning light illuminates during the self-

test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6

MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies ac-

cording to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation

in the brake pedal and hear a noise from

under the hood or feel a vibration from the

actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating prop-

erly. However, the pulsation may indicate

that road conditions are hazardous and extra

care is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs

and vehicle motion. Under certain driving

conditions, the VDC system helps to perform

the following functions.

•Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel

on the same axle.

•Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

•Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in the

following conditions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased

steering input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to main-

tain control of the vehicle, but it cannot pre-

vent loss of vehicle control in all driving situ-

ations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-93

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

•The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required to

help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

•You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under

the hood. This is normal and indicates that

the VDC system is working properly.

•Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

See " Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light" in the "2. Instruments and controls" sec-

tion.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system automati-

cally turns off.

WARNING

•

The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not pre-

vent accidents due to abrupt steering op-

eration at high speeds or by careless or

dangerous driving techniques. Reduce ve-

hicle speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery surfaces

and always drive carefully.

•Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not INFINITI

recommended for your vehicle or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

•If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warning

light may illuminate.

•If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

•When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners, the

VDC system may not operate properly

and the VDC warning light may illu-

minate. Do not drive on these types of

roads.

•When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the VDC warning light may

illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

•If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the VDC warning light may illumi-

nate.

•The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow cov-

ered road.

•If VDC is malfunctioning, VDC is unable

to stabilize the vehicle. In addition,

other driving safety systems are

switched off. This increases the risk of

skidding and an accident. Drive on care-

fully. Have VDC checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

CAUTION

•When VDC is deactivated, the

VDC OFF warning light lights up con-

tinuously.

5-94 Starting and driving

•If both the warning light and

warning light are lit continuously, VDC

is not available due to a malfunction.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

(TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) is part of

VDC.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-

vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull

away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for

example if the road surface is slippery on one

side. In addition, more drive torque is trans-

ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active if you deacti-

vate VDC.

CHARACTERISTICS OF VDC

If the VDC warning light goes out before

beginning the journey, VDC is automatically

active.

If VDC intervenes, the VDC warning

light flashes in the combination meter.

If VDC intervenes:

•Do not deactivate VDC under any circum-

stances.

•When pulling away, only depress the ac-

celerator pedal as far as is necessary.

•Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-

ing road and weather conditions.

Deactivating/activating VDC

WARNING

If you deactivate VDC, VDC no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate VDC in the situations de-

scribed in the following section.

You can select between the following sta-

tuses of VDC:

•VDC is activated.

•VDC is deactivated.

It may be best to deactivate VDC in the fol-

lowing situations:

•When using snow chains.

•In deep snow.

•On sand or gravel.

NOTE

Activate VDC as soon as the situations de-

scribed above no longer apply. VDC will oth-

erwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if

the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to

spin.

You can activate/deactivate VDC using the

vehicle information display. To activate/

deactivate VDC:

1. Start the engine

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [DriveAssist]

menu in the vehicle information display.

3. Press the or button to select

VDC.

4. Press the <OK> button on the steering

wheel. The current selection is displayed.

5. To activate/deactivate: press the <OK>

button again.

VDC is deactivated if the warning

light in the combination meter lights up

continuously when the engine is running.

Characteristics when VDC is deactivated:

If VDC is deactivated and one or more wheels

start to spin, the VDC warning light

flashes in the combination meter. In such

situations, VDC will not stabilize the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-95

If you deactivate VDC:

•VDC no longer intervenes in understeer or

oversteer situations.

•Engine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

The spinning of the wheels results in a

cutting action, so the tires cut through the

loose surface until the hit solid ground,

giving better traction.

•Traction control is still activated.

•VDC still provides support when you

brake.

EBD (ELECTRONIC BRAKE

FORCE DISTRIBUTION)

EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-

sure on the rear wheels to help improve han-

dling during braking.

WARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the EBD [Inop-

erative See Operator's Manual] warning is

displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play. The VDC warning light may also

light up.

If EBD is malfunctioning as a result of a

VDC malfunction, the rear wheels can lock,

e.g. under full braking. This increases the

risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving

style to the different handling characteris-

tics. Have the brake system checked. It is

recommended you see an INFINITI retailer.

STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting

a noticeable steering force to the steering

wheel in the direction required for vehicle

stabilisation.

This steering support is provided in particular

if:

•Both right wheels or both left wheels are

on a wet or slippery road surface when

you brake.

•The vehicle starts to skid.

WARNING

No steering support is provided from

STEER CONTROL, if:

•VDC is malfunctioning.

•The steering is faulty.

Power steering will, however, continue to

function.

WARNING

•Never rely solely on the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) system to prevent the vehicle

from moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. Depress

the brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Be especially

careful when stopped on a hill on frozen

or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

•The Hill Start Assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to

roll backwards and may result in a colli-

sion or serious personal injury.

•The Hill Start Assist system may not

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards on a hill under all load or road

conditions. Always be prepared to de-

press the brake pedal to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backwards. Failure to

do so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

•After a short time, hill start assist will no

longer brake your vehicle and it could

HILL START ASSIST (HSA)

5-96 Starting and driving

roll away There is a risk of an accident

and injury. Therefore, quickly move your

foot from the brake pedal to the accel-

erator pedal. Never leave the vehicle

when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away

forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It

holds the vehicle for a short time after you

have removed your foot from the brake

pedal. This gives you enough time to move

your foot from the brake pedal to the accel-

erator pedal and depress it before the vehicle

begins to roll.

Hill start assist is not active if

•You are pulling away on a level road or a

downhill gradient.

•On vehicles with automatic transmission,

the transmission is in position N.

•The electric parking brake is applied.

•VDC is malfunctioning.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock be-

comes frozen, heat the key before inserting it

into the key hole, or use the INFINITI Intelli-

gent Key.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper winter

protection. For additional information, see

"Engine cooling system" in the "8. Do-it-

yourself" section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during ex-

tremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery

should be checked regularly. For details, see

"Battery" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section of

this manual.

DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including

the engine block. Refill before operating the

vehicle. For details, see "Changing engine

coolant" in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section of

this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance of

these tires will be substantially reduced in

snowy and icy conditions. If you operate

your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,

INFINITI recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four

wheels. It is recommended that you visit

an INFINITI retailer for the tire type, size,

speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some

U.S. states and Canadian provinces pro-

hibit their use. Check local, state and pro-

vincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make

sure they are the proper size for the tires

on your vehicle and are installed according

to the chain manufacturer’s instructions.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chains

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. In addition,

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-97

drive at a reduced speed, otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be ad-

versely affected.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during the winter:

•A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows.

•A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

•A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

•Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield

washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

•Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

•Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even more

traction.

•Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

•Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

•Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise clear

road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is

seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try

not to brake while on the ice, and avoid

any sudden steering maneuvers.

•Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

•Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas

under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of

the exhaust pipe and from around your

vehicle.

5-98 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch .............6-2

Flat tire ............................6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....6-2

Stopping vehicle.....................6-3

Warning triangle (if equipped) ............6-4

Run-flat tires.......................6-4

Removing and fitting wheels .............6-5

Jump starting .......................6-10

Push starting ........................6-12

If your vehicle overheats.................6-13

Towing your vehicle ...................6-14

Towing recommended by INFINITI ........6-14

The hazard warning flasher switch 䊊

1oper-

ates regardless of the ignition switch position

except when the battery is discharged.

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to stop or park

under emergency conditions.

When the hazard warning flasher switch is

pushed, all turn signal lights will flash. To turn

off the hazard warning flasher, push the haz-

ard warning switch again.

WARNING

•If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

•Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless un-

usual circumstances force you to drive

so slowly that your vehicle might be-

come a hazard to other traffic.

•Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

in this section.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

WARNING

•If the low tire pressure warning light il-

luminates or a tire pressure-related

warning is displayed by the vehicle in-

formation display while driving, avoid

sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with

under-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the likeli-

hood of tire failure. Serious vehicle dam-

age could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious personal

injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire and loading informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a replacement tire as

soon as possible.

•When a replacement tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

NIC2621

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately 1

minute. The light will remain on after 1

minute. It is recommended you Contact

an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system re-

setting.

•Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

•If you used Emergency Tire Sealant to

repair a minor tire puncture, the TPMS

sensor should be checked when repair-

ing or replacing the tire. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

monitors tire pressure of all tires. When the

low tire pressure warning light is lit, and a tire

pressure-related warning (if equipped) ap-

pears in the vehicle information display, one

or more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low

tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and

warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn-

ing light (in the meter panel). This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

For more details about the TPMS, see "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the

"5. Starting and driving" section.

STOPPING VEHICLE

WARNING

•Be sure to apply the parking brake

firmly.

•Be sure that P (Park) is engaged.

•Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery area. This is

hazardous.

•Never change tires when the oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle. Call for

professional road assistance.

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights.

3. Park on a level surface.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Press the P (Park) button.

6. Turn off the engine.

7. Open the hood and set up the triangle

reflector (if equipped):

•To warn other traffic.

•To signal professional road assistance

personnel that you need assistance.

8. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from

other traffic and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING TRIANGLE (IF

EQUIPPED)

Removing and refitting the warning

triangle

To remove:

1. Open the lift gate and lift the luggage

compartment floor upwards.

2. To release warning triangle, push back the

retainers on the bracket.

3. Remove warning triangle 䊊

1from the

bracket.

To refit:

1. Place warning triangle 䊊

1back into the

bracket and push down to secure.

2. Fold down the luggage compartment

floor.

3. Close the lift gate.

Setting up the warning triangle

1. Fold legs out to the side.

2. Fold side reflectors upwards to form a

triangle and lock them at the top using

press stud.

RUN-FLAT TIRES

With special run-flat tires, you can continue

to drive your vehicle even if there is a total

loss of pressure in one or more tires. The

affected tire must not show any clearly visible

damage.

You can recognize run-flat tires by the mark-

ing which appears on the tire side wall. You

will find this marking next to the tire size

designation, the load-bearing capacity and

the speed index.

Run-flat tires may only be used in conjunction

with an activated tire pressure loss warning

system or tire pressure monitor.

Pressure loss warning message

If a pressure loss warning message appears

in the vehicle information display:

•Observe the instructions in the display

messages.

•Check the tire for damage.

•If driving on, observe the following notes.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode

is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the

vehicle is partially laden and approximately

20 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully

laden.

NIC2686

6-4 In case of emergency

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving

distance possible depends upon:

•Vehicle speed.

•Road condition.

•Outside temperature.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode

may be reduced by extreme driving

conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased

through a moderate style of driving.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode

is counted from the moment the tire pressure

loss warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50

MPH (80 km/h).

When replacing one or all tires, observe the

following specifications for your vehicle's

tires:

•Size

•Type

•Run-flat mark

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced

with a run flat tire, a standard tire may be

used as a temporary measure. Make sure that

you use the proper size and type (summer or

winter tire).

WARNING

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.

Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneu-

vers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, pot

holes, off road). This applies in particular to

a laden vehicle.

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

•You hear banging noises.

•The vehicle starts to shake.

•You see smoke and smell rubber.

•VDC is intervening constantly.

•There are tears in the sidewalls of the

tire.

After driving in emergency mode, have the

wheel rims checked with regard to their

further use. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service. The faulty

tire must be replaced.

REMOVING AND FITTING

WHEELS

NOTE

A spare wheel is not provided with your ve-

hicle.

Blocking the wheels

WARNING

Make sure to block the appropriate wheel

to prevent the vehicle from moving, which

may cause personal injury.

Place suitable blocks 䊊

1in front of and be-

hind the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

tire 䊊

Ato prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is on the jack.

MCE0001DZ

In case of emergency 6-5

Removing the wheel

WARNING

•The jack must be placed on firm level

ground. Failure to observe this instruc-

tion could result in vehicle damage, or

serious injury or death.

•Make sure to read the caution label at-

tached to the jack body before use.

•DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT

IS SUPPORTED BY A JACK.

•Never use a jack which was not designed

for your vehicle.

•Use the correct jacking points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

•Never lift the vehicle more than neces-

sary.

•Never use blocks on or under the jack.

•Do not start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on the jack. The vehicle may

move suddenly, and this may cause an

accident.

•Never allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while the tire is off the ground.

•Remove all loads before lifting the ve-

hicle with the jack.

NOTE

A jack and rod are not provided as standard

equipment with your vehicle. These parts are

dealer options. It is recommended that you

contact an INFINITI retailer for more infor-

mation about obtaining these parts.

1. Vehicles without intelligent key: Remove

the key from the ignition lock.

Vehicles with a push button ignition

switch: remove the start/stop button

from the ignition lock (see " Push-button

ignition switch (if equipped)" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section).

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so that the top of the

jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up

point.

The jack must be placed on firm level

ground.

NCE453 NCE447

Jack-up points

6-6 In case of emergency

3. Align the center of both the jack head 䊊

and the notches at the jack-up point 䊊

3as

shown.

4. Fit the groove of the jack head between

the two notches as shown.

5. Loosen each wheel bolt by one or two

turns counterclockwise with the wheel

wrench.

Do not remove the wheel bolts until the

tire is off the ground.

Models with wheel lock bolts (if equipped) :

If the wheel is equipped with a wheel lock

bolt, insert the wheel lock key 䊊

1and

loosen it as previously described.

The wheel lock bolt can only be removed

with the wheel lock key. A key number is

necessary if you need to duplicate the

wheel lock key.

Record the key number as shown on the

key code card on the “Security informa-

tion” page at the end of this manual and

keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle. If

you lose the wheel lock key, it is recom-

mended you see your INFINITI retailer for

a duplicate with the original wheel lock

key code.

Make sure to keep the lock key in the

vehicle. Otherwise, wheels cannot be re-

moved and the service cannot be per-

formed.

NCE449 NCE143Z

In case of emergency 6-7

6. To lift the vehicle, securely hold and turn

the ratchet handle 䊊

1clockwise as shown.

7. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground.

8. Remove the wheel bolts, then remove the

wheel with the flat tire.

WARNING

The wheel is heavy. Be sure that your feet

are clear of the wheel and use gloves as

necessary to avoid injury.

Installing the wheel

WARNING

•A temporary use spare wheel and tire is

designed for emergency use.

•Never use wheel bolts other than those

provided with your vehicle. Incorrect

wheel bolts or improperly tightened

wheel bolts may cause the wheel to be-

come loose or come off. This could cause

an accident.

•Never use oil or grease on the wheel

bolts. This may cause the wheel bolts to

become loose.

䊊

ATighten

䊊

BLoosen

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and the hub.

2. Carefully fit the wheel and tighten the

wheel bolts with your fingers. Check that

all the wheel bolts contact the wheel sur-

face horizontally and on the bevelled side.

Models with wheel lock bolt (if equipped):

Insert the wheel lock key into the wheel

lock bolt and tighten into the wheel finger

tight.

3. With the wheel wrench, tighten the wheel

bolts alternately and evenly in the se-

quence as illustrated ( 䊊

1-䊊

5) until they

are tight.

NCE449 NCE435

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground.

5. Tighten the wheel bolts securely using the

wheel wrench in the sequence as illus-

trated.

6. Lower the vehicle completely.

7. Install the wheel cover (if equipped).

Wheel bolt tightening torque:

96 ft-lb (130 N•m, 13 kg-m)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel bolts

to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

The wheel bolts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recommended

that the wheel bolts be tightened to specifi-

cation at each maintenance interval.

Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure is the tire pressure as mea-

sured after the vehicle has been parked for

three hours or more or driven for less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

and loading information label affixed to the

driver's side center pillar.

Wheel lock bolts (if equipped)

In order to prevent theft, the specially de-

signed wheel lock bolt is installed to each

wheel. The wheel lock bolt cannot be re-

moved with the commonly used tools.

When removing tires, use the lock key pro-

vided with your vehicle.

Removing the wheel lock bolt:

1. Insert the wheel lock key 䊊

1to the wheel

lock bolt.

2. To remove the wheel lock bolt, turn the

wheel lock key counterclockwise using the

wheel wrench.

CAUTION

•Do not use a power tool to remove the

wheel lock bolts.

•When installing the wheel, tighten the

wheel lock bolts to the same tightening

torque as the normal wheel bolts. For

details, see "Installing the wheel" earlier

in this section.

NCE143Z

In case of emergency 6-9

NOTE

•The wheel lock bolt has an individual code.

A wheel lock key with other than the indi-

vidual code cannot remove the wheel lock

bolt. If you lose the wheel lock key, it is

recommended you contact an INFINITI re-

tailer for a duplicate with the original

wheel lock key code.

•Record the key number and keep it in a

safe place, not in the vehicle.

•When you ask for a service at an INFINITI

retailer, make sure to keep the lock key in

the vehicle. Otherwise, wheels cannot be

removed and the service cannot be per-

formed.

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the

jump-starting connection point, consisting of

a positive terminal and an earth point, in the

engine compartment.

WARNING

•If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also dam-

age your vehicle.

•Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the bat-

tery.

•Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothes or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid which can cause se-

vere burns. If the fluid should come into

contact with anything, immediately

flush the contacted area with water.

•Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

•The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated bat-

tery can damage your vehicle.

•Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

•Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause seri-

ous injury.

•Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any time.

Keep hands and other objects away

from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their

batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Check if the parking brake is applied.

If not, after connecting the vehicle with

the booster battery (after step 8), apply

the parking brake.

The vehicle has an electric parking brake,

for more information see, "Parking brake"

in the "3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments" section

3. Press the P (Park) button.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-

tems (headlights, hazard lights etc,).

5. Ensure that the ignition switch of the ve-

hicle being jump-started is in the OFF po-

sition.

6. Open the hood. For details, see "Hood" in

the "3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments" section.

7. Remove the vent caps (if equipped) on the

battery and cover the battery with an old

cloth.

8. Connect the jump leads in the sequence (

䊊

1→䊊

2→䊊

3→䊊

4) as illustrated.

NDI1595

In case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION

•Always connect positive 䊊

+to positive

䊊

+and negative 䊊

-to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift

bracket, etc.) – not to the battery's

negative 䊊

•Be sure that the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

9. Start the engine of the other vehicle 䊊

and let it run for a few minutes. Keep the

engine speed at about 2,000 rpm.

10. Start the engine of your vehicle 䊊

Bin the

normal way.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and wait 10 sec-

onds before trying again.

11. After starting the engine of your vehicle,

carefully disconnect the negative lead

and then the positive lead ( 䊊

4→䊊

3→䊊

→䊊

1).

12. Remove and dispose of the cloth that

was used to cover the ventilator holes as

it may be contaminated with corrosive

acid.

13. Install the ventilator caps (if equipped).

14. Close the hood.

NOTE

For models which incorporate the Idle Stop/

Start System:

•Ensure that the battery fitted is the special

battery that is enhanced with regard to the

charge-discharge capacity and life perfor-

mance. Avoid using any other battery for

the Idle Stop/Start System, as this may

cause early deterioration of the battery or

a malfunction of the Idle Stop/Start Sys-

tem. It is recommended that a Genuine

INFINITI battery is fitted. For more infor-

mation, it is recommended you contact an

INFINITI retailer.

•If the battery terminal is disconnected (for

battery replacement, etc.) and then recon-

nected, there may be some delay before

the Idle top/Start System reactivates.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing

the vehicle.

CAUTION

•Automatic Transmission (AT) model

cannot be push-started or tow-started.

Attempting to do so may cause damage

to the transmission.

•Three-way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing. At-

tempting to do so may cause damage to

the three-way catalyst.

•Never try to start the vehicle by towing

it; when the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

PUSH STARTING

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING

•Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

•To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is hot.

When the radiator or coolant reservoir

cap is removed, pressurized hot water

will spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

•Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

If the engine of your vehicle is overheating

(indicated by the engine coolant temperature

gauge) or if you feel a lack of engine power,

detect unusual noise, etc., proceed as fol-

lows:

1. Move and park the vehicle safely off the

road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flasher lights.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Press the P (Park) button.

DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE.

5. Open all windows.

6. Switch off the air conditioner system (if

equipped).

7. Set the heater or air conditioner tempera-

ture control to maximum “HOT” and fan

speed control to maximum speed.

8. Exit the vehicle.

9. Visually inspect and listen for steam or

coolant escaping from the radiator before

opening the hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

10. Open the hood. For details, see "Hood"

in the "3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments" section.

11. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-

ning.

12. Visually check the radiator and radiator

hoses for leakage.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

13. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant reser-

voir with the engine running. Do not

open the radiator cap (if equipped).

14. If the level is low, remove the engine

coolant reservoir cap and add coolant

slowly into the reservoir. After refilling

the reservoir to the MAX level, install the

reservoir cap.

15. Close the hood.

Have your vehicle inspected or repaired. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-13

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictions

and local regulations for towing must be fol-

lowed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from an INFINITI retailer. Local ser-

vice operators are generally familiar with the

applicable laws and procedures for towing.

To assure proper towing and to prevent ac-

cidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI

recommends having a service operator tow

your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service

operator carefully read the following precau-

tions.

WARNING

•Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

•Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

•When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

•Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

INFINITI

INFINITI recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. Please re-

fer to the diagrams in this section to ensure

that your vehicle is properly towed.

NCE451

FWD (2WD) models

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-14 In case of emergency

Two-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

CAUTION

NEVER tow automatic transmission (DCT)

models with the front wheels on the

ground or with all four wheels on the

ground (forwards or backwards), as this

may cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow

the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, al-

ways use towing dollies under the front

wheels.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be

used under the front or rear wheels when

towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed

on a flatbed tow truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the

wheels on the ground. Doing so will cause

serious and expensive damage to the

drivetrain.

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal

injury or death when recovering a stuck ve-

hicle:

•Contact a professional towing service to

recover the vehicle if you have any ques-

tions regarding the recovery procedure.

•Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to main structural members of the

vehicle.

•Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

•Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

•Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

•Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

•On vehicles with a push button ignition

switch: you must remove the start/stop

NCE450

4WD models

In case of emergency 6-15

button and use the key (see " Push-

button ignition switch (if equipped)" in

the "5. Starting and driving" section).

Otherwise the automatic transmission

may shift to position P (Park) when the

driver's or front passenger door are

opened, which could lead to damage to

the transmission.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device designed

specifically for vehicle recovery. Always fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions for the

recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

•To avoid potential injury, stand clear of

a stuck vehicle.

•Do not spin your tires at high speed. This

could cause them to explode and result

in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle

could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

•Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive).

•Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

•Release the accelerator pedal before shift-

ing between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

•Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing ser-

vice to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ......................7-2

Washing..........................7-2

Waxing ..........................7-2

Removing spots .....................7-3

Underbody ........................7-3

Glass ............................7-3

Wheels...........................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ................7-3

Chrome parts ......................7-3

Tire dressings ......................7-3

Cleaning interior.......................7-4

Air fresheners ......................7-4

Floor mats (if equipped) ................7-5

Seat belts .........................7-5

Cleaning the seat tracks ................7-6

Genuine leather seat covers .............7-6

Corrosion protection ....................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion .........................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion .........................7-7

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ......7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of

it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash

your vehicle as soon as you can:

•After a rainfall, to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

•After driving on coastal roads.

•When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

•When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a

garage or in a covered area to minimize the

chances of damaging the paint surface of

your vehicle.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint

surface when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a

mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general

purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,

lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

•Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their ap-

pearance, and also could cause them not

to function properly. Always check with

your car wash to confirm that acid is not

used.

•Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

•Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the paint surface may become water-

spotted.

•Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must

be taken when removing caked-on dirt

or other foreign substances so the paint

surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable

to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these

areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care

that the drain holes in the lower edge of the

door are open. Spray water under the body

and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and

wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the ve-

hicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps maintain a new vehicle appear-

ance.

After waxing, polishing is recommended to

remove built-up residue and to avoid a

weathered appearance.

An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choos-

ing the appropriate waxing products.

•Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied

with the wax.

•Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners that

may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polish-

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may

dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, in-

sects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from

the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are avail-

able at an INFINITI retailer or any automotive

accessory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in the winter,

it is necessary to clean the vehicle’s under-

body regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt

from building up and causing the acceleration

of corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion.

Before the winter and again in the spring, the

underseal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for

glass to become coated with a film after the

vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner

and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

WHEELS

•Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

•Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside of

the vehicle is washed.

•Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-

ing the wheels.

•Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. This may cause loss of pressure

or damage the tire bead.

•INFINITI recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against road

salt in areas where it is used during winter.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, especially

during winter in areas where road salt is used.

The salt residue from road salt could discolor

the wheels if it is not washed off regularly.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid stain-

ing or discoloring the wheels:

•Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

•Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

•Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating

to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires,

it may react with the coating and form a

compound. This compound may come off the

tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

•Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

•Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to re-

move).

•Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/

grooves.

•Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the in-

terior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,

soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution,

then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order

to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that may

stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens covers.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification sen-

sor. This can also affect the operation of

the air bag system and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

CAUTION

•Never use benzine, thinner or any similar

material on the interior surfaces or sur-

face damage may occur. Such damage is

not covered under the INFINITI war-

ranty.

•Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and should

be removed promptly. Do not use saddle

soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they dam-

age the leather's natural finish.

•Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

•Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens covers.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could

affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air

freshener, take the following precautions:

•Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con-

tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air

freshener in a location that allows it to

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

hang free and not contact an interior sur-

face.

•Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the ventilators. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

•NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front posi-

tion.

•It is recommended you use only genuine

INFINITI floor mats specifically de-

signed for use in your vehicle model. For

additional information, it is recom-

mended you contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

•Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning aid.

The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular cleaning

and replaced if they become excessively

worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket

to act as a floor mat positioning aid. INFINITI

floor mats have been specially designed for

your vehicle model.

Position the mat by placing the floor mat

bracket hook through the floor mat grommet

hole while centring the mat in the foot area.

Periodically check that the mats are properly

positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solu-

tion.

SAI0039Z

Example

Appearance and care 7-5

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional informa-

tion, see "Seat belts" in the "1. Safety — seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system"

section.

WARNING

•Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor.

•NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical sol-

vents to clean the seat belts, since these

materials may severely weaken the seat

belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered

vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may re-

duce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet

cleansing agent may be used if necessary.

GENUINE LEATHER SEAT

COVERS

Automotive leather is typically finished with

coatings which protect the surface from the

sun's damaging rays as well as making it re-

sistant to soiling. The finishes used in auto-

motive upholstery are unique; very different

to furniture, garment or shoe leathers.

Leather is extremely resilient and easy to

clean and maintain.

•Before cleaning leather upholstery,

vacuum it to remove dust.

•To clean leather, simply use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap. Do not soak the

leather.

•Use a gentle, circular motion. Do not run

the leather or apply extreme pressure

when cleaning.

•Wipe the leather again with another clean,

slightly damp cloth to remove soap resi-

due. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather should be cleaned whenever it be-

comes soiled. Dust and dirt may harm leather

if allowed to work into the finish.

Never use alcohol, cleaning solvents, oils,

varnishes or polishes on your leather, and

avoid using unknown products as they dam-

age the finish. Only use leather care agents

approved by INFINITI.

Steaming or ironing is not recommended as it

may damage the leather.

Leather is a natural product and has natural

surface properties such as unevenness in

structure, marks caused by injury, and subtle

color differences. These are characteristics of

leather and not material faults.

Leather cleaning kit (if equipped)

Spray onto the leather cleaning cloth, then

gently wipe the surface of leather. Use a dry

towel to absorb any excess moisture.

Please refer to the instruction manual pro-

vided with the leather cleaner kit.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently

because soiling on such surfaces is much

more visible.

You can obtain the leather cleaner kit from an

INFINITI retailer.

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

•The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavi-

ties, and other areas.

•Damage to the paint surface and other

protective coatings caused by gravel and

stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

The accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the inside floor of the vehicle can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor carpet/floor mats will

not dry completely inside the vehicle. They

should be removed and completely dried to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas

where the temperatures stay above freezing

and where atmospheric pollution exists and

road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of cor-

rosion to those parts which are not well ven-

tilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the

air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use

accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt

also accelerates the disintegration of paint

surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

•Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.

•Always check for minor damage to the

paint surface and repair it as soon as pos-

sible.

•Keep drain holes in the lower edge of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation.

•Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

•NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

•Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may dam-

age them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corro-

sion and deterioration of underbody compo-

nents such as the exhaust system, fuel and

brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fend-

ers.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .................8-2

Engine compartment check locations .........8-3

2.0L Gasoline engine .................8-3

Engine cooling system ...................8-3

Checking engine coolant level ............8-4

Changing engine coolant ...............8-4

Engine oil ...........................8-5

Checking engine oil level ...............8-5

Changing engine oil ..................8-5

Changing engine oil filter ...............8-6

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ..........8-7

Brake fluid ..........................8-7

Window washer fluid ...................8-8

Battery ............................8-9

Accessing Vehicle battery..............8-10

Maintenance free battery ..............8-10

Models with Idle Stop/Start System .......8-11

Battery replacement .................8-11

Reinitialisation procedure after battery

reconnection ......................8-12

Jump-starting .....................8-12

Drive belt ..........................8-12

Spark plugs .........................8-13

Air cleaner filter ......................8-13

Wiper blades ........................8-13

Cleaning .........................8-13

Replacing front window wiper blades ......8-14

Replacing rear window wiper blade .......8-16

Brakes ............................8-17

Self-adjusting brakes .................8-17

Fuses .............................8-17

Before replacing a fuse ...............8-17

Engine compartment .................8-17

Passenger compartment ..............8-18

Intelligent Key battery replacement .........8-20

Checking the battery.................8-20

Replacing the battery ................8-20

Lights ............................8-22

Exterior and interior lights..............8-22

Replacement procedures ..............8-24

Wheels and tires......................8-27

Tire Pressure ......................8-27

Tire inflation pressure ................8-29

Tire labeling ......................8-29

Types of tires......................8-31

Tire chains .......................8-32

Tire wear and damage................8-33

Tire rotation ......................8-34

Replacing wheels and tires .............8-34

Wheel balance .....................8-35

When performing any inspection or mainte-

nance work on your vehicle, always take care

to prevent serious accidental injury to your-

self or damage to the vehicle. The following

are general precautions which should be

closely observed.

WARNING

•Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply

the parking brake securely and block the

wheels to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing. Press the P (Park) button.

•Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

position when performing any parts re-

placement or repairs.

•Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Always turn off the engine

and wait until it cools down.

•If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and

tools away from moving fans, belts and

any other moving parts.

•It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and any jewelry, such as

rings, watches, etc. before working on

your vehicle.

•If you must run the engine in an enclosed

space such as a garage, be sure there is

proper ventilation for exhaust gases to

escape.

•Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported by a jack.

•Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel and the battery.

•Never connect or disconnect either the

battery or any transistorized compo-

nent connector while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

•On gasoline engine models with the

Multiport Fuel Injection system, the fuel

filter and fuel lines should be serviced by

an INFINITI retailer or qualified work-

shop because the fuel lines are under

high pressure even when the engine is

turned off.

•Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if the

ignition switch is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the negative

battery cable before working near the

fan.

•Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

•Never leave the engine or the transmis-

sion related component harness connec-

tor disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

•Avoid direct contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant, and/or other vehicle

fluids can hurt the environment. Always

conform to local regulations for disposal

of vehicle fluids.

This “ 8. Do-it-yourself” section provides in-

structions regarding only those items which

are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-

proper servicing may result in operating diffi-

culties or excessive emissions, and could af-

fect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended you

have it done by an INFINITI retailer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-3)

2. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-5)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-5)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-7)

5. Engine air cleaner filter (P.8-13)

6. Battery (P.8-9)

7. Fuse box (P.8-17)

8. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-8)

WARNING

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a high-quality, year-round,

antifreeze coolant solution. The antifreeze

solution contains rust and corrosion inhibi-

tors, therefore additional cooling system

additives are not necessary.

•Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused by

high-pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator. For additional information on

precautions, refer to "If your vehicle

overheats" in the "6. In case of emer-

gency" section

•The engine coolant reservoir tank is

equipped with a pressure type cap. To

prevent engine damage, use only a

genuine INFINITI pressure cap.

CAUTION

•Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

NIC2833

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-3

•When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only INFINITI Genuine En-

gine Coolant, BASF Glysantin G40 or

equivalent in its quality. The use of other

types of engine coolant may damage the

engine cooling system.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

NOTE

The coolant level must only be checked and

corrected when the engine is cold.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level if the vehicle

is on a level surface and the engine is cold.

2. Slowly turn cap 䊊

1half a turn counter-

clockwise to allow excess pressure to es-

cape.

3. Turn cap 䊊

1further counter-clockwise

and remove it.

If the coolant is at the level of marker bar

䊊

3in the filler neck when cold, there is

enough coolant in coolant expansion tank

䊊

4. If necessary, top up with INFINITI Genu-

ine Engine Coolant, BASF Glysantin G40

or equivalent in its quality.

5. Replace cap 䊊

1and turn it clockwise as

far as it will go.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

An INFINITI retailer can change the engine

coolant.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

•To avoid being scalded, never change

the coolant when the engine is hot.

•Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

•Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

•Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

NDI1602

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches the normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan.

4. Remove the dipstick 䊊

1and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick and check the oil

level. It should be within the range 䊊

2and

䊊

If the oil level is below 䊊

3, remove the oil

filler cap and pour the recommended oil

into the opening. Do not overfill䊊

It is normal to add some oil between oil main-

tenance intervals or during the break-in pe-

riod, depending on the severity of operating

conditions.

CAUTION

The oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by the

warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

WARNING

•Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

•Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

and plenty of water as soon as possible.

•Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

NDI1596

2.0L gasoline engine

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-5

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches the normal operating tempera-

ture, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Remove the engine undershield.

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug.

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and com-

pletely drain the oil. If the oil filter is to be

changed, remove and replace it at this

time. For additional information, refer to

"Changing engine oil filter" later in this

section.

•Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

•Check your local regulations.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive

force.

Drain plug tightening torque: 22 ft-lb, 30

N•m

8. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then install

the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain and

refill capacity, refer to "Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "9.

Maintenance and Schedules" section.

The drain and refill capacity depends on

the oil temperature and drain time. Use

these specifications for reference only.

Always use the dipstick to determine

when the proper amount of oil is in the

engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct

as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter

䊊

4. Loosen the oil filter 䊊

1with an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Then remove the oil filter by turning it by

hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

NDI1622 NDI1610

2.0L gasoline engine

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

•Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

an oil leak and engine damage.

•The dipstick must be inserted in place to

prevent oil spillage from the dipstick

hole when filling the engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

Engine oil filter tightening torque: 19 ft-lb,

25 N•m

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer if checking or replacement is required.

CAUTION

•Use only Shell DCT-M1 or equivalent.

Do not mix with other fluids.

•Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Shell DCT-M1 may cause de-

terioration in driveability and automatic

transmission durability, and may dam-

age the automatic transmission. Dam-

age caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered by

the warranty.

WARNING

•Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or con-

taminated fluid may damage the brake

systems. The use of improper fluids can

damage the brake system and affect the

vehicle's stopping ability.

•Clean the filler cap before removing.

•Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

•Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.

This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, wash with water.

NDI1599

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(ATF) BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-7

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

2, the brake

warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid

up to the MAX line 䊊

1. Use Genuine INFINITI

brake fluid DOT4+ or equivalent. Never mix

different types of fluids. For additional infor-

mation on the recommended type of brake

fluid, refer "Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities" in the "9. Maintenance and

Schedules" section.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,

the brake system should be thoroughly

checked. It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir pe-

riodically. Add fluid when the low washer

fluid warning appears on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bet-

ter cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture

ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine INFINITI

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

•Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

•Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

•Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

NDI1601

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-8 Do-it-yourself

•Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

•Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

•If the vehicle is not used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the 䊊

-negative battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

•Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone

chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc).

•Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

•Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause

blindness or injury. After touching a bat-

tery or battery cap, do not touch or rub

your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands.

If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with water

for at least 15 minutes and seek medical

attention.

•Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery which

can generate heat, reduce battery life,

and in some cases lead to an explosion.

•When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

•Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

•Keep battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

•Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-9

ACCESSING VEHICLE BATTERY

The vehicle battery is stored under a cover.

To remove the cover to gain access to the

battery:

1. Disconnect the hood release cable 䊊

1and

any other cables from the battery cover.

2. Hold the battery top cover firmly and slide

it towards the front of the car 䊊

2and

upwards 䊊

3. Lift the cover up and away from the bat-

tery.

NOTE

When installing the battery cover, remem-

ber to replace cables in their original posi-

tion.

MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY

For a maintenance free battery it is not re-

quired to check the fluid level. However,

INFINITI recommends to visually check the

status of the green indicator 䊊

A(if so

equipped) periodically. If it is not visible, re-

place the battery as soon as possible.

NDI1590

NDI920Z

8-10 Do-it-yourself

MODELS WITH IDLE

STOP/START SYSTEM

•Ensure that the battery fitted is the special

battery that is enhanced with regard to the

charge-discharge capacity and life perfor-

mance. Avoid using any other battery for

the Idle Stop/Start System, as this may

cause early deterioration of the battery or

a malfunction of the Idle Stop/Start Sys-

tem. It is recommended that a Genuine

INFINITI battery is fitted. For more infor-

mation, it is recommended that you con-

tact an INFINITI retailer.

•If the battery terminal is disconnected (for

battery replacement, etc.) and then recon-

nected, there may be some delay before

the Stop/Start System reactivates.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

It is recommended that a Genuine INFINITI

battery is fitted. It is recommended that you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Protective plate for battery

WARNING

Whenever the battery is replaced, always

have the protective plate underneath the

battery also reinstalled or replaced. If this

plate is not reinstalled/replaced, in the

event of a collision a thermal incident could

occur, causing vehicle damage and poten-

tially causing serious injury of death.

If the vehicle battery is replaced, the protec-

tive plate underneath the battery must also

be replaced. This protective plate must be

fixed to the underside of the replacement

battery using the adhesive tape supplied with

the replacement plate. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer to purchase

and replace the protective plate underneath

the battery. 1. Make sure the underside of the replace-

ment battery is dry and free of dust.

2. Remove the backing strips 䊊

1from the

adhesive strips.

3. Fix the protective plate to the underside

of the battery without any overlap 䊊

NDI1634

Do-it-yourself 8-11

4. Fit the replacement battery in the vehicle.

REINITIALISATION PROCEDURE

AFTER BATTERY

RECONNECTION

If the battery has been reconnected, check

the following items:

•Clock setting (if so equipped). For details,

see "Clock" in the "2. Instruments and con-

trols" section, or the separately provided

navigation system Owner's Manual, or the

audio device descriptions in " Audio system

(if equipped)" in the "4. Display screen,

heater and air conditioner, and audio sys-

tem" section.

•Reset the desired radio stations to the pre-

set station buttons. For details, see the

audio device descriptions in the “4. Heater

and air conditioner, and audio system”.

JUMP-STARTING

If jump-starting is necessary, see "Jump

starting" in the "6. In case of emergency" sec-

tion. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

position before servicing drive belt. The en-

gine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or loose, have

it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for con-

dition and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule as shown in a

separately provided Warranty Informa-

tion and Maintenance booklet.

NDI1635

DRIVE BELT

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Replace the spark plugs according to the

maintenance schedule shown in a separate

maintenance booklet.

If replacement is required, it is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

•Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can cause damage to the spark

plugs.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer if checking or replacement is required.

WARNING

•Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or others

to be burned. The air cleaner filter not

only cleans the intake air, it also stops

the flame if the engine backfires. If the

air cleaner is not installed and the engine

backfires, you could be burned. Never

drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be

cautious working on the engine when

the air cleaner is off.

•Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

CLEANING

If the windshield or rear window is not clear

after using the window washer or if a wiper

blade chatters when running, wax or other

material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield or rear

window with a washer solution or a mild

detergent. The windshield or rear window is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with

clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If

the windshield or rear window is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the wiper,

replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage

the windshield and impair driver vision.

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER FILTER WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-13

REPLACING FRONT WINDOW

WIPER BLADES

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To

replace the windshield wiper blades, follow

the procedure below:

1. Move the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Press both release clips 䊊

3. Move the wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction

of arrow 䊊

3away from wiper arm 䊊

4. Remove wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction of

arrow 䊊

5. Position new wiper blade 䊊

1with recess

䊊

6on lug 䊊

6. Move wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction of

arrow 䊊

3onto the wiper arm until retain-

ing clips 䊊

2engage in bracket 䊊

NDI1586 NDI1587

8-14 Do-it-yourself

7. Make sure that wiper blade 䊊

1is seated

correctly.

8. Move the wiper arm back onto the wind-

shield.

CAUTION

•After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

•Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the engine hood, be

careful not to let wax get into the washer

nozzle 䊊

A. This may cause clogging or im-

proper windshield washer operation. If wax

gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle

or small pin 䊊

NDI892Z

Do-it-yourself 8-15

REPLACING REAR WINDOW

WIPER BLADE

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To

replace the rear window wiper blade, follow

the procedure below:

1. Move wiper arm 䊊

4away from the rear

window.

2. Press both release clips 䊊

3. Move wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction of

arrow 䊊

3away from wiper arm 䊊

4. Remove wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction of

arrow 䊊

5. Position new wiper blade 䊊

1with recess

䊊

6on lug 䊊

6. Move wiper blade 䊊

1in the direction of

arrow 䊊

3onto the wiper arm until retain-

ing clips 䊊

2engage in bracket 䊊

7. Make sure that wiper blade 䊊

1is seated

correctly.

8. Move the wiper arm back onto the rear

window.

NDI1588 NDI1589

8-16 Do-it-yourself

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is

recommended that you have the brakes

checked. It is recommended that you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust ev-

ery time the brake pedal is applied.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of

the same rating, which you can recognize by

the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are

listed in the fuse allocation chart.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have

the cause traced and rectified. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty

circuits. if a fuse blows, all the components on

the circuit and their functions will fail.

BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE

•Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

•Switch off all electrical consumers.

•Remove the key from the ignition lock.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

•Fuse box in the engine compartment on

the left-hand side of the vehicle, when

viewed in the direction of travel.

•Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell.

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in

the front-passenger footwell.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electrical

system or electronic control units or cause

a fire.

BRAKES FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-17

1. Open the hood

2. Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth

3. To open: open clamps 䊊

4. Fold cover 䊊

1up in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.

To close:

1. Check whether the seal is lying correctly in

cover 䊊

2. Insert cover 䊊

1at the back into openings

䊊

3on the fuse box.

3. Fold down cover 䊊

4. Hook clamps into the fuse box and close

5. Close the hood.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electrical

system or electronic control units or cause

a fire.

NDI1591 NDI1592

8-18 Do-it-yourself

To open:

1. Open the front-passenger door.

2. Remove the floor mats.

3. Fold out perforated floor covering 䊊

1in

the direction of the arrow.

4. To release cover 䊊

3press retaining clamp

䊊

5. Fold out cover 䊊

3in the direction of the

arrow to the catch.

6. Remove cover 䊊

3forwards.

NOTE

Fuse allocation chart 䊊

4is located on the

lower right-hand side of cover 䊊

To close:

1. Insert cover 䊊

3on the left-hand side of

the fuse box into the retainer. Cover 䊊

engages in the retainers.

2. Fold down cover 䊊

3until clamps 䊊

2lock

audibly.

3. Fold back perforated floor covering 䊊

4. Fit the floor mats.

NDI1593 NDI1594

Do-it-yourself 8-19

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

CHECKING THE BATTERY

Press the (LOCK) or (UNLOCK)

button.

The battery is working properly if the battery

check light 䊊

1lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if the battery check

light 䊊

1does not light up briefly. Replace the

battery.

NOTE

•If the key battery is checked within the

signal reception range of the vehicle,

pressing the (LOCK) or (UN-

LOCK) button locks or unlocks the vehicle.

•You can obtain a battery from an INFINITI

retailer.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Take the emergency key element out of

the key (see "Mechanical key" in the "3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments" sec-

tion)

2. Press emergency key element 䊊

2into the

opening into the key in the direction of the

arrow until the battery cover 䊊

1opens.

When doing so, do not hold cover 䊊

1shut.

3. Remove battery tray cover 䊊

NPA1474 NPA1472

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

8-20 Do-it-yourself

4. Repeatedly tap the key against your palm

until battery 䊊

1falls out.

5. Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free

cloth to do so.

6. Make sure that the surface of the battery

is free of lint, grease and other contami-

nation.

7. Insert the front tabs of battery cover 䊊

and then press to close it.

8. Insert emergency key element into the key

(see "Mechanical key" in the "3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments" section).

9. Check the function of all key buttons on

the vehicle.

If you need assistance with replacement, it is

recommended that you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this de-

vice must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

NPA1473 SPA0784Z

Do-it-yourself 8-21

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W)

Front combination light

Headlight (Low or high beam: H9 type) 14 / 28

Headlight (Low or high beam: LED type, if so equipped) *1 LED

Front turn signal light (with halogen headlights) 24

Front turn signal light (LED type, if so equipped)*1 LED

Front side light *1 LED

Daytime driving light *1 LED

Front fog light *1 LED

Side turn signal light *1 LED

Puddle light *1 LED

Rear combination light

Turn signal light*1 LED

Stop/Tail light *1 LED

Reversing light *1 LED

Brake light *1 LED

High-mounted brake light *1 LED

License plate light*1 LED

Room light/Map lights (if so equipped)

Foot well light (if so equipped)

Reading light (rear)

Room light — rear (if so equipped)

Reading lights — rear (if so equipped) 8

Luggage compartment light 5

*1: It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for replacement.

It is recommended you check with the Parts

Department at an INFINITI retailer for the

latest parts information.

LIGHTS

8-22 Do-it-yourself

䊊

1Side turn signal light

䊊

2Room light / Map lights (if so equipped)

䊊

3Daytime driving light and sidelights and

turn signal (if so equipped)

䊊

4Low/High beam headlight

䊊

5High beam headlight or turn signal

䊊

6Cornering light (if so equipped)

䊊

7Front fog light (if so equipped)

䊊

8Daytime driving light and sidelights

䊊

9Footwell light (if so equipped)

䊊

10 Room light (if so equipped)

䊊

11 High mounted stop light

䊊

12 License plate light

䊊

13 Rear Fog and Reversing light

䊊

14 Brake light

䊊

15 Turn signal light

䊊

16 Tail light

Front light unit

Halogen type:

䊊

1Turn signal light

䊊

2Daytime driving light and sidelight

䊊

3High/Low beam halogen projector

headlights

䊊

4Side marker light (if so equipped)

䊊

5Reflector (if so equipped)

䊊

6Daytime driving light and sidelights

NDI1625

NDI1613

Do-it-yourself 8-23

LED type:

䊊

1Cornering light

䊊

2Additional high-beam headlight

䊊

3Daytime driving light and sidelight and

turn signal light

䊊

4High/Low beam LED projector head-

lights and Adaptive Front Lighting sys-

tem (if so equipped)

䊊

5Side marker light (if so equipped)

䊊

6Reflector (if so equipped)

䊊

7Daytime driving light and sidelights

Rear light unit

䊊

1Tail light

䊊

2Turn signal light

䊊

3Brake light

䊊

4Tail light

䊊

5Reversing light

䊊

6Rear fog light (drivers side only)

REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

LED lights (if so equipped)

The LED headlight is a projector style which

uses a LED module without serviceable parts.

If LED fog headlight , or any other LED light

replacement is required, it is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

NDI1614 NDI1615

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Halogen headlight bulb

Fitting/removing the access cover on the

front wheel arch:

You must remove the cover of the front

wheel arch before you can change the halo-

gen headlight bulb.

To remove: switch off the lights, turn the

steering so that the wheel behind the light in

question is pointing inwards . Slide cover 䊊

up and remove it.

To fit: inset cover 䊊

1again and slide it down

until it engages.

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen)

bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the

engine compartment without removing the

headlight assembly.

If you need assistance for bulb replacement,

it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer.

Low/High beam Headlight bulb replace-

ment:

1. Open the hood. For details, see "Hood" in

the "3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments" section.

2. Disconnect the negative (—) battery cable.

3. Remove the corresponding access cover

from the wheel arch.

4. Turn housing cover 䊊

1counterclockwise

and remove it.

5. Turn bulb holder 䊊

2counterclockwise and

pull out

6. Take the headlight bulb out of bulb holder

䊊

7. Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 䊊

8. Insert bulb holder 䊊

2and turn it clockwise.

NDI1626 NDI1611

Do-it-yourself 8-25

9. Press on housing cover 䊊

1and turn it to

the right.

10. Replace the cover in the front wheel arch

11. Reconnect the negative (—) battery cable

and close the hood.

NOTE

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of

the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash.

The fog is caused by a temperature differ-

ence between the inside and the outside of

the lens. This is not a malfunction. If large

droplets can be seen, it is recommended that

you visit an INFINITI retailer.

Front turn signal light bulb

replacement (non-LED system only)

1. Open the hood. For details, see "Hood" in

the "3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments" section.

2. Disconnect the negative (—) battery cable.

3. Turn housing cover 䊊

1counterclockwise

and remove it.

4. Turn bulb holder 䊊

2counterclockwise and

pull out

5. Take the headlight bulb out of bulb holder

䊊

6. Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 䊊

7. Insert bulb holder 䊊

2and turn it clockwise.

8. Press on housing cover 䊊

1and turn it to

the right.

9. Reconnect the negative (—) battery cable

and close the hood.

NDI1612

8-26 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat tire" in the

"6. In case of emergency" section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

monitors tire pressure of all tires. When the

low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of the tires is significantly under-

inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

For additional information, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the

"5. Starting and driving" section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare)

often and always prior to long distance trips.

The recommended tire pressure specifica-

tions are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire and Loading In-

formation label (if so equipped) under the

Cold Tire Pressure heading. The Tire and

Loading Information label is affixed to the

driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should

be checked regularly because:

•Most tires naturally lose air over time.

•Tires can lose air suddenly when driven

over potholes or other objects or if the

vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when

the tires are cold. The tires are considered

COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3

or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds.

WARNING

•Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-

denly and cause an accident.

•The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S. S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The ve-

hicle weight capacity is indicated on the

Tire and Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not load your vehicle be-

yond this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced tire life,

unsafe operating conditions due to pre-

mature tire failure, or unfavorable han-

dling characteristics and could also lead

to a serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also result in

failure of other vehicle components.

•Before taking a long trip, or whenever

you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire

pressure gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified level.

•For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-27

Tire and Loading Information label

䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum number of

occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: See "Vehicle loading

information" in the "10. Technical infor-

mation" section.

䊊

3Original size: The size of the tires origi-

nally installed on the vehicle at the fac-

tory.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this

pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moder-

ate speeds. The recommended cold tire

inflation is set by the manufacturer to

provide the best balance of tire wear,

vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise,

etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Tire size — see "Tire labeling" later in this

section.

䊊

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire size

(if so equipped).

SDI2703

8-28 Do-it-yourself

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto

the valve stem. Do not press too hard or

force the valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air escap-

ing from the tire is heard while checking

the pressure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem

and compare it to the specification shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much

air is added, press the core of the valve

stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem

to release pressure. Recheck the pressure

and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, in-

cluding the spare.

Tire Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front Rear

235/50

R18

(2WD) 35 psi,

240kPa

35 psi,

240kPa

(4WD) 35 psi,

240kPa

29 psi,

200kPa

235/45 R19 32 psi,

220kPa

32 psi,

220kPa

Spare tire NONE

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the side-

wall of all tires. This information identifies

and describes the fundamental characteris-

tics of the tire and also provides the tire iden-

tification number (TIN) for safety standard

certification. The TIN can be used to identify

the tire in case of a recall.

SDI1949Z SDI1575Z

Example

Do-it-yourself 8-29

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

1 P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for

passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this

information.)

2 Three-digit number (215): This number

gives the width in millimeters of the tire

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3 Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s

ratio of height to width.

4 R: The “R” stands for radial.

5 Two-digit number (16): This number is the

wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6 Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a mea-

surement of how much weight each tire

can support. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is not re-

quired by law.

7 H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive

the vehicle faster than the tire speed rat-

ing.

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1 DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of

Transportation”. The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or right of the

Tire Identification Number.

2 Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-

cation mark

3 Two-digit code: Tire size

4 Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5 Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week of

2003. If these numbers are missing, then

look on the other sidewall of the tire.

SDI1606Z

Example

NDI1623

Example

8-30 Do-it-yourself

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,

and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name”

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are de-

fined throughout this section, Intended Out-

board Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that con-

tains a whitewall, bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand and/or model

name molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other sidewall of the

tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particular side

that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

•When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e, summer, all season or snow) and

construction. An INFINITI retailer may

be able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

•Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and they may not match the po-

tential maximum vehicle speed. Never

exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

•Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so may

result in a circumference difference be-

tween tires on the front and rear axles

which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system to malfunction

resulting in personal injury or death, ex-

cessive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and differ-

ential gears.

•For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation“ (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

CAUTION

ONLY use spare tires specified for the

model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked and

corrected as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all year,

including snowy and icy road conditions. All

season tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires

have better snow traction than all season

tires and may be more appropriate in some

areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance on

dry roads. Summer tire performance is sub-

stantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S

on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or

icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use

of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rating

to the original equipment tires. If you do not,

it can adversely affect the safety and han-

dling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of

the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be

the same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires. Skid and traction ca-

pabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry

surfaces may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked and

corrected as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed

on 235/45 R19 or 235/50 R18 size tires.

Installation of the tire chains/cables on

235/45 R19 or 235/50 R18 size tires will

cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to

use tire chains/cables, you should install

215/60 R17 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-

ing to location. Check the local laws before

installing tire chains. When installing tire

chains, make sure that they are of proper size

for the tires on your vehicle and are installed

according to the chain manufacturer’s in-

structions.

Use chain tensioners when recommended by

the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight

fit. Loose end links of the tire chains must be

secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire

(TEMPORARY USE ONLY).

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads

which are clear of snow. Driving with chains

in such conditions can cause damage to the

various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

䊊

1: Wear indicator

䊊

2: Location mark

TIRE WEAR AND DAMAGE

WARNING

•Tires should be periodically inspected

for wear, cracking, bulging or objects

caught in the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire should be replaced immediately.

•The original tires have a built-in tread

wear indicator. When the wear indicator

is visible, the tire should be replaced.

•Tires degrade with age and use. Have

tires, including the spare, over 6 years

old checked by a qualified technician be-

cause some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as necessary to

prevent tire failure and possible per-

sonal injury.

•Improper service of the spare tire may

result in serious personal injury. If it is

necessary to repair the spare tire, it is

recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

•For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Tires should be periodically inspected for

wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in

the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire should be

replaced immediately.

The original tires have a built-in tread wear

indicator. When the wear indicator is visible,

the tire should be replaced.

Improper servicing of a tire may result in se-

rious personal injury. If it is necessary to re-

pair a tire, it is recommended you contact an

INFINITI retailer.

SDI1663Z

Do-it-yourself 8-33

TIRE ROTATION

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replacing

procedures, refer to "Flat tire" in the "6. In

case of emergency" section. As soon as pos-

sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 96 ft-lb (130

N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specifications at all times. It is recommended

that wheel nuts be tightened to specification

at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

•After rotating the tires, check and ad-

just the tire pressure.

•Do not include the spare tire in the tire

rotation.

•For additional information regarding

tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety In-

formation" (US) or "Tire Safety Infor-

mation" in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

REPLACING WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING

Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even

if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and could

fail without warning.

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

speed rating and load carrying capacity as

originally equipped. (See "Wheels and Tires" in

the "9. Maintenance and Schedules" section

for recommended types and sizes of tires and

wheels.)

If the wheels are changed for any reason,

always replace with wheels which have the

same offset dimension. Wheels of a different

offset could cause early tire wear, possibly

degraded vehicle handling characteristics

and/or interference with the brake discs/

drums. Such interference can lead to de-

creased braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear.

Confirm the following for the TPMS:

WARNING

•The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of dif-

ferent brands, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), or tread patterns can

adversely affect the ride, braking, han-

dling, VDC system, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clear-

ance, speedometer calibration, head-

light aim and bumper height. Some of

these effects may lead to accidents and

could result in serious personal injury.

•For 2WD models, if your vehicle was

originally equipped with 4 tires that

were the same size and you are only re-

placing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of ve-

hicle control in some driving conditions

and cause an accident and personal in-

jury.

•If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same offset dimension. Wheels

of a different offset could cause prema-

ture tire wear, degrade vehicle handling

characteristics, affect the VDC system

and/or interference with the brake

discs. Such interference can lead to de-

creased braking efficiency and/or early

8-34 Do-it-yourself

brake pad wear. For additional informa-

tion on wheel offset dimensions, refer to

"Wheels and Tires" in the "9. Mainte-

nance and Schedules" section.

•When a replacement tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately 1

minute. The light will remain on after 1

minute. Contact an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible for tire replacement

and/or system resetting.

•Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

•The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it

is not handled correctly. Be careful when

handling the TPMS sensor.

•When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID

registration may be required. It is rec-

ommended that you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for ID registration.

•Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by INFINITI. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

•Be sure that the valve stem caps are cor-

rectly fitted. Otherwise the valve may

be clogged up with dirt and cause a mal-

function or loss of pressure.

•Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been repaired.

Such wheels or tires could have struc-

tural damage and could fail without

warning.

•The use of retread tires is not recom-

mended.

•For additional information regarding

tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety In-

formation" (US) or "Tire Safety Infor-

mation" (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

•Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

•Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside of

the vehicle is washed.

•Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-

ing the wheels.

•Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

•INFINITI recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in ar-

eas where it is used during winter.

WHEEL BALANCE

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-

dling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed

with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balanc-

ing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to

mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to "Important Tire Safety Information"

(US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada)

in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

MEMO

8-36 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and Schedules

Maintenance requirements ................9-2

General maintenance..................9-2

Scheduled maintenance ................9-2

Where to go for service ................9-2

General maintenance....................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . .9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items ......9-5

Emission control system maintenance .......9-6

Chassis and body maintenance ...........9-6

Maintenance schedules ..................9-7

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating systems ...................9-7

Oil change monitor ...................9-7

Maintenance service messages ...........9-7

Standard maintenance..................9-10

Emission control system maintenance

(For 2.0L turbo gasoline engine) .........9-10

Chassis & body maintenance ............9-13

Maintenance log......................9-15

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is

essential to maintain your vehicle’s good me-

chanical condition, as well as its emission and

engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the specified maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives the

proper maintenance care. You are a vital link

in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-

to-day operation of the vehicle. They are es-

sential if your vehicle is to continue to operate

properly. It is your responsibility to perform

these procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks and inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician, or if you pre-

fer, an INFINITI retailer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed under "Mainte-

nance schedules" later in this section are re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals.

However under severe driving conditions, ad-

ditional or more frequent maintenance will be

required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the sys-

tems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the latest

service information through technical bulle-

tins, service tips and training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on INFINITI

vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI retail-

er’s service department can perform the ser-

vice needed to meet the maintenance re-

quirements on your vehicle.

During normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section.

If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations

or smells, be sure to check for the cause or

have an INFINITI retailer do it promptly. In

addition, it is recommended you notify an

INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are

required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe "Explanation of general

maintenance items" later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless other-

wise specified.

Doors and engine hood:

Check that all doors, the lift gate and the

engine hood operate smoothly. Also make

sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary

latch keeps the hood from opening when the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and Schedules

primary latch is released. When driving in ar-

eas using road salt or other corrosive materi-

als, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*:

Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make

sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights,

turn signal lights, and other lights are all op-

erating properly and installed securely. Also

check the aim of the headlights.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*:

When checking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loose

wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km). Tires marked with directional

indicators can only be rotated between front

and rear. Make sure that the directional indi-

cators point in the direction of wheel rotation

after the tire rotation is completed.

Tires*:

Check the pressure with a gauge often and

always prior to long distance trips. Adjust the

pressure in all tires to the pressure specified.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive

wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components:

Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal,

valve core and cap when the tires are re-

placed due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance:

If the vehicle should pull to either side while

driving on a straight and level road, or if you

detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there

may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at nor-

mal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, re-

fer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield:

Clean the windshield on a regular basis.

Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified

repair facility.

Wiper blades*:

Check for cracks or wear if not functioning

correctly. Replace as necessary.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning

the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal:

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

make sure that the pedal does not catch or

require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-

nism:

On a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is

held securely when P (Park) has been acti-

vated, without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal*:

Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the

brake pedal suddenly goes down further than

normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle

seems to take longer to stop, have your ve-

hicle checked immediately. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes:

Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle

to one side when applied.

Maintenance and Schedules 9-3

Parking brake*:

Check the parking brake operation regularly.

Also make sure that the vehicle is held se-

curely on a fairly steep hill when only the

parking brake is applied. If the parking brake

needs adjustment, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Seats:

Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches

lock securely in every position. Check that the

head restraints move up and down smoothly

and that the locks (if so equipped) hold se-

curely in all latched positions.

Seat belts:

Check that all parts of the seat belt system

(for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and

retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt

webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel:

Check for changes in the steering condition,

such as excessive free play, hard steering or

strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes:

Make sure that all warning lights and chimes

are operating properly.

Windshield defroster:

Check that the air comes out of the defroster

outlets properly and in good quantity when

operating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*:

Check that the wipers and washer operate

properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time

you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*:

Except for maintenance free battery, check

the fluid level in each cell. It should be be-

tween the “UPPER” and “LOWER” lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of

the battery fluid level.

NOTE

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone

chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*:

Make sure that the brake fluid level is be-

tween the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the res-

ervoir.

Coolant level*:

Check the coolant level when the engine is

cold.

Engine drive belt(s)*:

Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn,

cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*:

Check the level after parking the vehicle on a

level spot and turning off the engine. Wait

more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

Exhaust system:

Make sure there are no loose supports,

cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust

seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust

fumes, immediately have the exhaust system

inspected. It is recommended you visit an

9-4 Maintenance and Schedules

INFINITI retailer for this service. See "Precau-

tions when starting and driving" in the "5.

Starting and driving" section.

Fluid leaks:

Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or

other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been

parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you

should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes

are evident, check for the cause and have it

corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses:

Check the front of the radiator and clean off

any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have

accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no

cracks, deformation, rot or loose connec-

tions.

Underbody:

The underbody is frequently exposed to cor-

rosive substances such as those used on icy

roads or to control dust. It is very important to

remove these substances, otherwise rust will

form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and

around the exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt may

accumulate. For additional information, see

"Cleaning exterior" in the "7. Appearance and

care" section.

Windshield washer fluid*:

Check that there is adequate fluid in the res-

ervoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the sched-

uled maintenance items that should be regu-

larly checked or replaced. The maintenance

schedule indicates at which mileage/time in-

tervals each item requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your

vehicle requires that some items be checked

during normal day-to-day operation. Refer to

"General maintenance" in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. You

are not required to perform maintenance on

these items in order to maintain the warran-

ties which come with your vehicle. Other

maintenance items and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can

be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section in

Chapter 8.

NOTE

INFINITI does not advocate the use of non-

OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against perform-

ing these services on an INFINITI product.

Many of the aftermarket flushing systems

use non-OEM approved chemicals or sol-

vents, the use of which has not been vali-

dated by INFINITI.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and Schedules 9-5

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to "Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in

the "10. Technical information" section.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts

Engine air filter*:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving

for prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

check/replace the filter more frequently.

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to

use only Genuine INFINITI Engine Coolant or

equivalent in its quality (BASF Glysantin®

G40®). (For additional information, refer to

"Engine cooling system" in the "9. Mainte-

nance and Schedules" sectionnanceand

SchedulesMaintenance and Schedules" sec-

tion nanceand SchedulesMaintenance and

Schedules" section nanceand Schedules-

Maintenance and Schedules" section nance-

and SchedulesMaintenance and Schedules"

section nanceand SchedulesMaintenance

and Schedules" section nanceand Schedules-

Maintenance and Schedules" section nance-

and SchedulesMaintenance and Schedules"

section nanceand SchedulesMaintenance

and Schedules" section nanceand Schedules-

Maintenance and Schedules" section nance-

and SchedulesMaintenance and Schedules"

section nanceand SchedulesMaintenance

and Schedules" section.)

NOTE

Mixing any other type of coolant or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the rec-

ommended service interval of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the speci-

fied intervals. For recommended oil grade

and viscosity refer to "Recommended fluids/

lubricants and capacities" in the "10. Techni-

cal information" section calinformationTech-

nical information" section information"

section.

Fuel filter:

Replace the fuel filter and drain the water at

the specified intervals.

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections

for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new

plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation. Check

for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs

of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or dam-

aged parts immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums, & linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts

immediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler

and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration,

and damage. Tighten connections or replace

parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving

for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, re-

place the filter more frequently.

9-6 Maintenance and Schedules

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease

leakage. (4WD/AWD).

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspen-

sion parts, drive shaft boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of

oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently

Tire rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) according to the instructions un-

der "Tire rotation*" earlier in this section.

When rotating tires, check for damage and

uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,

transfer case oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at speci-

fied intervals.

To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and

economical driving, INFINITI provides two

maintenance schedules that may be used,

depending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain both

distance and time intervals, up to 120,000

miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most

people, the odometer reading will indicate

when service is needed. However, if you drive

very little, your vehicle should be serviced at

the regular time intervals shown in the sched-

ule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the same

mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE

ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING

SYSTEMS

Additional maintenance items for severe op-

erating conditions; should be performed on

vehicles that are driven under especially de-

manding conditions. Additional maintenance

items should be performed if you primarily

operate your vehicle under the following con-

ditions:

•Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles in

normal temperatures or less than 10 miles

in freezing temperatures.

•Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or low

speed driving for long distances.

•Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,

muddy or salt-spread roads.

•Towing a trailer, or using a camper or car-

top carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR

This vehicle is equipped with oil change moni-

tor. It calculates engine oil and filter change

interval base on driving conditions. Driving in

severe conditions will shorten the engine oil

and filter change interval. When the Engine

Oil – Service Due Now warning appears in

the vehicle information display, the engine oil

and filter need to be replaced.

NOTE

For vehicles operated in Canada, both stan-

dard and severe maintenance items should

be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE

MESSAGES

The maintenance service interval display in-

forms you of the next service due date.

NOTE

The maintenance service interval display

does not show any information on the engine

oil level.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and Schedules 9-7

The vehicle information display shows a ser-

vice message for a few seconds, for example:

•[Service A In .. days]

•[Service A Due]

•[Service A Exceeded by .. days]

Depending on the operating conditions of the

vehicle, the remaining time or distance until

the next service due date is displayed.

The letter indicates which service is due. A

stands for a minor service and B for a major

service. A number or another letter may be

displayed after the letter.

Only for certain countries: the position after

the letter A or B indicates any necessary ad-

ditional maintenance work. If you notify an

INFINITI retailer of this display, you will re-

ceive a statement on the associated costs.

The maintenance service interval display

does not take into account any periods of

time during which the battery is discon-

nected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service

schedule:

Note down the service due date displayed in

the vehicle information display before dis-

connecting the battery.

After reconnecting the battery, subtract the

battery disconnection periods from the ser-

vice date shown on the display.

Hiding service messages

Press the <OK> or button on the steer-

ing wheel.

Displaying service messages

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Press the or button on the

steering wheel to select the [Serv.] menu.

3. Press the or button to select

[Maintenance] submenu and confirm by

pressing the OK button.

The service due date appears in the vehicle

information display.

Information about service

Resetting the maintenance service interval

display:

CAUTION

If the maintenance service interval display

has been inadvertently reset, this setting

can be corrected at an INFINITI retailer.

Have service work carried out as described

in the Maintenance Schedule. This may

otherwise lead to increased wear and dam-

age to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

An INFINITI retailer will reset the mainte-

nance service interval display after the service

work has been carried out. You can also ob-

tain further information on maintenance

work, for example.

Special service requirements:

The prescribed service interval is based on

normal operation of the vehicle. Service work

will need to be performed more often if the

vehicle is operated under arduous conditions

or increased loads, for example:

•Regular city driving with frequent interme-

diate stops

•If the vehicle is primarily used to travel

short distance

9-8 Maintenance and Schedules

•For frequent operation in mountainous

terrain or on poor road surfaces

•If the engine is often left idling for long

periods

In these or similar operating conditions, have,

for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil

filter changed more frequently. The tires must

be checked more frequently if the vehicle is

operated under increased loads. Further in-

formation can be obtained at an INFINITI

retailer.

Maintenance and Schedules 9-9

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,

individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (FOR 2.0L TURBO GASOLINE ENGINE)

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION miles x

1,000

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles,

kilometers or months, whichever

comes first.

51015202530354045505560

(km x

1,000)

(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)

months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

Engine compartment See NOTE

(1)

V-belt See NOTE

(2)

I* I* I*

Replace every 155,000 miles or 180 months

Air cleaner filter Replace every 45,000 miles or 48 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE

(3)

Engine coolant* Replace every 155,000 miles or 180 months

Engine oil R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R

Spark plugs Replace every 45,000 miles or 48 months

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-10 Maintenance and Schedules

NOTE:

(1) All visible parts checked for leaks and damage.

(2) In visible area only.

(3) Maintenance-free item.

* Maintenance items and intervals with ”*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required

Maintenance and Schedules 9-11

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION miles x

1,000

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilo-

meters or months, whichever

comes first.

65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

(km x

1,000)

(104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)

months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144

Engine compartment See NOTE

(1)

V-belt See NOTE

(2)

I* I* I*

Replace every 155,000 miles or 180 months

Air cleaner filter Replace every 45,000 miles or 48 months

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE

(3)

Engine coolant* Replace every 155,000 miles or 180 months

Engine oil R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R

Spark plugs Replace every 45,000 miles or 48 months

NOTE:

(1) All visible parts checked for leaks and damage.

(2) In visible area only.

(3) Maintenance-free item.

* Maintenance items and intervals with ”*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required

9-12 Maintenance and Schedules

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION miles x

1,000

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles,

kilometers or months, whichever

comes first.

51015202530354045505560

(km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)

months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors I I I I I I

Brake fluid R R R

Automatic transmission fluid I I I

Automatic transmission fluid and

filter

Replace every 60,000 miles or 60 months

Differential gear oil I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and

suspension parts

III

Tire rotation See NOTE

(1)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots

(4WD models)

IIIIII

Exhaust system I I I

In-cabin microfilter R R R

I-key battery R R R R

NOTE:

(1) Refer to "Tire rotation*" earlier in this section.

Maintenance and Schedules 9-13

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION miles x

1,000

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilo-

meters or months, whichever

comes first.

65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

(km x

1,000)

(104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)

months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors I I I I I I

Brake fluid R R R

Automatic transmission fluid I I I

Automatic transmission fluid and

filter

Replace every 60,000 miles or 60 months

Differential gear oil I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and

suspension parts

III

Tire rotation See NOTE

(1)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots

(4WD models)

IIIIII

Exhaust system I I I

In-cabin microfilter R R R

I-key battery R R R R

NOTE:

(1) Refer to "Tire rotation*" earlier in this section.

9-14 Maintenance and Schedules

5,000 Miles or 6 Months 10,000 Miles or 12 Months 15,000 Miles or 18 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles or 24 Months 25,000 Miles or 30 Months 30,000 Miles or 36 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles or 42 Months 40,000 Miles or 48 Months 45,000 Miles or 54 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and Schedules 9-15

50,000 Miles or 60 Months 55,000 Miles or 66 Months 60,000 Miles or 72 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles or 78 Months 70,000 Miles or 84 Months 75,000 Miles or 90 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles or 96 Months 85,000 Miles or 102 Months 90,000 Miles or 108 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

9-16 Maintenance and Schedules

95,000 Miles or 114 Months 100,000 Miles or 120 Months 105,000 Miles or 126 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles or 132 Months 115,000 Miles or 138 Months 120,000 Miles or 144 Months

Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Retailer

Stamp:

Maintenance and Schedules 9-17

MEMO

9-18 Maintenance and Schedules

10 Technical information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . .10-2

Fuel recommendation ................10-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . .10-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations...................10-6

Engine specifications ...................10-7

Wheels and Tires .....................10-8

Dimensions .........................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country ..........................10-10

Vehicle identification ..................10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (chassis

number) ........................10-11

Engine serial number ................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. Certification label. . . .10-11

Emission control information label .......10-12

Tire and loading information label ........10-12

Air conditioner specification label ........10-12

Installing front license plate ..............10-13

Vehicle loading information ..............10-14

TERMS ........................10-14

Vehicle load capacity ................10-15

Loading tips .....................10-16

Measurement of weights .............10-16

Trailer towing ......................10-16

Uniform tire quality grading ..............10-17

Treadwear ......................10-17

Traction AA, A, B and C ..............10-17

Temperature A, B and C ..............10-17

Emission control system warranty .........10-18

Reporting safety defects ...............10-18

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test .............................10-19

Event data recorders (EDR) (if so equipped) . . .10-20

Owner's manual/service manual order

information ........................10-20

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill quantities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedures instructed

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US measure Imperial Measure

Fuel tank 50 L

(4WD: 56 L)

13.2 gal

(4WD: 14.8 gal

11 gal

(4WD: 12.3 gal) –See "Fuel recommendation" later in this section.

Engine oil (*)

Drain and refill with oil filter

change

5.6 L 6 qt 5 qt The approximate capacities listed are for refilling during an engine oil change. *:

For additional information, see "Changing engine oil" in the "8. Do-it-yourself"

section.

2.0L gasoline engine:

–Engine oil meeting specification MB229.5, viscosity SAE 0W-30 or equivalent

–As an alternative to this recommended oil, engine oils meeting specification

MB229.5, viscosity SAE 0W-40, 5W-30 and 5W-40 may be used and meet

all specifications and requirements necessary to maintain the new vehicle

limited warranty.

For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" later in

this section.

Cooling system

with Reservoir

7.6 8.1 qt 6.7 qt –Genuine INFINITI Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality

BASF Glysantin® G40®

–Use Genuine INFINITI Engine Coolant, or equivalent in its quality, in order to

avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by

the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Note that any repairs for incidents

with the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may

not be covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the

warranty period.

Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF)

6.21 L 6.6 qt 5.5 qt Shell DCT-M1

Brake fluid Refill to the proper fluid level accord-

ing to the instructions in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

–Genuine INFINITI brake fluid DOT4+ or equivalent.

–Never mix different types of fluids.

Differential gear oil 0.74 L 0.8 qt 0.65 qt –Castrol BOT 355 75W-85

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US measure Imperial Measure

Multi-purpose grease — — — –NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioner system refrig-

erant

—— —

–HFC-134a

Air conditioner system lubri-

cant

—— —

–INFINITI A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 95).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rat-

ing of at least 89 AKI number (Research oc-

tane number 93) may be temporarily used,

but only under the following precautions:

•Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

•Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt ac-

celeration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for maxi-

mum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

•Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol system, and may also affect war-

ranty coverage.

•Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will dam-

age the three-way catalyst.

•Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically de-

signed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not cov-

ered by the INFINITI New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

•Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled

to indicate MMT content, so you may

have to consult your gasoline retailer for

more details. Note that Federal and

California laws prohibit the use of MMT

in reformulated gasoline.

•U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that

region.

Technical information 10-3

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications where it is available.

Many of the automobile manufacturers de-

veloped this specification to improve emis-

sion system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gasoline

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-

mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-

cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air

and suggests that you use reformulated

gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and

methanol with or without advertising their

presence. INFINITI does not recommend the

use of fuels of which the oxygenate content

and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI

cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please

take the following precautions as the usage

of such fuels may cause vehicle performance

problems and/or fuel system damage.

•The fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that recom-

mended for unleaded gasoline.

•If an oxygenate-blend, other than a

methanol blend, is used, it should contain

no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE

may, however, be added up to 15%.)

•E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the

emission control devices and systems of

the vehicle and should not be used. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered by

the INFINITI New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

•If a methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 5% methanol (methyl

alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also con-

tain a suitable amount of appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not

properly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors, such

methanol blends may cause fuel system

damage and/or vehicle performance

problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, im-

mediately change to a nonoxygenate fuel or a

fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refuel-

ing. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to

run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your

vehicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied with small, square, orange and black la-

bel with the common abbreviation or the ap-

propriate percentage for that region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Ve-

hicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or the appro-

priate percentage for that region.

10-4 Technical information

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive.

INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuel

containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely

affect vehicle performance, including the

emissions control system. Note that while

some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all

do, so you may have to consult your gasoline

retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel in-

jector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve

deposit removers, etc.) which are sold com-

mercially. Many of these additives intended

for gum, varnish or deposit removal may con-

tain active solvent or similar ingredients that

can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rat-

ing lower than recommended above can

cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe,

this can lead to engine damage. If you detect

a persistent heavy spark knock even when

using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or

if you hear steady spark knock while holding

a steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended you have an INFINITI retailer cor-

rect the condition. Failure to correct the con-

dition is misuse of the vehicle, for which

INFINITI is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knock-

ing, after-run and/or overheating. This in turn

may cause excessive fuel consumption or

damage to the engine. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer.

However, now and then you may notice light

spark knock for a short time while accelerat-

ing or driving up hills. This is no cause for

concern, because you get the greatest fuel

benefit when there is light spark knock for a

short time under heavy engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure sat-

isfactory engine life and performance. For

additional information, refer to "Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities"

earlier in this section.

Select only engine oils that meet the

MB229.5 specification and SAE viscosity

standard. These oils have the MB229.5

specification label on the container. Oils

which do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause en-

gine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is impor-

tant that the engine oil viscosity be selected

Technical information 10-5

based on the temperatures at which the ve-

hicle will be operated before the next oil

change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than

that recommended could cause serious en-

gine damage.

Outside Temperature Range

Anticipated Before Next Oil Change

GASOLINE ENGINE OIL

JVT0428X

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high—

quality genuine INFINITI oil filter. When re-

placing, it is recommended you use the genu-

ine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason

described in “Change intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and

filters that are not of the specified quality, or

exceeding recommended oil and filter change

intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to

engines caused by improper maintenance or

use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or

viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter change

intervals depend upon how you use your

vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

•Repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

•Driving in dusty conditions

•Extensive idling

•Stop and go “rush hour” traffic

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system of your vehicle

must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-

134a and the lubricant INFINITI A/C System

Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

10-6 Technical information

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil may

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replacement

of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle will

not harm the Earth’s ozone layer. However, it

may contribute in a small part to the global

warming effect.

Certain government regulations require the

recovery and recycling of any refrigerant dur-

ing automotive air conditioner system ser-

vice. An INFINITI retailer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system re-

frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI

retailer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

Model 2.0L Gasoline

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.268 x 3.622

(83.0 x 92.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

121.55 (1,991)

Idling speed rpm

DCT in N position 700

Ignition timing (BTDC) degrees

DCT in N position -10°CA to +35°CA BTDC at

700rpm

Spark plug Standard Platinum tipped

Spark plug gap in (mm) 0.028 (0.7)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Technical information 10-7

GT and Sport models:

Item Offset in (mm) Size

Road wheel 1.50 (38) 6.5J x 17

1.81 (46) 7.0J x 18

1.71 (43.5) 8.0J x 19

Tire size 215/60 R17 96V

235/50 R18 97V*

235/50 R18 97H* **

235/45 R19 95V*

* : Use of snow chains NOT permitted.

**: US only.

All Road models:

Item Offset in (mm) Size

Road wheel 1.61 (41) 6.5J x 17

(steel)

1.61 (41) 7.0J x 18

(alloy)

Tire size 215/60 R17 96V

235/50 R18 97V*

235/50 R18 97H* **

* : Use of snow chains NOT permitted.

**: US only.

WHEELS AND TIRES

10-8 Technical information

Dimension Model in (mm)

Overall length 174.2 (4425)

Overall width (incl. mirrors) 82.0 (2083)

Overall height GT without roof rails 58.9 (1495)

GT with roof rails 59.5 (1510)

Sport without roof rails 58.1 (1475)

Sport with roof rails 58.7 (1490)

Allroad without roof rails 58.7 (1515)

Allroad with roof rails 61.2 (1530)

Front track GT 17” wheels 61.9 (1572)

GT 18” wheels 61.3 (1556)

GT 19” wheels 61.5 (1561)

Sport 17” wheels 62 (1574)

Sport 19” wheels 61.5 (1563)

Allroad 17” wheels 61.7 (1566)

Allroad 18” wheels 61.5 (1561)

Rear track GT 17” wheels 61.9 (1573)

GT 18” wheels 61.2 (1555)

GT 19” wheels 61.7 (1566)

Sport 17” wheels 62.2 (1580)

Sport 19” wheels 61.7 (1567)

Allroad 17” wheels 62.0 (1574)

Allroad 18” wheels 61.7 (1566)

Wheelbase 106.3 (2700)

DIMENSIONS

Technical information 10-9

When planning to drive your INFINITI VE-

HICLE in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gasoline

vehicles must be operated with unleaded

gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle

to areas where appropriate fuel is not avail-

able.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, the vehicle specification

may differ.

When any vehicles are to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district, its

modification, transportation, registration,

and any other expenses which may result,

are the responsibility of the user. INFINITI is

not responsible for any inconveniences that

may result.

It is prohibited to cover, paint, weld, cut, drill,

alter or remove the Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifi-

cation for your vehicle and is used in the

vehicle registration.

JVT0352XZ

WHEN TRAVELING OR

REGISTERING IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (CHASSIS NUMBER)

The vehicle identification number is stamped

as shown.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifica-

tion label is affixed as shown. This label con-

tains valuable vehicle information, such as:

GVWR, GAWR, month and year of manufac-

ture, VIN, etc. Review it carefully.

NTI314 NDI1621

2.0L gasoline engines

NTI324

Technical information 10-11

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING

INFORMATION LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information Label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER

SPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

NTI323 NTI325 NTI322

10-12 Technical information

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm

that the following parts are enclosed in the

plastic bag:

Only use the recommended mounting posi-

tion, otherwise the obstruction of the Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC) sensor (if so

equipped) may result.

•License plate bracket

•License plate screws x 2

•Screw grommets x 2

1) Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2) Locate the center position 䊊

Aas illus-

trated. Line up the license plate bracket

under the top of the front bumper with

the tabs 䊊

B. Hold the license plate bracket

in place.

3) Mark the center of the holes 䊊

Cwith a

felt-tip pen.

4) Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 10

mm (0.39 in) drill bit at the marked loca-

tions. (Be sure that the drill only goes

through the bumper fascia.)

5) Insert the grommets into the holes in the

bumper fascia.

6) Install the license plate bracket with the

provided screws.

7) Install the license plate on to the bracket

with bolts that are no longer than 14 mm

(0.55 in).

NTI327

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical information 10-13

WARNING

•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

•Do not allow people to ride in any area of

vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts.

•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

•Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-

hicle) - vehicle weight including: standard

and optional equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight

does not include passengers and cargo.

•GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight

plus the combined weight of passengers

and cargo.

•GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total combined weight of the

unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

•GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-

mum weight (load) limit specified for the

front or rear axle. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

•GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) -

The maximum total weight rating of the

vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

•Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total

load capacity - maximum total weight limit

specified of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum

combined weight of occupants and cargo

that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer

tongue weight must be included as part of

the cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information label.

•Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the weight of total occupants

weight subtracted from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-14 Technical information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle

shown as “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading

Information label. Do not exceed the number

of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on

the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants

and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants,

then add the total luggage weight. Examples

are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your

vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capac-

ity. For example, if the XXX amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650

lbs) or 640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-

hicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to

your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the available cargo

and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

STI0445

Technical information 10-15

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that

you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See "Mea-

surement of weights" later in this section.)

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Information

label.

LOADING TIPS

•The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V. S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

•Do not load the front and rear axle to the

GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

•Properly secure all cargo to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a

sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

•Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could oc-

cur, or it can change the way your ve-

hicle handles. This could result in loss of

control and cause personal injury.

•Overloading could not only shorten the

life of your vehicle and the tires, but also

could cause unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This may

cause a premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident and

personal injury. Failures caused by over-

loading are not covered by the vehicle's

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts

that could affect the balance of your vehicle.

When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale

and weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads. Individual

axle loads should not exceed either of the

gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total

of the axle loads should not exceed the gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings

are given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove

items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Your vehicle was designed to be used to carry

passengers and luggage

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

10-16 Technical information

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must con-

form to federal safety requirements in addi-

tion to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and

one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-

tive performance of tires depends upon ac-

tual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have

poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to

the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-

pate heat when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical information 10-17

Your INFINITI is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For USA:

•Emission Defects Warranty

•Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your War-

ranty Information Booklet that comes with

your INFINITI. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it has become

lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

•INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your War-

ranty and Roadside Assistance Information

that comes with your INFINITI. If you did not

receive a Warranty and Roadside Assistance

Information, or it has become lost, you may

obtain a replacement by writing to:

•Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga,

Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA:

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your re-

tailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1- 888- 327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://

www.safercar. gov; or write to: Administra-

tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also ob-

tain other information about motor vehicle

safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-662-6200.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-18 Technical information

For Canada:

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately in-

form Transport Canada in addition to notify-

ing INFINITI.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds that

a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may request that INFINITI conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport Canada can-

not become involved in individual problems

between you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect

Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at

1-800-333- 0510. You may also report

safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec- Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motor ve-

hicle safety may be obtained from Transport

Canada’s Road Safety Information Center at

1-800-333- 0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers)

or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French

speakers).

To notify INFINITI of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Center toll free at 1-800- 361-4792.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with AWD before

it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the

wrong test equipment may result in trans-

mission damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready con-

dition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving pat-

terns. Usually, the “ready condition” can be

obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired

or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle

may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Be-

fore taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness con-

dition. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position without starting the engine. If the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on

steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10

seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”.

If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds,

the I/M test condition is “ready”.

It is recommended you contact an INFINITI

retailer to set the “ready condition” or to pre-

pare the vehicle for testing.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Technical information 10-19

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened.

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

•Sounds are not recorded.

This data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your ve-

hicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under nor-

mal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash inves-

tigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the ve-

hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI retailer,

other parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the in-

formation if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with

the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or

as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory trained technicians work-

ing at INFINITI retailers. Genuine INFINITI

Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:

www.infiniti-techinfo.com For current pric-

ing and availability of Genuine INFINITI

Owner's Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-

5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a Genuine INFINITI

Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this

model year and prior, it is recommended you

contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. For

the phone number and location of an

INFINITI retailer in your area call the

INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-

4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative

will assist you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) (IF

SO EQUIPPED) OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-20 Technical information

11 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .......2-8

Warninglight................2-8

Active sound enhancement .........5-70

Operation .................5-70

Adaptive Front lighting System.......2-67

Aids.......................5-63

Forward emergency braking system . .5-63

Hill Start Assist (HSA) ..........5-96

Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA)......5-71

Air bags ....................1-46

Front passenger air bag switch .....1-46

Overview...................0-2

Repair and replacement .........1-56

Supplemental Restraint System.....1-38

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-12

Air cleaner filter ................8-13

Air conditioner ................4-43

Heater and air conditioner........4-43

Refrigerant and lubricant . . . . . . . .10-6

Servicing ..................4-52

Specification label ............10-12

Air fresheners ..................7-4

Anti-theft alarm system ...........2-59

AppGarage.................4-100

Screen...................4-100

Settings screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101

Around View Monitor ............4-25

Moving object detection (MOD) ....4-38

Settings...................4-34

Audible reminders ..............2-14

Audio ......................4-53

Operation precautions ..........4-53

Settings...................4-82

Source bar .................4-66

System...................4-53

Automatic transmission ............8-7

Fluid (ATF) ..................8-7

Operation .................5-20

Battery......................8-9

Caution label ................8-9

Cold weather................5-97

Jump-starting ...............6-10

Replacement - Intelligent Key......8-20

Saver system................2-87

Vehicle battery ..............8-10

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system.....5-36

Bluetooth®..................4-85

Hands-Free Phone System. . .4-85, 4-132

Information ................4-98

Streaming audio .............4-131

Boosterseats.................1-35

Precautions.................1-35

Brakes .....................8-17

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System) . . . .5-92

Adjustment .................8-17

Fluid......................8-7

orward emergency braking system . . .5-63

Parking brake ...............5-27

Precautions.................5-91

System...................5-91

Warninglight................2-9

Break-in schedule ..............5-85

Brightness...................2-70

Instrument panel .............2-70

Capacities and recommendations .....10-2

Coolant ...................10-2

Fuel.....................10-2

Oil......................10-2

Refrigerant.................10-2

Cardholder..................2-80

Center multi-function control panel .....4-2

Changing ....................8-4

Engine coolant ...............8-4

Engine oil...................8-5

Engine oil filter ...............8-6

Tires and wheels .............8-34

Checking .....................8-4

Coolant level .................8-4

Engine oil level ................8-5

Child restraints .................1-19

Anchorage ..................1-23

ISOFIX installation .............1-24

Precautions .................1-20

Childsafety...................1-17

Rear door locks ................3-7

Cleaning......................7-3

Alloy wheels..................7-3

Chromeparts.................7-3

Exterior ....................7-2

Glass......................7-3

Interior.....................7-4

Leatherseatcovers.............7-6

Removing spots ...............7-3

Seat belts ...................7-5

Underbody ..................7-3

Washing ....................7-2

Waxing.....................7-2

Clock.......................2-77

Adjusting time................2-77

Coat hooks ...................2-81

Cockpit......................0-6

Overview ................0-6,2-2

Cold weather ..................5-97

Battery....................5-97

Driving on snow or ice. . . . . . . . . . .5-98

Engine coolant ...............5-97

Precautions .................5-97

Special equipment .............5-98

Tire equipment ...............5-97

Compact Disc (CD) ..............4-71

Player ................4-71,4-127

Compartment .................2-87

Connecting ...................4-90

Bluetooth® device .............4-90

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone .....4-88

Coolant .....................10-2

Capacities ..................10-2

Changing engine coolant ..........8-4

Checking coolant level ...........8-4

Cold weather ................5-97

Engine cooling system ...........8-3

Temperature gauge .............2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7

Environmental factors ............7-7

Cruisecontrol .................5-46

Canceling ..................5-48

Operation ..................5-47

Cupholders ..................2-80

Customer assistance ............4-124

Defroster....................2-63

Switch ....................2-63

Dimensions...................10-9

Engine ....................10-7

Tires.....................10-8

Display .....................2-70

Brightness..................2-70

Vehicle information display ........2-15

Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . .2-29

Doors .......................3-7

Liftgate....................3-7

Locking key ..................3-5

Locks .....................3-4

Map pocket .................2-83

Drive belts....................8-12

Driving......................5-20

Automatic Transmission .........5-20

Coldweather................5-97

Idle Stop/Start System ..........5-29

Onsnoworice...............5-98

Precautions..................5-4

Emergency key..................3-2

Engine ......................5-18

Before starting ...............5-18

Changing engine coolant ..........8-4

Changing engine oil .............8-5

Changing oil filter ..............8-6

Checking coolant level ...........8-4

Checking engine oil level ..........8-5

Coldweather................5-97

Compartment .............0-9,8-3

Coolingsystem................8-3

11-2 Index

Data.....................10-7

Oil .......................8-5

Serial number ...............10-11

Spark plugs .................8-13

Starting ...................5-18

Event data recorders (EDR) ........10-20

Exhaust gas ...................5-4

Precautions ..................5-4

Exterior......................7-2

Cleaning ....................7-2

Lights ....................8-22

Overview ...................0-3

Exterior rear view mirrors ..........3-18

Filter .......................8-13

Air cleaner ..................8-13

Engine Oil ...................8-6

Flat tire ......................6-2

Floormats....................7-5

Fluids......................10-2

Air conditioner ...............10-2

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ....8-7

Brake......................8-7

Coolant ....................8-3

Engine Oil ...................8-5

Recommendations and capacities ....10-2

Window washer ...............8-8

Foglights....................2-70

Bulbinformation..............8-22

Location ...................2-70

Forward emergency braking system ....5-63

Limitations..................5-67

Four-wheel drive ...............5-87

Freeing trapped vehicle ............6-15

Fuel.......................10-2

Capacities ..................10-2

Filler cap ...................3-16

Filler lid ....................3-16

Gauge .....................2-7

Fuel economy .................5-87

Fuel efficient driving tips ...........5-86

Fuses ......................8-17

Engine compartment............8-17

Passenger compartment .........8-18

Gasoline......................2-7

Gauge .....................2-7

Gauges ......................2-6

Engine coolant temperature ........2-6

Fuel.......................2-7

Meters and gauges .............2-4

Speedometer .................2-5

Tachometer ..................2-6

Glass........................7-3

Cleaning ....................7-3

Glassroof....................2-76

Sunshade operation ............2-76

Glovebox....................2-79

Hazard ......................6-2

Warning flasher switch ...........6-2

Headlights ...................8-25

Bulb replacement..............8-25

Replacement (bulb) ............8-24

Switch ....................2-64

Head restraints/Headrests ..........1-7

Adjustment ..................1-8

Installation ..................1-9

Removal....................1-8

Heatedseats..................2-72

Operation ..................2-72

Precautions.................2-72

Heater and air conditioner ..........4-43

Hill Start Assist (HSA).............5-96

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .....2-88

Ifyourvehicleisstolen...........2-91

Operating ..................2-91

Programming ................2-88

Troubleshooting ..............2-90

Hood.......................3-15

Closing....................3-15

Engine compartment .........0-9,8-3

Opening ...................3-15

Index 11-3

Hooks ......................2-81

Horn.......................2-71

Idle Stop/Start System ............5-29

Ignition .....................5-15

Switch.................5-15,5-16

Switch positions ..............5-15

Indicatorlights.................0-10

Overview ...............0-10,2-8

Indicators....................2-29

Vehicle information display ........2-29

INFINITI ....................4-98

InTouch Apps overview ..........4-98

INFINITI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Information menu ..............4-117

Settings...................4-122

Injuredpersons.................1-13

Inspection ...................10-19

Test.....................10-19

Instrument panel ................0-7

Overview ................0-7,2-3

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. . .5-49

Intelligent Key .................8-20

Battery replacement............8-20

Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) ........5-71

Precautions .................5-71

Interior ......................7-4

Cleaning ....................7-4

Lights — Operation.............2-86

Overview...................0-5

Interior rear view mirror ...........3-18

Interior rear view mirrors ...........3-18

iPod player ..................4-129

ISOFIX......................1-24

Installation..................1-24

Jump starting .................6-10

Keys .....................3-2,3-8

Emergency key ................3-2

Intelligent Key battery replacement . . .8-20

Locking....................3-5

Labels .....................10-12

Air conditioner...............10-12

Battery.....................8-9

Chassis number ..............10-11

Tires.....................10-12

Lane Departure ................5-33

Limitations .................5-33

Warning(LDW)...............5-31

Lights......................8-22

Adaptive Front lighting System .....2-67

Bulbinformation..............8-22

Fog light switch ..............2-70

Frontfoglights...............2-70

Headlights ..............2-64, 8-24

Interior....................2-86

LED headlight ...............8-24

Locations..................8-22

Luggage compartment ..........2-87

Maplights..................2-86

Rearfoglights ...............2-71

Rear personal lights ............2-87

Rearroomlight...............2-87

Vanity mirror lights .............2-87

Warning/Indicator lights . . . . . .0-10, 2-8

Loading information.............10-14

Locks .......................3-7

Childsafety..................3-7

Door locks...................3-4

Liftgate....................3-7

Locking inside lock knob ..........3-6

Locking key ..................3-5

Locking power door lock switch......3-6

Steeringlock.................5-15

Unlocking inside door handle........3-6

11-4 Index

Maintenance ...................9-2

General maintenance .........9-2,9-5

Log......................9-15

Precautions ..................8-2

Requirements .................9-2

Schedules ...................9-7

Seat belts ..................1-16

Standard maintenance ..........9-10

Maplights ...................2-86

Meters and gauges ...............2-4

Engine coolant temperature ........2-6

Fuel.......................2-7

Overview ...................0-8

Speedometer .................2-5

Tachometer ..................2-6

Mirrors .....................3-18

Anti-glare rear view mirror ........3-18

Exterior rear view mirrors .........3-18

Interior rear view mirrors .........3-18

Vanity mirror ................3-18

Vanity mirror lights .............2-87

Mobile Apps .................4-104

Monitorsystem................4-135

Troubleshooting .............4-135

Moving object detection (MOD) ......4-38

Oil........................10-2

Capacities and recommendations ....10-2

Changing engine oil .............8-5

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-6

Checking engine oil level ..........8-5

Overheating ..................6-13

Engine ....................6-13

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6

Overview .....................0-6

Cockpit .................0-6,2-2

Engine compartment .........0-9,8-3

Exterior....................0-3

Interior.....................0-5

Seats, Seat belts, Supplemental restraint

system .....................0-2

Parcelshelf...................2-84

Installation .................2-84

Removal ...................2-84

Parking.....................5-88

Brake.....................5-27

Parking sensor system ...........5-76

Sonar function ...............5-76

Parkingsensors................5-82

OFF switch .................5-82

Phone ......................4-88

Duringacall.................4-89

Favorites...................4-97

Makingacall................4-88

Phonebook .................4-97

Receiving a call ...............4-89

Selection...................4-88

Settings...................4-94

Power .......................3-6

Door lock switch ...............3-6

Outlet ....................2-78

Seat adjustment ...............1-3

Steering...................5-90

Windows...................2-73

Precautions...................4-53

Audio.....................4-53

Boosterseats................1-35

Brake.....................5-91

Childrestraints...............1-20

Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) ......5-71

Maintenance .................8-2

Safety.....................4-2

Seat belt usage ...............1-10

Starting and driving .............5-4

Supplemental Restraint System .....1-38

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).....................5-5

Pregnant women................1-12

Protection ....................7-7

Corrosion...................7-7

Index 11-5

Push-button ignition .............5-16

Push-starting ..................6-12

Rear seats ....................1-5

Folding.....................1-6

RearView monitor ...............4-17

Maintenance ................4-25

Repairing ....................8-24

Headlights..................8-24

Replacement ..................1-56

Air bags ...................1-56

Air cleaner filter...............8-13

Engine coolant ................8-4

Engine oil ...................8-5

Engine oil filter ................8-6

Intelligent Key battery...........8-20

Spark plugs .................8-13

Tires and wheels ..............8-34

Wiper blades ................8-13

Roof .......................2-76

Glass.....................2-76

Sunshade operation ............2-76

Roof Rack ...................2-84

Safety......................1-17

Children ...................1-17

Child safety rear door locks ........3-7

Head restraints ................1-7

Injuredpersons...............1-13

Precautions..................4-2

Pregnant women ..............1-12

Reporting safety defects ........10-18

Seat belts ................1-10,1-13

Adjustment .................1-16

Children-Infants..............1-18

Children-Larger..............1-18

Children - Small ...............1-18

Childsafety.................1-17

Cleaning ....................7-5

Maintenance ................1-16

Overview...................0-2

Precautions.................1-10

Warninglight................2-11

Warnings...................1-13

Seats .......................1-2

Adjustment ..................1-3

Adjustment (Manual) ............1-3

Boosterseats................1-35

Head restraints ................1-7

Heating....................2-72

Leather ....................7-6

Memory ...................3-21

Overview...................0-2

Rear ......................1-5

Rear seats - Folding .............1-6

Seat belts ..................1-10

Security system ................2-59

Servicing ....................4-52

Airconditioner...............4-52

Sonar function .................5-82

OFF switch .................5-82

Spark plugs ...................8-13

Information.................8-13

Replacement ................8-13

Speedometer...................2-5

Starting .....................5-18

Before starting the engine ........5-18

Engine ....................5-18

Jump-starting................6-10

Precautions..................5-4

Push-starting ................6-12

Steering.....................5-90

Power steering system ..........5-90

Steeringlock.................5-15

Steeringlock..................5-15

Steering wheel .................3-17

Adjustment .................3-17

Steering wheel controls ............4-3

Storage.....................2-79

Luggage hooks ...............2-82

Luggage net.................2-83

Map pocket .................2-83

Sunshade ....................2-76

Operation ..................2-76

Sun visors ....................3-18

Supplemental Restraint System .......1-38

Overview ...................0-2

11-6 Index

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....0-2

Air bags ....................0-2

Switches....................2-70

Brightness..................2-70

Defroster ..................2-63

Foglights..................2-70

Front passenger air bag ..........1-46

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Headlight ..................2-64

Ignition ....................5-15

Ignition positions ..............5-15

Parking brake ................5-27

Parking sensor system...........5-82

Power door lock ...............3-6

Push-button ignition ............5-16

Seat......................3-21

Seat adjustment ...............1-3

Sonar function ...............5-82

Turn signal..................2-66

Windshield de-icer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

Wiperandwasher.............2-60

Tachometer ...................2-6

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Precautions ..................5-4

Tire chains ...................8-32

Tires.......................8-34

Changing ..................8-34

Cold weather ................5-97

Equipment ..................5-97

Flat tire ....................6-2

Inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Placard...................10-12

Quality grading ..............10-17

Sizes.....................10-8

tire chains ..................8-32

Wear and damage .............8-33

Wheel balance ...............8-35

Wheels and tires ..........8-27,10-8

Touch panel ...................4-4

Operation ...................4-4

Towing .....................6-14

Recommendations .............6-14

Your vehicle .................6-14

Trailer.....................10-16

Towing ...................10-16

Transferring registration to another

country ....................10-10

Transmission ..................5-20

Automatic Transmission (AT)

operation ..................5-20

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ....8-7

Traveling ...................10-10

Turn signal ...................8-22

Bulbinformation..............8-22

Operation ..................8-22

USB connection .................4-4

Vanity mirror ..................3-18

Lights.....................2-87

Vehicle.....................4-102

Apps Manager ..............4-102

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) .......5-93

Vehicle identification ............10-10

Air conditioner label ...........10-12

Engine serial number ...........10-11

Number (VIN) (chassis number).....10-11

Number (VIN) plate ...........10-10

Tire and loading information label . . .10-12

Vehicle Immobilizer system..........5-14

Vehicle information display..........2-15

Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . .2-29

Vehicle loading information ........10-14

Ventilators ...................4-42

Voice Recognition system .........4-105

Command list ...............4-109

Giving voice commands .........4-106

Settings...................4-116

Voice recognition system ..........4-136

Troubleshooting .............4-136

Voice Recognition system .........4-107

Voice command screen .........4-107

Index 11-7

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-10, 2-8

Airbag....................1-56

Warnings....................2-29

Vehicle information display ........2-29

Warranty...................10-18

Emission control system.........10-18

Washing .....................7-2

Waxing ......................7-2

Wheel lock bolts .................6-9

Wheels .....................8-35

Balancing ..................8-35

Blocking....................6-5

Care......................7-3

Changing tires and wheels ........8-34

Installation..................6-8

Removal ....................6-6

Sizes.....................10-8

Wheel lock bolts ...............6-9

Wheels and tires ..........8-27,10-8

Windows ....................2-73

Window washer.................8-8

Fluid......................8-8

Windshield...................2-63

Defroster ..................2-63

De-icer switch ...............2-63

Wiper and washer switch .........2-61

Winter......................5-97

Battery....................5-97

Driving on snow or ice. . . . . . . . . . .5-98

Engine coolant ...............5-97

Precautions.................5-97

Special equipment .............5-98

Tire equipment ...............5-97

Wipers......................8-13

Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Rear - Operation ..............2-62

Washer nozzle ...............8-14

Wiper and washer switch. . . . .2-60, 2-61

11-8 Index

FUEL INFORMATION

Gasoline engine

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded

gasoline will damage the three-way

catalyst.

2.0L gasoline engine model:

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number 95).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rat-

ing of at least 89 AKI number (Research oc-

tane number 93) may be temporarily used,

but only under the following precautions:

•Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

•Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt ac-

celeration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for maxi-

mum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

•Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol system, and may also affect war-

ranty coverage.

•Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will dam-

age the three-way catalyst.

•Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E- 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered by

the INFINITI new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

•U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that

region.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL

See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca-

pacities" in the "9. Maintenance and Sched-

ules" section.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE

See the tire and loading information label

affixed to the driver’s side center pillar.

GASOLINE STATION INFORMATION

•In case of emergency ... 6-2

(Flat tire, engine will not start, overheat-

ing, towing)

•How to start the engine ... 5-18

•How to read the meters and gauges ... 2-4

•Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... 8-2

•Technical information ... 9-2

QUICK REFERENCE

H15-D

Printing : March 2017

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

OM18E0 0H15U0

2018 Infiniti QX30 | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation